manualshive.com logo in svg

Huawei Quidway NetEngine40E, Configuration Manual - Reliability

Share
Download
Huawei Quidway NetEngine40E Configuration Manual - Reliability Download Page 646

 peer 4.4.4.4 as-number 100
 peer 4.4.4.4 connect-interface LoopBack1
 peer 2.2.2.2 as-number 100
 peer 2.2.2.2 connect-interface LoopBack1
 #
 ipv4-family unicast
  undo synchronization
  peer 4.4.4.4 enable
  peer 2.2.2.2 enable
 #
 ipv4-family vpnv4
  policy vpn-target
  peer 2.2.2.2 enable
  peer 4.4.4.4 enable
 #
 ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
  import-route direct
  import-route static
#
 ip route-static vpn-instance vpna 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 10.2.1.1 track efm-
state gigabitethernet 3/0/0
#
return

l

Configuration file of PE3

#
 sysname PE3
#
 mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
 mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
isis 1
 network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
 link-protocol ppp
 ip address 100.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
 mpls
 mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
 link-protocol ppp
 ip address 100.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
 mpls
 mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
 ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
bgp 100
 peer 2.2.2.2 as-number 100
 peer 2.2.2.2 connect-interface LoopBack1
 peer 3.3.3.3 as-number 100
 peer 3.3.3.3 connect-interface LoopBack1
 #
 ipv4-family unicast
  peer 2.2.2.2 enable
  peer 3.3.3.3 enable
 #
 ipv4-family vpnv4
  policy vpn-target
  peer 2.2.2.2 enable
  peer 3.3.3.3 enable
  #
return

HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - Reliability

8 Ethernet OAM Configuration

Issue 02 (2014-09-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

629

Summary of Contents for Quidway NetEngine40E

Page 1: ...HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router V600R008C10 Configuration Guide Reliability Issue 02 Date 2014 09 30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD ...

Page 2: ... be within the purchase scope or the usage scope Unless otherwise specified in the contract all statements information and recommendations in this document are provided AS IS without warranties guarantees or representations of any kind either express or implied The information in this document is subject to change without notice Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ens...

Page 3: ...ation Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document Product Name Version HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router V600R008C10 Intended Audience This document is intended for l Commissioning Engineer l Data Configuration Engineer l Network Monitoring Engineer l System Maintenance Engineer Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined ...

Page 4: ...The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows Convention Description Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface Italic Command arguments are in italics Items keywords or arguments in brackets are optional x y Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars One item is selected x y Optional items are grouped in brackets and separa...

Page 5: ... all the changes made in earlier issues Changes in Issue 02 2014 09 30 This issue is the second official release Changes in Issue 01 2014 06 30 This issue is the first official release HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability About This Document Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd iv ...

Page 6: ...PEs LDP FRR TE FRR 8 1 4 2 Link Failure During Transmission 9 1 4 3 Failure on the Remote PE VPN FRR 11 1 4 4 Failure of Downlink Interface on the PE IP FRR 12 2 Interface Backup Configuration 14 2 1 Introduction of Interface Backup 15 2 1 1 Interface Backup Overview 15 2 1 2 Characteristics of the Interface Backup Supported by the NE80E 40E 16 2 2 Configuring the Active Standby Interface Backup 1...

Page 7: ...r an APS Group 47 3 3 3 Configuring a Working Mode for an APS Group 49 3 3 4 Optional Binding an APS Group to a BFD Session 51 3 3 5 Optional E APS Negotiation and Authentication Parameters 52 3 3 6 Adding Interfaces of an APS Group to a Trunk Interface 54 3 3 7 Checking the Configurations 55 3 4 Maintaining APS 55 3 4 1 Configure a command triggered switching mode for an APS group 56 3 5 Configur...

Page 8: ...4 5 Configuring the Rapid VRRP Switchback Function 146 4 6 Configuring a Fast VRRP Backup Group 148 4 7 Configuring a Unicast VRRP Backup Group 152 4 8 Configuring Basic Functions of a VRRP IPv6 Backup Group 154 4 8 1 Before You Start 154 4 8 2 Configuring a VRRP IPv6 Backup Group 156 4 8 3 Configuring VRRP Priorities on Interfaces in a VRRP IPv6 Backup Group 157 4 8 4 Optional Configuring VRRP IP...

Page 9: ...6 Backup Group 292 4 12 11 Example for Configuring VRRP IPv6 Backup Groups Working in Load Balancing Mode 297 4 12 12 Example for Configuring VRRP IPv6 Association 302 5 BFD Configuration 310 5 1 Introduction 312 5 1 1 BFD Overview 312 5 1 2 BFD Features Supported by the NE80E 40E 312 5 2 Configuring Single hop BFD 323 5 2 1 Before You Start 323 5 2 2 Enabling BFD Globally 324 5 2 3 Setting Up a B...

Page 10: ... 5 10 3 Establishing a BFD Session 349 5 10 4 Checking the Configurations 350 5 11 Adjusting BFD Parameters 351 5 11 1 Before You Start 352 5 11 2 Modifying the Detection Time 352 5 11 3 Configuring the BFD WTR 353 5 11 4 Adding the Description of a BFD Session 354 5 11 5 Setting the Priority of a BFD Session 355 5 11 6 Checking the Configurations 356 5 12 Globally Configuring the Destination Port...

Page 11: ...le for Configuring BFD for VPN Routes 411 5 17 12 Example for Configuring Sub interfaces for Dot1q VLAN Tag Termination to Support BFD 416 5 17 13 Example for Configuring Sub interfaces for QinQ VLAN Tag Termination to Support BFD 423 5 17 14 Example for Configuring Single hop BFD6 for a Layer 3 Physical Link 431 5 17 15 Example for Configuring Multi hop BFD6 434 6 GR Configuration 438 6 1 GR Intr...

Page 12: ... Channel 526 8 2 13 Associating CFM with VRRP 527 8 2 14 Maintaining Ethernet OAM 529 8 2 15 Configuration Examples 530 8 3 EFM Configuration 646 8 3 1 EFM Overview 646 8 3 2 Configuring Basic EFM Functions 652 8 3 3 Configuring Link Monitoring 658 8 3 4 Configuring Remote Loopback 662 8 3 5 Configuring Remote Fault Indication 666 8 3 6 Configuring EFM Association Functions 668 8 3 7 Maintaining E...

Page 13: ... a PW 940 9 4 3 Optional Configuring CC and CV for a PW 941 9 4 4 Optional Configuring LB to Be Performed at a Specified Time for a PW 943 9 4 5 Optional Configuring Frame LM for a PW 944 9 4 6 Optional Configuring Frame DM for a PW 946 9 4 7 Optional Enabling RDI for a PW 948 9 4 8 Checking the Configurations 949 9 5 Configuring MPLS TP OAM on an L2 L3 Network 951 9 5 1 Before You Start 951 9 5 2...

Page 14: ...h PW LSP E PW APS and MS PW Switching 1023 10 10 Configuration Examples 1024 10 10 1 Example for Configuring an Association Between Bit Errors and a Static Route for the Active Link 1024 10 10 2 Example for Configuring Bit Error Triggered Tunnel Switching 1033 10 10 3 Example for Configuring Bit Error Triggered RSVP TE Tunnel Switching 1058 10 10 4 Example for Configuring Bit Error Triggered Switc...

Page 15: ...Configuring User Information Backup in Shared IP Address Pool Mode 1164 11 5 6 Optional Configuring IP Addresses for Web Authentication and RADIUS Authorization Servers 1167 11 5 7 Binding the Remote Backup Profile to the User Access Interface 1169 11 5 8 Checking the Configuration 1169 11 6 Configuring Multicast Two node Hot Backup 1171 11 6 1 Before You Start 1172 11 6 2 Enabling a Multicast RBS...

Page 16: ... and Reachable VPN User Tunnel Protection Mode 1264 11 10 11 Example for Configuring Multicast Two node Hot Backup 1272 11 10 12 Example for Configuring L2TP Two Node Hot Backup 1288 11 10 13 Example for Configuring Dual System Backup for Distributed NAT Services 1297 11 10 14 Example for Configuring IPv6 Dual Device Hot Backup 1311 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration 1321 12 1 Configuration Overvi...

Page 17: ...ite Services in Centralized Deployment Scenarios 1365 12 6 5 Example for Configuring Inter chassis HA Backup for NAT64 Services in Centralized Deployment Scenarios 1371 12 6 6 Example for Configuring L2NAT Service Backup Between Two CGN Devices Distributed Deployment Mode 1380 12 6 7 Example for Configuring Inter chassis HA Backup for VPN NAT Services in Centralized Deployment Scenarios 1387 12 6 ...

Page 18: ...liability Technologies for IP Networks This section describes two typical reliability technologies failure detection and switchover 1 3 Reliability Technologies Supported by the NE80E 40E Reliability technologies for IP networks include failure detection technologies and protection switching technologies 1 4 Networking of Reliability over an IP Network This section describes FRR applicable scenari...

Page 19: ... This chapter focuses on reliability technologies applicable to the IP network over the Versatile Routing Platform NE80E 40E 1 1 2 Indices of Reliability Indices of reliability include MTTR MTBF and availability Generally the reliability of a product or a system is evaluated based on two indices namely Mean Time to Repair MTTR and Mean Time Between Failures MTBF MTTR The MTTR indicates the fault r...

Page 20: ...els and describes their objectives and implementation methods Table 1 1 Levels of reliability requirements Level Objective Implementation Method 1 Less faults in the software and hardware of a system l Hardware simplified design standardized circuits reliable application of components reliability control over purchased components reliable manufacture environment adaptability and reliability testin...

Page 21: ...tion technologies and common detection technologies l Special fault detection technologies include Automatic Protection Switching at the transport layer Eth OAM at the link layer MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching OAM for MPLS l Common fault detection technologies include the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection BFD that detects faults at all layers such as the data link layer and the network layer ...

Page 22: ...ally the interface status table is updated In addition during packet forwarding if the forwarding table contains load balancing entries that is several next hops the next hop is selected based on a certain rule and its outgoing interface is detected in the interface status table If the outgoing interface of one next hop is invalid another next hop is selected and its outgoing interface status is d...

Page 23: ...can enable fast switchover to respond to link failures and node failures between two PEs that serve as the start node and end node of a TE tunnel respectively Nevertheless MPLS TE FRR cannot deal with the failure of PEs that serves as the start node and end node on a TE tunnel When a PE fails the traffic can resume by end to end route convergence and LSP convergence The time of convergence relates...

Page 24: ... Ethernet MPLS offers an OAM mechanism entirely independent from upper and lower layers enabling the following features on the MPLS user plane l Detecting the TE LSP connectivity l Performing switchover when a link fails to provide services according to Service Level Agreements SLAs With the MPLS OAM mechanism the router can detect identify and locate a fault of MPLS layer effectively Then the fau...

Page 25: ...network applicable detection mechanisms It is used to detect and monitor the connectivity of a link or an IP route during forwarding packets To improve the network performance a communication failure between adjacent systems must be detected quickly and the standby channel must be created faster for communication recovery The BFD features are as follows l Detecting channel failures between adjacen...

Page 26: ...s of a session and VRRP can implement fast link switching OAM The OAM is a unidirectional detection mechanism Bidirectional OAM can be configured for bidirectional protection The detection end of OAM sends a packet to detect the link If the link works normally the other end can receive the detection packet timely If the receiver cannot receive the detection packet within a specified period a link ...

Page 27: ...g detection failure report and switchover For BFD and OAM the detection is carried out by sending fast detection packets through a preset path to detect the link status If the detection packets cannot pass through the link the packets are dropped To avoid the jitters the number of detection packets is specified When the number of the lost detection packets reaches the set value the link is conside...

Page 28: ...ure on the Remote PE VPN FRR In VPN FRR Fast ReRoute BFD can detect connectivity faults between PEs Figure 1 5 Networking diagram of VPN FRR application PE1 P1 P2 P3 PE2 PE3 PE4 P4 P5 P6 As shown in Figure 1 5 PE3 and PE4 access the VPN If the user network on the left of PE1 needs to communicate with the user network on the right of PE3 PE1 can access the user network on the right through PE3 and ...

Page 29: ...be applied quickly to the forwarding plane The switchover speeds up After BFD detects that the PE of the active next hop fails switchover is performed within a very short period which ensures high reliability 1 4 4 Failure of Downlink Interface on the PE IP FRR In IP FRR Fast ReRoute when a primary path between a CE and a PE fails traffic can be switched to a backup path Figure 1 6 Networking diag...

Page 30: ...e network neighbor relationship between PE1 and PE2 needs to be created and the primary and bypass paths are created for PE1 accessing CE HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 1 Reliability Overview Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 13 ...

Page 31: ... services while the standby interface does not transmit services 2 3 Configuring the Load Balancing Interface Backup Interface backup in load balancing mode means that traffic is balanced between the active interface and the standby interface 2 4 Maintaining the Interface Backup This section describes how to maintain the interface backup function 2 5 Configuration Examples Interface backup is perf...

Page 32: ...rfaces if1 if2 and if3 are backed up for each other For example if2 transmits services if1 and if3 are in the backup state and have their respective backup priorities The router traces the status of each interface When if2 fails the router enables the standby interface with a higher priority to replace if2 This ensures smooth and reliable transmission of services The interface backup mechanism div...

Page 33: ...ves as the active interface Figure 2 2 Active standby mode if2 if1 if3 if4 100 LAN In the active standby mode only one interface transmits services transmission all the time l When the active interface works normally all traffic flows pass through the active interface the standby interfaces like if1 and if3 remain in the standby mode even if the active interface is overloaded l The standby interfa...

Page 34: ...ansmits all services while the standby interface does not transmit services 2 2 1 Before You Start Before configuring interface backup in active standby mode familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the required data Applicable Environment The interface backup can be configured for multiple devices to improve their reliability through standby int...

Page 35: ...hover 2 2 2 Configuring a Standby Interface After a standby interface is configured for the active interface the standby interface can take over network traffic when the active interface fails Context Perform the following steps on the router that needs to be configured with the active standby interface backup Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface inter...

Page 36: ...l If the active interface is still in the Down state when the delay period expires the system switches traffic from the active interface to the standby interface l If the active interface restores within the delay switching does not occur Perform the following steps on the router that needs to be configured with the active standby interface backup Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view i...

Page 37: ...erface and the standby interface 2 3 1 Before You Start Before configuring interface backup in load balancing mode familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the required data Applicable Environment The interface backup can be configured for multiple devices to improve their reliability through standby interfaces In the load balancing mode if the f...

Page 38: ...dwidth of the active interface 4 Interval for checking the traffic on the active interface 2 3 2 Configuring a Standby Interface After a standby interface is configured for the active interface the standby interface and the active interface can transmit traffic together Context Perform the following steps on the router that needs to be configured with the load balancing interface backup Procedure ...

Page 39: ...sable threshold The percentage threshold for load balancing is set By default the system does not support the load balancing mode that is no threshold percentage is configured When the flow of the active interface reaches the pre defined upper limit enable threshold the router automatically enables an available standby interface with the highest priority This standby interface undertakes the servi...

Page 40: ... 2 3 5 Checking the Configurations By viewing the status of the active and standby interfaces or traffic statistics you can check whether the configurations are successful Prerequisites The load balancing interface backup function has been configured Procedure l Run the display standby flow command to check the flow statistics of the active interface working in load balancing mode l Run the displa...

Page 41: ...terface Backup By monitoring the operating status of the interface backup function you can view information about related interfaces during the interface backup process Context In routine maintenance you can select to run the following commands in any view to view the working status of the interface backup Procedure l Run the display standby state command in any view to check the configuration and...

Page 42: ...he active interface l POS 1 0 0 and POS 3 0 0 serve as standby interfaces of POS 2 0 0 l POS 1 0 0 takes a higher priority than that of POS 3 0 0 Figure 2 4 Networking diagram of configuring the active standby interface backup POS1 0 0 10 1 1 1 24 HostA 10 10 1 1 24 HostB 10 20 1 1 24 GE4 0 0 10 10 1 2 24 RouterA RouterB POS2 0 0 10 1 2 1 24 POS3 0 0 10 1 3 1 24 POS1 0 0 10 1 1 2 24 POS2 0 0 10 1 ...

Page 43: ...S 2 0 0 as the active interface and POS 1 0 0 and POS 3 0 0 as the standby interfaces POS 1 0 0 has a higher priority Immediate switching is adopted RouterB interface pos 2 0 0 RouterB Pos2 0 0 standby interface pos1 0 0 40 RouterB Pos2 0 0 standby interface pos3 0 0 20 RouterB Pos2 0 0 quit After the configuration display the state of the active standby interfaces and you can find that POS2 0 0 i...

Page 44: ...to 10 20 1 1 10 20 1 1 max hops 30 packet length 40 press CTRL_C to break 1 10 10 1 2 60 ms 60 ms 50 ms 2 10 1 1 2 50 ms 40 ms 70 ms 3 10 20 1 1 70 ms 70 ms 60 ms End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 1 255 255 ...

Page 45: ...nd standby interface together to transmit network traffic Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E As shown in Figure 2 5 Router A is connected to Router B The load balancing backup relationship exists among multiple interfaces on Router B POS 2 0 0 serves as the active interface and POS 1 0 0 and POS 3 0 0 serve as the load balancin...

Page 46: ...lowing data l The priority of the standby interface l The threshold of the load balancing percentage and the active interface bandwidth Procedure Step 1 Configure the network layer attributes Configure IP addresses of all interfaces as shown in Figure 2 5 For configuration details see Configuration Files in this section Configure a static route to Host B network segment on Router A RouterA system ...

Page 47: ...ay standby flow command to view traffic changes on POS 2 0 0 RouterB display standby state Interface Interfacestate Backupstate Backupflag Pri Loadstate Pos 2 0 0 UP MUP MU Pos 1 0 0 STANDBY STANDBY BU 40 Pos 3 0 0 STANDBY STANDBY BU 20 Backup flag meaning M MAIN B BACKUP V MOVED U USED D LOAD P PULLED G LOGICCHANNEL RouterB display standby flow Interfacename Pos2 0 0 Flow interval s 30 LastInOcte...

Page 48: ...2 0 0 ip route static 10 20 1 0 255 255 255 0 Pos3 0 0 return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 2 255 255 255 0 standby interface Pos1 0 0 40 standby interface Pos3 0 0 20 standby threshold 50 30 standby bandwidth 40000 interface P...

Page 49: ...0 ip route static 10 10 1 0 255 255 255 0 Pos3 0 0 return HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 2 Interface Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 32 ...

Page 50: ...t through two links Link reliability can be improved by configuring single device APS 3 3 Configuring E APS Inter device APS switchback can be performed by configuring E APS 3 4 Maintaining APS 3 5 Configuration Examples This section provides configuration examples of APS Each configuration example consists of the networking requirements configuration precautions configuration roadmap configuratio...

Page 51: ... preventing data loss and improving network reliability Figure 3 1 shows an SDH network is a supporting network and allows the establishment of large scale data communications networks with high bandwidth For example data networks A and B can communicate with each other by multiplexing services to SDH payloads and transmitting the payloads over fibers An APS enabled router can protect traffic on a...

Page 52: ...e chapter APS in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Feature Description Reliability APS Working Modes l When data is transmitted properly APS is performed in either 1 1 or 1 N 1 1 is used as an example mode 1 1 Two links work together The sender sends traffic on both the working and protect links and the receiver receives traffic from only the working link The 1 1 mode allows HUAWEI NetEngine80E 4...

Page 53: ... Interface level Both a working interface and a protection interface reside on a single sub card of a board Sub card level A working interface and a protection interface reside on two sub cards of a single board Board level A working interface and a protection interface reside on different boards of a single router Device level A working interface and a protection interface are configured on diffe...

Page 54: ...ed only when both the working and protect links are working properly After manual APS switching is performed services will switch to the working link if an SF or SD error occurs on the protect link Delayed Switchback WTR Time After a fault in the working link is rectified services automatically switch from the protect link to the working link During the switchback some service traffic is dropped b...

Page 55: ...create a trunk serial interface The trunk serial interface is added to a global Multilink Point to Point Protocol MP group increasing link bandwidth Association Between an E APS Group and PW Redundancy An E APS group is used to provide link reliability on the AC side and pseudo wire PW redundancy is used to provide link reliability on the public network side The primary and secondary PWs on the pu...

Page 56: ...he two E APS enabled routers The BFD session is established to track the mPWs and bound to the AC side interfaces on the two router The E APS group on the AC side interfaces is configured to track the BFD session l When dual bypass PWs are established and the E APS 1 1 unidirectional mode is used The configurations in this scenario are similar to the previous scenario with the exception that the A...

Page 57: ...rations are performed Context An APS group includes one working interface and one protection interface and they are the smallest units protected by APS The communication messages between the working interface and the protection interface are transmitted within the APS Group Specifying a working interface and a protection interface and adding them to an APS group are the prerequisites for APS opera...

Page 58: ...face NOTE In a single chassis APS scenario the working and protection interfaces may be on different subcards If the working interface is abnormal during the restart of the two subcards neither the configurations on the working interface nor the configurations on the protection interface can be restored Step 2 Specify an APS protection interface 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run...

Page 59: ...r NE80E 40E are being restored To prevent service loss the WTR time can be set on the NE80E 40E to delay a switchback Services can automatically switch from the protect link back to the working link in the specified WTR time after the working link becomes available Perform the following steps on a protection interface in an APS group Procedure l Configure an automatic protection switching mode for...

Page 60: ...tion interface view of the APS group is displayed 3 Run aps revert wtr time The WTR time is set for the APS group The value ranges from 1 to 12 minutes When setting the WTR time note the following items In 1 1 mode after a fault is rectified and the WTR time 5 minutes expires traffic automatically switches back to the working link NOTE If two different switchback delays are set on two protection i...

Page 61: ... 2 Run interface atm trunk interface number An ATM Trunk interface is created and the view of the ATM Trunk interface is displayed NOTE APS can be configured on the ATM interfaces and POS interfaces and CPOS interfaces The corresponding trunk interfaces are ATM Trunk and POS Trunk and CPOS Trunk In the following example the ATM Trunk configuration is used Step 3 Run quit The system view is display...

Page 62: ...hannel Wtr W State P State Switch Cmd Switch Result 1 Atm1 0 1 Atm1 0 2 10 ok ok NA idle total entry 1 HUAWEI display atm trunk 1 Interface Atm Trunk1 s state information is Operate status up Number Of Up Port In Trunk 2 PortName Status Active Status Atm1 0 1 Up Active Atm1 0 2 Up Inactive Display configurations of CPOS Trunk interfaces HUAWEI display cpos trunk 1 Interface Cpos Trunk1 s state inf...

Page 63: ...k so that devices can communicate with each other NOTE In a PPP based Layer 3 IP forwarding scenario if devices use a dynamic routing protocol the dynamic routes have to be re learned during an APS link switchover In the route convergence process which lasts for dozens of seconds service traffic may be lost To prevent this problem configure static routes on the APS interfaces of the master backup ...

Page 64: ...e is connected to a working link and the protection interface is connected to a protect link When an APS group works in 1 1 mode the working interface transmits traffic but the protection interface does not The protection interface takes over traffic after APS switching is performed When an APS group works in 1 1 mode both the working and protection interfaces transmit traffic The receiver receive...

Page 65: ...added to a single APS group 4 Run aps protect peer ip local ip The interface added to the APS group is specified as a protection interface Either of the following parameters can be configured l peer ip is the IP address of the router where the working interfaces that are in the same APS group as the protect group is located The value is usually the IP address of the loopback interface on the route...

Page 66: ...n be configured for an APS group The NE80E 40E supports APS working modes including automatic APS switching and delayed switchback with the wait to restore WTR time configured An APS working mode must be configured on a protection interface Context Automatic APS switching modes are classified into 1 1 bidirectional and 1 1 unidirectional The default automatic APS switching mode is 1 1 unidirection...

Page 67: ... traffic Configures APS to work in unidirectional mode If an optical fiber to an interface fails only the receiver switches its traffic to the protect link one plus one bidirection Configures APS to work in 1 1 mode Both the working link and the protect link transmit traffic Configures APS to work in bidirectional mode If an interface fails both the sender and the receiver switch their traffic to ...

Page 68: ... the switchback time must be the same on two APS devices at the RNC side and slave RSG side End 3 3 4 Optional Binding an APS Group to a BFD Session Context To monitor an E APS group a BFD session monitors an mPW between the working and protection interfaces on the AC side and the E APS group is bound to another BFD session If faults occur the working and protect devices can use BFD to notify each...

Page 69: ...utband channel at a specified interval PGP negotiation messages are exchanged periodically to verify E APS connectivity If no response arrives within a specified period the router considers its peer router faulty and does not perform E APS switching even though a switching trigger condition is met In addition to the interval at which negotiation messages are sent the E APS connection hold time can...

Page 70: ...o the value three times the interval at which APS negotiation messages are sent l Configure the authentication string for PGP messages 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number or controller cpos cpos number The working or protection interface view is displayed 3 Run aps authenticate simple key simple simple key cipher cipher key The authenticat...

Page 71: ...displayed Step 2 Run interface atm trunk interface number An ATM Trunk interface is created and the view of the ATM Trunk interface is displayed NOTE APS can be configured on the ATM interfaces and CPOS interfaces The corresponding trunk interfaces are ATM Trunk and CPOS Trunk In the following example the ATM Trunk configuration is used Step 3 Run quit The system view is displayed Step 4 Run inter...

Page 72: ...1 1 12 Atm1 3 0 protection channel 0 Active Unidirection 1 1 mode None Revert Mode KeepAlive Timer 1 seconds Hold Timer 3 seconds Local detect Signal Fail High priority on working side Group Work Channel Protect Channel Wtr W State P State Switch Cmd Switch Result 1 1 1 1 1 Atm1 3 0 NA NA ok NA switch After E APS is configured run the display aps group group id command on the router where the work...

Page 73: ...terrupted if a signal degrade SD error occurs on the protect link Services will switch back to the working link if a signal failure SF occurs on the protect link Manual APS switching can be performed only when both the working and protect links are working properly After manual APS switching is performed services will switch to the working link if an SF or SD error occurs on the protect link Perfo...

Page 74: ... gives a configuration example of APS based TDM on a CPOS interface A networking diagram is shown to demonstrate the configuration procedure The configuration example includes the networking requirements as well as the configuration roadmap procedure and files Networking Requirements TDMoPSN service can enable mobile operators to receive transparent transmission of 2G services between BTSs and BSC...

Page 75: ... can communicate with each other 2 Configure basic MPLS functions on the backbone network as well as the MPLS L2VPN functions on PE devices Establish the remote MPLS LDP peer relationship between PEs at both ends of the PW 3 Configure parameters for the TDM interface 4 Configure a PW template 5 Establish MPLS L2VC connections on PEs 6 Configure APS on PE2 Data Preparation To complete the configura...

Page 76: ...runk1 quit PE2 controller cpos 3 0 1 PE2 Cpos3 0 1 aps group 1 PE2 Cpos3 0 1 aps working PE2 Cpos3 0 1 quit PE2 controller cpos 3 0 2 PE2 Cpos3 0 2 aps group 1 PE2 Cpos3 0 2 aps protect PE2 Cpos3 0 2 aps mode one plus one unidirection PE2 Cpos3 0 2 quit PE2 interface cpos trunk 1 PE2 cpos trunk1 quit PE2 controller cpos 3 0 1 PE2 Cpos3 0 1 cpos trunk 1 PE2 Cpos3 0 1 quit PE2 controller cpos 3 0 2 ...

Page 77: ... pw template 1to3 200 2 Configure PE2 PE2 pw template 3to1 PE2 pw template 3to1 peer address 192 2 2 2 PE2 pw template 3to1 jitter buffer depth 20 PE2 pw template 3to1 tdm encapsulation number 40 PE2 pw template 3to1 quit PE2 interface trunk serial1 1 0 PE2 Trunk Serial1 1 0 mpls l2vc pw template 3to1 100 PE2 Trunk Serial1 1 0 undo shutdown PE2 Trunk Serial1 1 0 quit PE2 interface trunk serial1 2 ...

Page 78: ...M encapsulation number 40 jitter buffer 20 idle code FF rtp header disable local AC OAM State up local PSN State up local forwarding state forwarding local status code 0x0 remote AC OAM state up remote PSN state up remote forwarding state forwarding remote statuscode 0x0 BFD for PW unavailable manual fault not set active state active forwarding entry not exist link state up local VC MTU 1500 remot...

Page 79: ...ndo shutdown interface serial2 0 1 0 link protocol tdm mpls l2vc pw template 1to3 100 undo shutdown interface serial2 0 2 0 link protocol tdm mpls l2vc pw template 1to3 200 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 192 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 ...

Page 80: ...0 1 Cpos3 0 2 interface serial1 1 0 link protocol tdm mpls l2vc pw template 3to1 100 undo shutdown interface serial1 2 0 link protocol tdm mpls l2vc pw template 3to1 200 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 2 2 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 192 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 10 2 2 0 0 0...

Page 81: ...NOTE The NE40E X8 is used as an example Link interface numbers and link types may be different from those in real world situations As shown in Figure 3 6 mid range and low end devices are connected to the transport network through E1 links These E1 links are aggregated into a CPOS Trunk configured on Router A Router A uses timeslots to identify these devices The CPOS Trunk on Router A consists of ...

Page 82: ...lowing data l APS parameters l CPOS Trunk parameters l Global MP Group interface number Procedure Step 1 Configure single chassis APS 1 Configure single chassis APS on Router A HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterA RouterA controller cpos 1 0 0 RouterA Cpos1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA Cpos1 0 0 aps group 1 RouterA Cpos1 0 0 aps working RouterA Cpos1 0 0 quit RouterA controller cpos 2 0 0 Router...

Page 83: ...RouterA Trunk Serial0 2 0 quit 4 Restart Trunk Serial interfaces and the Global MP Group RouterA interface global mp group 0 RouterA Global Mp Group0 undo shutdown RouterA Global Mp Group0 quit RouterA interface Trunk Serial0 1 0 RouterA Trunk Serial0 1 0 undo shutdown RouterA Trunk Serial0 1 0 quit RouterA interface Trunk Serial0 2 0 RouterA Trunk Serial0 2 0 undo shutdown RouterA Trunk Serial0 2...

Page 84: ...nks status end End Configuration Files Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA controller Cpos1 0 0 undo shutdown aps group 1 aps working cpos trunk 0 controller Cpos2 0 0 undo shutdown aps group 1 aps protect aps mode one plus one unidirection cpos trunk 0 interface Cpos Trunk0 undo shutdown e1 1 unframed e1 2 unframed interface Global Mp Group0 undo shutdown interface Trunk Serial0 1 0 un...

Page 85: ...0 1 10 1 1 1 24 ATM1 0 2 ATM2 0 2 GE3 0 2 10 1 4 1 24 GE3 0 2 10 1 5 1 24 Loopback0 2 2 2 2 ATM 1 0 0 ATM 1 0 0 GE2 0 2 106 1 1 1 24 PE1 PE3 CE2 E APS Loopback0 3 3 3 3 Loopback0 1 1 1 1 ATM1 0 1 ATM2 0 1 P1 P2 PE2 Loopback0 4 4 4 4 Loopback0 5 5 5 5 GE2 01 10 1 1 2 24 GE2 0 2 10 1 2 2 24 GE3 0 2 10 1 5 2 24 GE3 0 2 10 1 4 2 24 GE2 0 2 106 1 1 2 24 GE2 0 2 10 1 2 1 24 Configuration Roadmap The con...

Page 86: ...ic eng level 1 2 PE1 isis 1 quit PE1 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 isis enable 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 quit PE1 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 isis enable 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 quit PE1 interface loopback 0 PE1 LoopBack0 isis enable 1 PE1 LoopBack0 quit Configure P1 P1 isis 1 P1 isis 1 is level level 1 P1 isis 1 network entity 2222 2222 ...

Page 87: ...t PE2 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 isis enable 1 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 quit PE2 interface loopback 0 PE2 LoopBack0 isis enable 1 PE2 LoopBack0 quit Configure PE3 PE3 isis 1 PE3 isis 1 is level level 1 PE3 isis 1 network entity 5555 5555 5555 5555 00 PE3 isis 1 graceful restart PE3 isis 1 cost style wide compatible PE3 isis 1 timer spf 1 1 50 PE3 isis 1 traffic eng le...

Page 88: ...oopBack0 ip address 3 3 3 3 32 P2 LoopBack0 quit P2 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 P2 mpls P2 mpls mpls te P2 mpls quit P2 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 2 P2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 mpls P2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 mpls te P2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 quit P2 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 2 P2 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 mpls P2 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 mpls te P2 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 quit Configure PE2 PE2 interface loopBack 0 PE...

Page 89: ...ck0 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 tunnel protocol mpls te PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 destination 4 4 4 4 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te tunnel id 1 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te path explicit path path1 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te reserved for binding PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te commit PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 quit PE1 interface tunnel 2 0 0 PE1 Tunnel2 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 PE1 Tunnel2 0 0 tunnel protocol mpls te PE1 Tunnel2 0...

Page 90: ...on PE2 PE3 and CE2 Configure PE2 PE2 interface atm 1 0 1 PE2 Atm1 0 1 undo shutdown PE2 Atm1 0 1 aps group 1 PE2 Atm1 0 1 aps working 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 PE2 Atm1 0 1 aps timers 1 180 PE2 Atm1 0 1 quit Configure PE3 PE3 interface atm 1 0 2 PE3 Atm1 0 2 undo shutdown PE3 Atm1 0 2 aps group 1 PE3 Atm1 0 2 aps protect 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 PE3 Atm1 0 2 aps mode one2one bidirection PE3 Atm1 0 2 aps revert 5 PE3...

Page 91: ...5 5 5 pw template pwt 2 tunnel policy ct2 secondary PE1 Atm1 0 0 1 mpls l2vpn redundancy independent PE1 Atm1 0 0 1 mpls l2vpn stream dual receiving PE1 Atm1 0 0 1 quit Configure PE2 PE2 mpls l2vpn PE2 l2vpn quit PE2 pw template pwt PE2 pw template pwt control word PE2 pw template pwt quit PE2 interface atm trunk 1 1 p2p PE2 Atm Trunk1 1 pvc 1 100 PE2 atm pvc Atm trunk1 1 1 100 quit PE2 Atm Trunk1...

Page 92: ...te peer 1 1 1 1 pw ttl auto calculate PE3 bfd session bfd discriminator local 333 PE3 bfd session bfd discriminator remote 444 PE3 bfd session bfd quit Step 6 Verify the configuration Run the display aps group 1 command on PE2 and PE3 to view E APS configurations PE2 display aps group 1 APS Group 1 Atm1 1 1 working channel 1 Active APS protection channel is 5 5 5 5 Group Work Channel Protect Chann...

Page 93: ...loopBack 0 ip address 1 1 1 1 32 mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls te explicit path path1 next hop 10 1 1 2 next hop 10 1 4 2 next hop 4 4 4 4 explicit path path2 next hop 10 1 2 2 next hop 10 1 5 2 next hop 5 5 5 5 interface tunnel 1 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 4 4 4 4 mpls te tunnel id 1 mpls te path explicit path path1 mpls te reserved for bindi...

Page 94: ...ving bfd bfd bfd1 bind pw interface atm 1 0 0 remote peer 4 4 4 4 pw ttl auto calculate discriminator local 222 discriminator remote 111 bfd bfd2 bind pw interface atm 1 0 0 remote peer 5 5 5 5 pw ttl auto calculate discriminator local 444 discriminator remote 333 return l Configuration File on P1 isis 1 is level level 1 network entity 2222 2222 2222 2222 00 graceful restart cost style wide compat...

Page 95: ...loopBack 0 ip address 3 3 3 3 32 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te return l Configuration File on PE2 isis 1 is level level 1 network entity 4444 4444 4444 4444 00 graceful restart cost style wide compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic eng level 1 2 interface gigabitEthernet 3 0 2 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 isis enable 1 interface loopBack 0 ip address 4 4 4 4 32 mpls l...

Page 96: ... mpls l2vpn pw template pwt control word interface atm trunk 1 1 p2p pvc 1 100 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 pw template pwt 1 tunnel policy ct mpls l2vc 5 5 5 5 3 bypass bfd bfd bfd bind pw interface atm 1 0 1 remote peer 1 1 1 1 pw ttl auto calculate discriminator local 111 discriminator remote 222 return l Configuration File on PE3 isis 1 is level level 1 network entity 5555 5555 5555 5555 00 graceful rest...

Page 97: ... lsp load balance number 1 interface atm 1 0 2 undo shutdown aps group 1 aps aps protect 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 aps mode one2one bidirection aps revert 5 aps timers 1 180 atm trunk 1 interface atm trunk 1 mpls l2vpn pw template pwt control word interface atm trunk 1 1 p2p pvc 1 100 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 pw template pwt 1 tunnel policy ct mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 3 bypass bfd bfd bfd bind pw interface atm 1 0 2 remo...

Page 98: ...rom the working link BFD is configured to monitor E APS group interfaces on PE2 and PE3 NOTE In this example the E APS 1 1 bidirectional mode is used Its configuration is similar to that for the E APS 1 1 unidirectional mode with exception that the hold up command must be run if the unidirectional mode is used If an AC link fails the BFD module instructs the APS module to perform a traffic switcho...

Page 99: ...Loopback2 5 5 5 2 32 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure IP addresses and a routing protocol to make devices routable 2 Configure MPLS TE tunnels and their explicit paths ensuring that traffic flows through specified paths 3 Configure E APS on PE2 and PE3 and single chassis APS on CE2 implementing E APS 1 1 bidirectional protection on the AC side 4 Establish t...

Page 100: ...ty 1111 1111 1111 1111 00 PE1 isis 1 graceful restart PE1 isis 1 cost style wide compatible PE1 isis 1 timer spf 1 1 50 PE1 isis 1 traffic eng level 1 2 PE1 isis 1 quit PE1 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 isis enable 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 quit PE1 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 isis enable 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 quit PE1 interface loopbac...

Page 101: ...affic eng level 1 2 PE2 isis 1 quit PE2 interface gigabitEthernet 3 0 2 PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 isis enable 1 PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 quit PE2 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 isis enable 1 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 quit PE2 interface loopback 0 PE2 LoopBack0 isis enable 1 PE2 LoopBack0 quit Configure PE3 PE3 isis 1 PE3 isis 1 is level level 1 PE3 isis 1 network entity 555...

Page 102: ...thernet 3 0 2 P1 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 mpls P1 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 mpls te P1 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 quit Configure P2 P2 interface loopBack 0 P2 LoopBack0 ip address 3 3 3 3 32 P2 LoopBack0 quit P2 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 P2 mpls P2 mpls mpls te P2 mpls quit P2 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 2 P2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 mpls P2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 mpls te P2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 quit P2 interface gigabite...

Page 103: ...E3 explicit path path next hop 10 1 5 1 PE3 explicit path path next hop 10 1 2 1 PE3 explicit path path next hop 1 1 1 1 3 Establish MPLS TE tunnels Configure PE1 PE1 interface tunnel 1 0 0 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 tunnel protocol mpls te PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 destination 4 4 4 4 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te tunnel id 1 PE1 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te path explicit pa...

Page 104: ...mpls te commit PE3 Tunnel1 0 0 quit PE3 interface tunnel 2 0 0 PE3 Tunnel2 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 PE3 Tunnel2 0 0 tunnel protocol mpls te PE3 Tunnel2 0 0 destination 4 4 4 4 PE3 Tunnel2 0 0 mpls te tunnel id 3 PE3 Tunnel2 0 0 mpls te reserved for binding PE3 Tunnel2 0 0 mpls te commit PE3 Tunnel2 0 0 quit Step 3 Configure E APS 1 Configure E APS on PE2 PE3 and APS on CE2 Con...

Page 105: ...quit PE1 pw template pwt PE1 pw template pwt control word PE1 pw template pwt quit PE1 interface atm 1 0 0 PE1 Atm1 0 0 undo shutdown PE1 Atm1 0 0 quit PE1 interface atm 1 0 0 1 p2p PE1 Atm1 0 0 1 atm cell transfer PE1 Atm1 0 0 1 pvc 1 100 PE1 atm pvc Atm1 0 0 1 1 100 quit PE1 Atm1 0 0 1 mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 pw template pwt 1 PE1 Atm1 0 0 1 mpls l2vc 5 5 5 5 pw template pwt 2 secondary PE1 Atm1 0 0 1...

Page 106: ...emplate mpw quit PE3 interface loopback 1 PE3 LoopBack1 mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 pw template mpw 100 admin PE3 LoopBack1 quit PE3 interface loopback 2 PE3 LoopBack2 mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 pw template mpw 101 admin PE3 LoopBack2 quit Step 6 Configure a BFD session to monitor each service PW Configure PE1 PE1 bfd PE1 bfd quit PE1 bfd bfd1 bind pw interface atm 1 0 0 PE1 bfd session bfd1 discriminator local 222 ...

Page 107: ...lsp session pe2 discriminator remote 1001 PE3 bfd lsp session pe2 commit PE3 bfd lsp session pe2 quit PE3 bfd pe3 bind pw interface loopback 2 track interface interface atm 1 0 2 PE3 bfd lsp session pe3 discriminator local 2000 PE3 bfd lsp session pe3 discriminator remote 2001 PE3 bfd lsp session pe3 commit PE3 bfd lsp session pe3 quit Step 8 Bind the APS group to BFD sessions Configure PE2 PE2 in...

Page 108: ...ace Atm Trunk1 s state information is Operate status up Number Of Up Port In Trunk 1 PortName Status Active Status Atm1 0 2 Up Inactive End Configuration Files l Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 isis 1 is level level 1 network entity 1111 1111 1111 1111 00 graceful restart cost style wide compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic eng level 1 2 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 1 isis enable 1 mpls mpls...

Page 109: ...l word interface atm 1 0 0 undo shutdown interface Atm1 0 0 1 atm cell transfer pvc 1 100 mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 pw template pwt 1 mpls l2vc 5 5 5 5 pw template pwt 2 secondary mpls l2vpn redundancy independent mpls l2vpn stream dual receiving bfd bfd bfd1 bind pw interface atm 1 0 0 discriminator local 222 discriminator remote 111 commit bfd bfd2 bind pw interface atm 1 0 0 discriminator local 444 dis...

Page 110: ...ible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic eng level 1 2 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface gigabitEthernet 3 0 2 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface loopBack 0 ip address 3 3 3 3 32 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te return l Configuration file of PE2 isis 1 is level level 1 network entity 4444 4444 4444 4444 00 graceful restart cost style wide compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traf...

Page 111: ...ination 1 1 1 1 mpls te tunnel id 1 mpls te path explicit path path mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit interface tunnel 2 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 5 5 5 5 mpls te tunnel id 3 mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit pw template mpw control word interface atm 1 0 1 undo shutdown aps group 1 aps working 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 aps timers 1...

Page 112: ...twork entity 5555 5555 5555 5555 00 graceful restart cost style wide compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic eng level 1 2 interface gigabitEthernet 3 0 2 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 isis enable 1 interface loopBack 0 ip address 5 5 5 5 32 interface LoopBack1 mpls l2vc mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 pw template mpw 100 admin interface LoopBack2 mpls l2vc mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 pw template...

Page 113: ...s track bfd session session name pe2 interface atm trunk 1 mpls l2vpn pw template pwt control word interface atm trunk 1 1 p2p pvc 1 100 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 pw template pwt 1 mpls l2vc 4 4 4 4 ac bypass 200 pw bypass 100 bfd bfd bfd bind pw interface atm trunk 1 discriminator local 333 discriminator remote 444 commit bfd pe2 bind pw interface LoopBack1 select board 1 discriminator local 1000 discrim...

Page 114: ... problem static routes can be bound to the master device backup device and the APS enabled interfaces of a radio network controller RNC and imported by a dynamic routing protocol When an APS is performed the routes do not have to be learned again which accelerates the route convergence and prevents a long service interruption Figure 3 9 Configuring Dual System APS in the Scenario of Forwarding IP ...

Page 115: ... working 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 PE2 Cpos6 2 0 quit Configure PE3 PE3 controller cpos 1 1 0 PE3 Cpos1 1 0 undo shutdown PE3 Cpos1 1 0 aps group 24 PE3 Cpos1 1 0 aps protect 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 PE3 Cpos1 1 0 aps mode one2one bidirection PE3 Cpos1 1 0 aps revert 1 PE3 Cpos1 1 0 quit Configure CE2 CE2 controller cpos3 0 1 CE2 Cpos3 0 1 undo shutdown CE2 Cpos3 0 1 aps group 24 CE2 Cpos3 0 1 aps working CE2 Cpos3 ...

Page 116: ...e PE3 PE3 interface Global Mp Group 24 PE3 Global Mp Group24 ip address 192 168 1 3 255 255 255 0 PE3 Global Mp Group24 quit Configure CE2 CE2 interface Global Mp Group 24 CE2 Global Mp Group24 ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 CE2 Global Mp Group24 quit 2 Add a Trunk Serial interface to each Global Mp Group interface Configure PE2 PE2 interface Trunk Serial 24 24 0 PE2 Trunk Serial24 24 0 link...

Page 117: ...PE1 isis 1 network entity 1111 1111 1111 1111 00 PE1 isis 1 graceful restart PE1 isis 1 cost style wide compatible PE1 isis 1 timer spf 1 1 50 PE1 isis 1 traffic eng level 1 2 PE1 isis 1 quit PE1 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 isis enable 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 quit PE1 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 isis enable 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 qui...

Page 118: ... 2 isis enable 1 PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 2 quit PE2 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 2 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 isis enable 1 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 2 quit PE2 interface loopback 0 PE2 LoopBack0 isis enable 1 PE2 LoopBack0 quit PE2 interface global mp group 24 PE2 Global Mp Group24 isis enable 1 PE2 Global Mp Group24 quit Configure PE3 PE3 isis 1 PE3 isis 1 import route static PE3 isis 1 is level leve...

Page 119: ...vert time 1 minutes KeepAlive Timer 2 seconds Hold Timer 200 seconds No Request on Both Working and Protection Side Group Work Channel Protect Channel Wtr W State P State Switch Cmd Switch Result 24 4 4 4 4 Cpos1 1 0 1 ok ok NA idle CE2 display aps group 24 APS Group 24 Cpos3 0 1 working channel 1 Active Cpos3 0 0 protection channel 0 Inactive Bidirection 1 1 mode Revert time 1 minutes No Request ...

Page 120: ... is level level 1 network entity 2222 2222 2222 2222 00 graceful restart cost style wide compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic eng level 1 2 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 1 isis enable 1 interface gigabitEthernet 3 0 2 isis enable 1 interface loopBack 0 ip address 2 2 2 2 32 return l Configuration file of P2 isis 1 is level level 1 network entity 3333 3333 3333 3333 00 graceful restart cost style wi...

Page 121: ...0 undo shutdown aps group 24 aps working 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 cpos trunk 24 interface Trunk Serial24 24 0 link protocol ppp ppp mp global global mp group 24 interface Global Mp Group24 ip address 192 168 1 3 255 255 255 0 return l Configuration file of PE3 isis 1 import route static is level level 1 network entity 5555 5555 5555 5555 00 graceful restart cost style wide compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traff...

Page 122: ...s revert 1 cpos trunk 24 interface Cpos Trunk24 e1 24 unframed interface Trunk Serial24 24 0 link protocol ppp ppp mp global global mp group 24 interface Global Mp Group24 ip address 192 168 1 3 255 255 255 0 return HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 3 APS Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 105 ...

Page 123: ...RRP backup groups coexist decreasing VRRP Advertisement packets to be sent and minimizing network bandwidth consumption mVRRP is also used to determine the active and standby status of links along which a user is dual homed to a network 4 4 Configuring VRRP IPv4 Association VRRP IPv4 association helps a VRRP IPv4 backup group rapidly perform a master backup VRRP switchover if a network link fails ...

Page 124: ...dwidth consumption The mVRRP IPv6 backup group determines the active and standby links connected to a dual homing network 4 10 Configuring VRRP IPv6 Association VRRP IPv6 association helps a VRRP IPv6 backup group rapidly perform a master backup VRRP switchover if a network link fails This ensures proper service data forwarding 4 11 Maintaining VRRP This section describes how to maintain VRRP by d...

Page 125: ...ateway is Router A shown in Figure 4 1 Router A forwards these packets to the external network so that the hosts can communicate with the external network Figure 4 1 Default gateway on a LAN RouterA 10 0 0 1 24 Gateway 10 0 0 1 IP Address 10 0 0 2 24 Gateway 10 0 0 1 IP Address 10 0 0 3 24 Ethernet Gateway 10 0 0 1 IP Address 10 0 0 4 24 Network If Router A fails hosts connected to it cannot commu...

Page 126: ...or the presence of the virtual router but not the presence of the master and backup routers Hosts communicate with devices on other network segments through the virtual router A virtual router consists of a master router and one or more backup routers Only the master router forwards packets If the master router fails a backup router is elected as the master router and takes over traffic Figure 4 2...

Page 127: ...reduces the number of VRRP Advertisement packets bandwidth consumption and system burden An mVRRP backup group is still a VRRP backup group essentially and has all functions that a VRRP backup group provides VRRP related Terms and Principles l IP address owner An IP address owner is the router that uses the virtual IP address of a VRRP backup group as its interface IP address The IP address owner ...

Page 128: ...B is the master in backup group 2 and the backup in backup group 1 Both Router A and Router B are the masters in different backup groups and both of them transmit and load balance traffic Figure 4 4 Networking diagram for VRRP backup groups in load balancing mode 20 1 1 100 24 RouterB group 1 Backup group 2 Master Backup group 2 Virtual IP Address 10 1 1 112 Backup group 1 Virtual IP Address 10 1 ...

Page 129: ...er devices to ping a virtual IP address to serve the following purposes Monitors the operating status of the master router in a VRRP IPv4 backup group Monitors communication between a user device and a network connected by a default gateway using the virtual IP address l VRRP authentication Authentication modes and keys can be set based on network security requirements and these settings are carri...

Page 130: ...ed interfaces can be bound to an mVRRP backup group A master slave mVRRP switchover can trigger the active standby switchover on these interfaces preventing traffic loss PWs mVRRP is bound to PWs After a master slave mVRRP switchover is performed the mVRRP status determines the primary and secondary states for PWs preventing traffic loss VRRP Association A VRRP or mVRRP backup group can be associa...

Page 131: ...a specified route VRRP enabled interfaces can remove the network and host routes for the previous active link after a master backup VRRP switchover is complete This prevents network to user traffic from following the unreachable route or traveling through a failed link NQA A VRRP backup group can be associated with a unidirectional Network Quality Analysis NQA test instance monitoring a link conne...

Page 132: ...unication services Table 4 3 lists functions that VRRP for IPv6 and VRRP for IPv4 support and do not support Table 4 3 VRRP for IPv6 and VRRP for IPv4 functions VRRP for IPv4 Functions Supported by VRRP for IPv6 Authentication Not supported Pinging the virtual IP address Supported Smooth VRRP switching Supported Interval at which gratuitous ARP packets are sent by the master device Not supported V...

Page 133: ...ackup group familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the data required for the configuration Applicable Environment On the network shown in Figure 4 5 all hosts on a network segment use default routes in which the next hop address is the same gateway address The hosts use their default routes to send packets to the gateway and the gateway forward...

Page 134: ...3 24 Virtual IP Address 10 1 1 10 A VRRP backup group works in master backup mode If the master NE80E 40E fails a backup NE80E 40E is used to forward data improving network reliability After a VRRP backup group is configured you can configure priorities for group members packet attributes the interval at which packets are sent and smooth VRRP switching and enable the function that pings the virtua...

Page 135: ... transmit data When multiple VRRP backup groups are configured on two devices these two VRRP devices can work in load balancing mode to transmit data A VRRP backup group can be used to implement gateway redundancy without causing networking changes The VRRP backup group uses the master device to forward traffic along an active link A VRRP backup group can be assigned a maximum of 16 virtual IP add...

Page 136: ...t when VRRP is enabled on an interface such as a sub interface for Dot1q VLAN tag termination a sub interface for QinQ VLAN tag termination or a VLANIF interface you cannot use the IP addresses mapping to static ARP entries related to these interfaces as the VRRP virtual addresses Otherwise incorrect host routes are generated and abnormal forwarding of the device may take place End 4 2 3 Configuri...

Page 137: ...ion and interval at which VRRP Advertisement packets are sent Configuring these attributes help improve the performance of a VRRP backup group Context VRRP Advertisement packets are primarily used to determine the status of VRRP backup group members and elect a master device in a VRRP backup group After a master device is elected the master device sends VRRP Advertisement packets to advertise its ...

Page 138: ...nt packets expires the backup device with the highest priority becomes the new master device l Gratuitous ARP packet sending mode A QinQ termination sub interface sends gratuitous ARP packets with two tags and the inner tag is a range of VLAN IDs To ensure that switches connected to users learn the correct MAC address of the VRRP backup group the VRRP backup group configured on the QinQ terminatio...

Page 139: ... VRRP backup group must be configured with the same authentication type and the same authentication key If different authentication types are configured the negotiation on the master and backup states fail l Configure the VRRP version number 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run vrrp version v2 v3 VRRP version number is specified 3 Optional Run vrrp version 3 send packet mode v2 onl...

Page 140: ...ise interval The interval at which a VRRP Advertisement packet is sent is configured The default interval is 1 second If multiple VRRP backup groups are configured increase the interval to prevent the VRRP status from flapping l Configure the gratuitous ARP packet sending mode 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number subinterface number The vie...

Page 141: ...on delay This process violates the preemption delay setting Therefore in a VRRP backup group the preemption delay and the IP address owner cannot be configured together l The interval at which a gratuitous ARP packet is sent can be set on the master router as needed Procedure l Set the preemption delay for a VRRP backup group 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface...

Page 142: ... at which the master router sends a gratuitous ARP packet must be shorter than the aging time of the ARP entry on each user device To restore the default interval at which a gratuitous ARP packet is sent run the undo vrrp gratuitous arp timeout command in the system view To disable the master router from sending gratuitous ARP packets run the vrrp gratuitous arp timeout disable command in the syst...

Page 143: ...Advertisement packets ranges from 1s to 255s and the default value is 100s When the traffic is heavy increase the interval value The function of learning the interval at which a VRRP Advertisement packet is sent must be enabled before this command is run The undo vrrp timer advertise learning enable command is used to disable the function of learning the interval at which a VRRP Advertisement pack...

Page 144: ...ackup device If the backup device is capable of forwarding traffic service interruption time is reduced Context NodeBs attached to a cell site gateway CSG on a mobile bearer network are connected to aggregation devices NPE1 and NPE2 through primary and secondary pseudo wires PWs and connected to network provider edges NPE3 and NPE4 configured with a Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP backup g...

Page 145: ...ce number The view of the interface where the VRRP backup group is configured is displayed Step 3 Run vrrp vrid backup forward The backup device is configured to forward traffic End 4 2 9 Checking the Configurations You can view the status of the VRRP backup group and verify the configuration Prerequisites The configurations of the VRRP backup group are complete HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Conf...

Page 146: ...view the last 10 changes in the status of the VRRP backup group HUAWEI display vrrp state change interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 2 vrid 1 Time SourceState DestState Reason 2012 05 19 20 36 42 Initialize Backup interface up 2012 05 19 20 36 45 Backup Master protocol timer expired 4 3 Configuring an mVRRP IPv4 Backup Group VRRP backup groups VRRP disabled interfaces or PWs can be bound to an mVRRP bac...

Page 147: ...that a VRRP backup group provides NOTE Multiple service VRRP backup groups can be bound to an mVRRP backup group An mVRRP backup group cannot be bound to another mVRRP backup group The following table lists objects that can be bound to mVRRP and binding scenarios Table 4 4 Objects that can be bound to mVRRP and binding scenarios Object Scenario VRRP backup groups If multiple VRRP backup groups are...

Page 148: ...group see 4 2 Configuring Basic Functions of a VRRP IPv4 Backup Group A VRRP backup group must be created before an mVRRP backup group is specified In either of the following situations a Layer 2 user side device cannot transparently transmit VRRP packets l User side devices are configured with split horizon on a Virtual Private LAN Service VPLS network l A standby link cannot be configured on use...

Page 149: ...RRP backup group is created is displayed Step 3 Run admin vrrp vrid virtual router id ignore if down The VRRP backup group is configured as an mVRRP backup group End 4 3 3 Configuring an mVRRP Backup Group Binding VRRP backup groups VRRP disabled interfaces or PWs can be bound to an mVRRP backup group After a binding is configured the mVRRP backup group determines the master and backup VRRP status...

Page 150: ...P packets It operates its state machine by directly duplicating the status of the mVRRP back group NOTE A VRRP backup group can only be bound to a single mVRRP backup group Do not run the control flap command on an interface that a VRRP backup group tracks If this command is run on the interface and the interface recovers from a fault the interface goes Up after a specified delay During the delay ...

Page 151: ...ter VPLS Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN End 4 3 4 Optional Configuring the BFD Sampling Function to Implement a Rapid Master Backup VRRP Switchover Usually a VRRP backup group implements a master backup VRRP switchover rapidly by tracking the BFD session status This method is inapplicable on some networks or on a device that does not support BFD BFD sam...

Page 152: ...ers A peer BFD session is established between two NPEs A link BFD session is established between each NPE and PE or if PEs do not support link BFD a link BFD session is established between each NPE and CE BFD sampling is applicable to this network After link BFD sessions are established they are bound to the mVRRP backup group By default the mVRRP backup group performs a master backup VRRP switcho...

Page 153: ...meters as needed l session name bfd configure name allows only dynamic BFD sessions to be bound to the mVRRP backup group l session id allows only static BFD sessions to be bound to the mVRRP backup group Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface interface type interface number subinterface number The view of the interface where the mVRRP backup group is co...

Page 154: ...bled interfaces l Run one of the following commands to check bindings between an mVRRP backup group and PWs display vrrp binding admin vrrp interface interface type1 interface number1 vrid virtual router id member pw display vrrp binding admin vrrp interface interface type1 interface number1 vrid virtual router id member pw vc interface interface type2 interface number2 display vrrp binding admin ...

Page 155: ... link3 type link BFD session state UP Track BFD link4 type link BFD session state UP Create time 2010 06 22 17 32 56 Last change time 2010 06 22 17 33 00 4 4 Configuring VRRP IPv4 Association VRRP IPv4 association helps a VRRP IPv4 backup group rapidly perform a master backup VRRP switchover if a network link fails This ensures proper service data forwarding 4 4 1 Before You Start Before configuri...

Page 156: ...need the following data No Data 1 VRID 2 Type and number of an interface to be tracked and value by which the VRRP priority increases or reduces if the tracked interface goes Down 3 Local and remote discriminators of a BFD session to be tracked by a VRRP backup group 4 ID of an IPSec instance to be tracked by a VRRP backup group 5 Value by which the VRRP priority reduces if the tracked IPSec insta...

Page 157: ...eases if the tracked interface goes Down The value is an integer ranging from 1 to 255 Only the IP address owner has priority value 255 The greatest priority value that can be set is 254 l reduced value reduced specifies the value by which the VRRP priority reduces if the tracked interface goes Down The value is an integer ranging from 1 to 255 The smallest priority value can be set to 1 Priority ...

Page 158: ... to be bound to the VRRP IPv4 backup group A VRRP IPv4 backup group can track a maximum of eight BFD sessions and a maximum of eight interfaces Perform the following steps on the device that needs to implement a rapid master backup VRRP switchover Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface interface type interface number subinterface number The view of the i...

Page 159: ...nd detects a fault VRRP flapping occurs l A VRRP backup group is associated with a link BFD session and a peer BFD session In this scenario the backup device status becomes Master if the backup device detects the peer BFD session status change before detecting the link BFD session status change The backup device status transitions from Master to Initialize after it detects the peer BFD session sta...

Page 160: ...VRRP backup group may connect to an IP SoftX device that supports EFM active standby extension When EFM active standby extension is enabled the IP SoftX device carries its active standby interface status in the Vendor Specific Info field of an Information operation administration and maintenance protocol data unit OAMPDU If the IP SoftX device performs an active standby interface switchover but th...

Page 161: ...rface type interface number The IPv4 VRRP backup group is associated with EFM NOTE For 10GE LAN and 40GE interfaces when 802 3ah is configured and the peer end cannot receive optical signals but can transmit optical signals properly no Remote Fault packets are sent The local trunk interface cannot detect a Down switching event In this situation the backup function cannot provide protection When 80...

Page 162: ...tes the network segment route and host route l When entering the Master state this VRRP enabled interface advertises the network segment route and host route l On an interface of a different type l When entering the Initialize state this VRRP enabled interface deletes the network segment route l When entering the Master state this VRRP enabled interface advertises the network segment route Perform...

Page 163: ...rp Backup forward disabled Config track link bfd down number 0 Track BFD 1 Priority increased 20 BFD Session State up Track EFM GigabitEthernet2 0 0 EFM state up Create time 2010 06 22 17 32 56 Last change time 2010 06 22 17 33 00 4 5 Configuring the Rapid VRRP Switchback Function After the original master device recovers the rapid VRRP switchback function enables the original master device to inc...

Page 164: ... is dropped The rapid VRRP switchback function can be used to prevent traffic loss The rapid VRRP switchback function allows the recovered master device to preempt the Master state without waiting for VRRP packets sent by the existing master device Figure 4 13 Networking diagram for the rapid VRRP switchback function PE1 NPE1 PE2 NPE2 UPE User network Internet Active link Standby link VRRP Master ...

Page 165: ... disabled from preempting the Master state or an mVRRP backup group is deleted End 4 6 Configuring a Fast VRRP Backup Group This section describes how to configure fast Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP to detect faults within milliseconds If the master router or link fails services rapidly switch to a backup router which helps improve network reliability Usage Scenario Fast VRRP detects lin...

Page 166: ... period is 3 seconds Step 7 Optional Run vrrp vrid virtual router id preempt mode timer delay delay value The preemption delay is set for the router in the fast VRRP backup group The default delay is 0 seconds meaning immediate preemption In a fast VRRP backup group working in immediate preemption mode a backup router can immediately preempt the Master state when its priority is higher than that o...

Page 167: ...view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number subinterface number The view of the interface where the fast VRRP backup group is configured is displayed 3 Run vrrp vrid virtual router id track bfd session bfd session id session name bfd configure name increased value increased reduced value reduced The fast VRRP backup group is configured to monitor the common BF...

Page 168: ...rface is bound to the mVRRP backup group Bind a PW to the mVRRP backup group 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run vsi vsi name static The virtual switch instance VSI view is displayed 3 Run pwsignal ldp The VSI LDP view is displayed 4 Run peer peer address negotiation vc id vc id track admin vrrp interface interface type interface number vrid virtual router id The PW is bound to th...

Page 169: ...Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface loopback loopback number The loopback interface view is displayed A unicast VRRP backup group can be created only on a loopback interface Step 3 Run vrrp vrid virtual router id peer ip ip address Unicast VRRP is enabled a unicast VRRP backup group is created and a peer IP address is configured for this group Step 4 ...

Page 170: ... Procedure After creating a unicast VRRP backup group perform the following operations to implement rapid master backup VRRP switchovers to further improve network reliability l Associate the unicast VRRP backup group with a VRRP disabled interface 1 Run the system view command to enter the system view 2 Run the interface loopback loopback number command to enter the view of the interface on which...

Page 171: ...uced value reduced command To associate the unicast VRRP backup group with a link or peer BFD session run the vrrp vrid virtual router id track bfd session bfd session id session name bfd configure name peer link command l Associate the unicast VRRP backup group with CGN 1 Run the system view command to enter the system view 2 Run the interface loopback loopback number command to enter the view of...

Page 172: ...p group is used on an IPv6 network Figure 4 14 Network diagram for a VRRP IPv6 backup group Master Network Backup FE80 218 82FF FED3 2AF1 FE80 218 82FF FED3 2AF1 Network Virture Router FE80 1 SwitchA SwitchA PCA Gateway FE80 1 IP Address FE80 218 82FF FED3 2AF1 Virtual IP Address FE80 1 PCA Gateway FE80 1 IP Address FE80 218 82FF FED3 2AF1 After a VRRP IPv6 backup group is configured you can confi...

Page 173: ... only one VRRP IPv6 backup group is configured on two devices the two VRRP devices work in master backup mode to transmit data When multiple VRRP backup groups are configured on the two devices the two VRRP devices can work in load balancing mode to transmit data A VRRP IPv6 backup group uses a backup device to take over traffic if the master device fails This implements gateway redundancy without...

Page 174: ...r if there is before configuring VRRP IPv6 on other devices in a VRRP IPv6 backup group This prevents an IPv6 address conflict If there is an IPv6 address conflict perform either of the following procedures to address the problem l Disable IPv6 address conflict check and enable it after the IP address owner is configured 1 Before configuring an IP address owner run the ipv6 nd dad attempts 0 comma...

Page 175: ... value is 100 NOTE l The priority value 0 is reserved for special use The priority value 255 is reserved for the IP address owner The priority value of the IP address owner cannot be configured Priority values 1 through 254 can be set l If devices have the same VRRP IPv6 priority the device enters the Master state earlier than others is the master device Other devices are backup devices and stop p...

Page 176: ...er The interface view is displayed 3 Run vrrp6 un check hop limit The function to check TTLs in VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets is disabled By default TTLs in VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets are checked The undo vrrp6 un check hop limit command is used to enable this function 4 Run quit The system view is displayed l Configure the VRRP enabled device to send ND packets carrying only the minimal in...

Page 177: ...riority becomes the new master Procedure l Set the preemption delay for a VRRP IPv6 backup group 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number The interface view is displayed 3 Run vrrp6 vrid virtual router id preempt mode timer delay delay value The preemption delay is set for routers in a VRRP IPv6 backup group By default the preemption mode is en...

Page 178: ...nterval at which ND packets are sent by the master router is set The ND packets sent by the master router carry the virtual MAC address By default the master router sends an ND packet every 120s NOTE The interval at which the master router sends an ND packet must be shorter than the aging time of the ND entry on each user device To restore the default interval at which an ND packet is sent run the...

Page 179: ...switched twice causing unstable service transmission After the Router is enabled with smooth switching the master Router sends VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets at the originally configured interval The packets carry the smooth switching time After receiving the packets backup Routers learn the smooth switching time and prolongs the timeout period for receiving VRRP Advertisement packets based on th...

Page 180: ...nication between a user device and a network connected by a default gateway using the virtual IP address NOTICE If the ping to the virtual IP address is enabled a device on an external network can ping a virtual address This exposes the router to ICMP based attacks The undo vrrp virtual ip ping enable command can be used to disable the ping function Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view...

Page 181: ...er backup VRRP6 switchover is incomplete Configure the backup device in this scenario to forward traffic to meet carrier class reliability standards When a device configured with a VRRP6 backup group is in the backup state it is capable of forwarding traffic to avoid traffic loss when an aggregation device is faulty NOTE Configure the backup device to forward traffic on the master or backup device...

Page 182: ... the mVRRP IPv6 backup group run the display vrrp6 command on the router to view information about the mVRRP IPv6 backup group HUAWEI display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Virtual Router 1 State Master Virtual IP FE80 1 Master IP 2001 DB8 100 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 100 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 100 cs TimerConfig 100 cs Virtual MAC 0000 5e00 0201 Check hop limit Y...

Page 183: ... VRRP IPv6 backup group is configured as an mVRRP IPv6 backup group Other VRRP IPv6 backup groups are bound to the mVRRP IPv6 backup group and function as service VRRP IPv6 backup groups The mVRRP IPv6 backup group determines the status of its service VRRP IPv6 backup groups Figure 4 16 mVRRP IPv6 NPE1 NPE2 UPE mVRRP An mVRRP IPv6 backup group is still a VRRP IPv6 backup group essentially and has ...

Page 184: ...rmation about how to configure basic VRRP IPv6 backup group functions see 4 8 Configuring Basic Functions of a VRRP IPv6 Backup Group Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface interface type interface number The interface view is displayed Step 3 Run vrrp6 vrid virtual router id virtual ip virtual ipv6 address link local A VRRP IPv6 backup group is created ...

Page 185: ...red is displayed Step 3 Run vrrp6 vrid virtual router id virtual ip virtual ipv6 address link local A VRRP IPv6 backup group is created and assigned a virtual IPv6 address There is no need to set VRRP priorities for devices in a service VRRP IPv6 backup group because no master election is performed and the mVRRP IPv6 backup group determines the states of these devices Step 4 Run vrrp6 vrid virtual...

Page 186: ...bout the mVRRP IPv6 backup group HUAWEI display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Virtual Router 1 State Master Virtual IP FE80 1 Master IP 2001 DB8 2AF1 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 100 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 100 cs TimerConfig 100 cs Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0201 Check hop limit YES Config type admin vrrp Create time 2000 01 16 22 28 35 UTC 08 00 Last change time 2000 01 ...

Page 187: ...RRP applications on IPv6 networks VRRP IPv6 association involves the following functions l Association with interfaces A VRRP IPv6 backup group tracks VRRP disabled interfaces connected to a network on the master device If a VRRP disabled interface fails the VRRP IPv6 backup group is notified of the fault and rapidly performs a master backup VRRP switchover l Association with BFD sessions A VRRP I...

Page 188: ...the fault reduces the priority of the master device and sends VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets to elect a new master device The new master device takes over traffic Perform the following steps on a device where an interface needs to be tracked by a VRRP IPv6 backup group Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface interface type interface number The view of th...

Page 189: ...roup rapidly performs a master backup VRRP switchover Context If a link between devices in a VRRP IPv4 backup group fails VRRP IPv4 Advertisement packets cannot be sent to negotiate states Backup devices will attempt to preempt the Master state after a period three times the interval at which VRRP IPv4 Advertisement packets are broadcast During this period of time service data is lost To prevent t...

Page 190: ...r than that of the master device allowing a rapid master backup VRRP switchover A VRRP IPv6 backup group can track a maximum of eight BFD sessions and interfaces If all devices in a VRRP IPv6 backup group increase their priority values each time a tracked BFD session or interface goes Down the increased VRRP priority value of a backup device will become the highest after all the tracked BFD sessio...

Page 191: ...ocedure l Run the display vrrp6 interface interface type interface number vrid virtual router id brief command to check the status and configurations of a specified VRRP IPv6 backup group End Example Run the display vrrp6 command The command output shows that the BFD session tracked by the VRRP IPv6 backup group is Up For example HUAWEI display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Virtual Router 1 State Mas...

Page 192: ...rtbeat packets that are sent due to the changes in the outbound interfaces of the virtual MAC address As a result traffic can be forwarded properly NOTE If VRRP heartbeat packets are not forwarded through the router this configuration cannot help detect the change of a MAC entry carrying the virtual MAC address of a VRRP backup group To update ARP entries on the VLANIF interface on the router enab...

Page 193: ...d statistics command in the user view to delete VRRP6 statistics l Run the clear admin vrrp binding interface interface type interface number vrid virtual router id command in the system view to delete the binding between an mVRRP backup group and a service VRRP module on a board that does not operate l Run the clear admin vrrp6 binding interface interface type interface number vrid virtual router...

Page 194: ...nd link types of the NE40E X8 as an example In working situations the actual interface numbers and link types may be different from those used in this document 4 12 1 Example for Configuring a VRRP Backup Group In this example a VRRP backup group is configured to implement backup for gateways that are the next hops of user devices Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on...

Page 195: ...evel reliability for network links Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l IP address of each interface For detailed information see Data Preparation in Figure 4 17 l VLAN ID 10 and mode untagged for adding interfaces connecting the switch to Router A and Router B to the VLAN l VRID 1 and virtual IP address 10 1 1 111 for a VRRP backup group configured on Route...

Page 196: ...ernet2 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 1 24 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 1 1 111 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 vrrp vrid 1 priority 120 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 20 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit RouterA quit Create VRRP backup group 1 on Router B HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterB RouterB interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 RouterB Giga...

Page 197: ... Direct 0 0 D 10 1 1 1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 1 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 10 1 1 111 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 10 2 1 0 24 OSPF 10 2 D 192 168 1 2 Pos1 0 0 127 0 0 0 8 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 127 0 0 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 192 168 1 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 192 168 1 1 Pos1 0 0 192 168 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 192 168 1 2 32 Direct...

Page 198: ...ering Run the undo shutdown command on GE 2 0 0 of Router A Wait 20s and run the display vrrp command on Router A The command output shows that Router A is in the Master state End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 1 1 111 vrrp vrid 1 priority 120 vrrp vrid 1 p...

Page 199: ...0 0 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 10 2 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of the switch sysname Switch vlan batch 10 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 1 portswitch undo shutdown port default vlan 10 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 2 portswitch undo shutdown port default vlan 10 return 4 12 2 Example for Configuring VRRP Backup Groups Working in Load Balancing M...

Page 200: ... uses the virtual IP address of VRRP backup group 10 as a default gateway address and host B uses the virtual IP address of VRRP backup group 20 as a default gateway address The two backup groups back up each other and load balance traffic Figure 4 18 Configuring VRRP backup groups working in load balancing mode G E 1 0 2 GE 1 0 1 User network User network Switch A Switch B Router B Router A GE 1 ...

Page 201: ...ation you need the following data l Interface IP addresses l VRRP backup group ID for host A 10 virtual IP address 10 10 1 111 l Router A s priority in VRRP backup group 10 120 Router B s priority in VRRP backup group 10 100 l VRRP backup group ID for host B 20 virtual IP address 10 20 1 111 l Router B s priority in VRRP backup group 20 120 Router A s priority in VRRP backup group 20 100 Procedure...

Page 202: ... RouterB ospf 1 area 0 RouterB ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 10 1 0 0 0 0 255 RouterB ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 20 1 0 0 0 0 255 RouterB ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 RouterB ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 quit RouterB ospf 1 quit Configure Router C HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterC RouterC interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 RouterC GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown RouterC Gi...

Page 203: ...1 0 1 vrrp vrid 10 preempt mode timer delay 20 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 2 vrrp vrid 20 virtual ip 10 20 1 111 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 2 quit RouterA quit Configure Router B RouterB interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 1 vrrp vrid 10 virtual ip 10 10 1 111 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit RouterB i...

Page 204: ...11 Master IP 10 20 1 2 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 120 Preempt YES Delay Time 20 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0114 Check TTL YES Config type normal vrrp Backup forward disabled Create time 2014 03 12 17 33 00 Last change time 2014 03 12 17 33 06 Run the display vrrp command on Router B The command output shows that Router B s status is B...

Page 205: ...nterface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 20 1 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 20 virtual ip 10 20 1 111 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 undo shutdown ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 10 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 10 20 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Router B configuration file sysname RouterB interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown...

Page 206: ...92 168 3 2 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 3 0 0 0 0 255 return l Switch A configuration file sysname SwitchA vlan batch 10 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port default vlan 10 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 port default vlan 10 return l Switch B configuration file sysname SwitchB vlan batch 20 interface GigabitEthernet1 ...

Page 207: ...Set up LDP sessions between the UPE and the NPE The service VSI is responsible for the exchange of the VPLS service packets l Bind the service VSI and the mVSI on the UPEs When the master backup switchover of the NPEs is performed the MAC addresses of all service VSIs that are bound to the mVSI on the UPE are cleared The service VSIs learn the MAC address of the new master NPE again which does not...

Page 208: ... routes to the remote PE l When the backup NPE restarts or the backup link BFD reports a fault the master backup switchover of NPEs is not performed Figure 4 19 Networking diagram for connecting VRRP backup groups to an L3VPN NPE1 NPE2 UPE1 UPE2 PE3 CE1 CE2 CE3 Loopback1 3 3 3 9 32 Loopback1 4 4 4 9 32 Loopback1 1 1 1 9 32 Loopback1 2 2 2 9 32 Loopback1 5 5 5 9 32 GE1 0 0 10 1 1 1 24 GE2 0 0 10 1 ...

Page 209: ...VPN Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l Interface number interface IP address OSPF process number OSPF area number and IS IS process number l LSR ID l VSI name and VSI ID l VC ID of VLL l Name of the BFD the local or remote discriminator the VRRP backup group number and priority of VRRP l VE Group number l Names of VPN instances for MPLS L3VPN Procedure Ste...

Page 210: ...Ethernet2 0 2 quit NPE2 interface virtual ethernet2 0 3 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 3 ve group 2 l3 access NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 3 quit NPE2 interface virtual ethernet2 0 4 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 4 ve group 3 l2 terminate NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 4 quit NPE2 interface virtual ethernet2 0 5 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 5 ve group 3 l3 access NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 5 quit NPE2 interface virtual ethe...

Page 211: ...s2 0 0 isis enable 1 PE3 Pos2 0 0 quit PE3 interface pos3 0 0 PE3 Pos3 0 0 isis enable 1 PE3 Pos3 0 0 quit After the configuration is complete run the display isis route command You can view that the NPEs and PEs can learn the loopback1 route of each other Take NPE1 as an example NPE1 display isis route Route information for ISIS 1 ISIS 1 Level 1 Forwarding Table IPV4 Destination IntCost ExtCost E...

Page 212: ...mpls NPE2 mpls quit NPE2 mpls ldp NPE2 mpls ldp quit NPE2 interface pos1 0 0 NPE2 Pos1 0 0 mpls NPE2 Pos1 0 0 mpls ldp NPE2 Pos1 0 0 quit Configure PE3 PE3 mpls lsr id 5 5 5 9 PE3 mpls PE3 mpls quit PE3 mpls ldp PE3 mpls ldp quit PE3 interface pos2 0 0 PE3 Pos2 0 0 mpls PE3 Pos2 0 0 mpls ldp PE3 Pos2 0 0 quit PE3 interface pos3 0 0 PE3 Pos3 0 0 mpls PE3 Pos3 0 0 mpls ldp PE3 Pos3 0 0 quit After th...

Page 213: ...instance VPN2 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 7 1 ip address 172 17 1 2 24 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 7 1 quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 ip vpn instance VPN1 NPE2 vpn instance VPN1 ipv4 family NPE2 vpn instance VPN1 af ipv4 route distinguisher 100 2 NPE2 vpn instance VPN1 af ipv4 vpn target 111 1 both NPE2 vpn instance VPN1 af ipv4 quit NPE2 vpn instance VPN1 quit NPE2 ip vpn instance VPN2 NPE2 vpn instance VPN2...

Page 214: ... domain id 20 NPE1 ospf 200 import route bgp NPE1 ospf 200 area 0 NPE1 ospf 200 area 0 0 0 0 network 172 17 1 0 0 0 0 255 NPE1 ospf 200 area 0 0 0 0 quit NPE1 ospf 200 quit NPE1 bgp 100 NPE1 bgp ipv4 family vpn instance VPN1 NPE1 bgp VPN1 import route direct NPE1 bgp VPN1 import route ospf 100 NPE1 bgp VPN1 quit NPE1 bgp ipv4 family vpn instance VPN2 NPE1 bgp VPN2 import route direct NPE1 bgp VPN2...

Page 215: ...er 100 NPE1 bgp peer 5 5 5 9 connect interface loopback 1 NPE1 bgp ipv4 family vpnv4 NPE1 bgp af vpnv4 peer 5 5 5 9 enable NPE1 bgp af vpnv4 quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 bgp 100 NPE2 bgp peer 5 5 5 9 as number 100 NPE2 bgp peer 5 5 5 9 connect interface loopback 1 NPE2 bgp ipv4 family vpnv4 NPE2 bgp af vpnv4 peer 5 5 5 9 enable NPE2 bgp af vpnv4 quit Configure PE3 PE3 bgp 100 PE3 bgp peer 3 3 3 9 as n...

Page 216: ...55 255 255 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 Step 4 Configure MPLS L2VPN on the access network 1 Run IGP between NPE and UPE OSPF is used in the example Configure UPE1 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname UPE1 UPE1 ospf UPE1 ospf 1 area 0 UPE1 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 UPE1 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 2 1 0 0 0 0 255 UPE1 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 9 0 0 0 0 UPE1 os...

Page 217: ...1 1 1 1 1 9 0 0 0 0 Total Nets 9 Intra Area 9 Inter Area 0 ASE 0 NSSA 0 2 Configure the basic MPLS functions and MPLS LDP on the UPEs and NPEs Specify the LSR ID as loopback interface address and set up LSPs Configure UPE1 UPE1 mpls lsr id 1 1 1 9 UPE1 mpls UPE1 mpls quit UPE1 mpls ldp UPE1 mpls ldp quit UPE1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 UPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 mpls UPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ...

Page 218: ... 00 02 12 12 2 2 2 9 0 Operational DU Passive 000 00 02 9 9 5 5 5 9 0 Operational DU Passive 000 00 02 10 10 TOTAL 3 session s Found LAM Label Advertisement Mode SsnAge Unit DDD HH MM 3 Create a Martini administrator VSI on UPEs Configure UPE1 UPE1 mpls l2vpn UPE1 l2vpn quit UPE1 vsi admin vsi1 static UPE1 vsi admin vsi1 pwsignal ldp UPE1 vsi admin vsi1 ldp vsi id 10 UPE1 vsi admin vsi1 ldp peer 3...

Page 219: ...E2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 1 vlan type dot1q 1 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 1 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 9 20 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 1 quit After the configuration is complete run the display vsi name verbose command on UPEs You can view that the Administrator VSI in the output is yes and the VSI State in the output is up Take UPE1 as an example UPE1 display vsi name admin vsi1 verbose VSI Name admin vsi1 Ad...

Page 220: ...late name primary or secondary primary create time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 51 seconds up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 50 seconds last change time 0 days 0 hours 30 minutes 18 seconds VC last up time 2008 07 24 12 31 31 VC total up time 0 days 2 hours 12 minutes 51 seconds CKey 11 NKey 10 AdminPw interface AdminPw link state 4 Create a Martini service VSI on UPEs bind the service VSI to an mVSI a...

Page 221: ...ype dot1q 1 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 4 1 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 9 101 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 4 1 quit NPE2 interface virtual ethernet2 0 6 1 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 6 1 vlan type dot1q 1 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 6 1 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 9 102 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 6 1 quit After the configuration is complete run the display vsi command on UPEs You can view that the VSI State in the output is up Take UPE...

Page 222: ...vsi1 vsi1 Step 5 Configure the reliability of MPLS L2VPN on the access network 1 Configure the mVRRP for NPEs NPEs work in load balancing mode For the VSI of UPE1 NPE1 serves as the master NPE for the VSI of UPE2 NPE2 serves as the master NPE Configure NPE1 NPE1 interface virtual ethernet2 0 1 1 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 1 1 ip address 192 168 1 1 24 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 virtual...

Page 223: ...pt yes delay time 0 TimerRun 1 TimerConfig 1 Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp 2 Configure the service VRRP for NPEs Configure NPE1 NPE1 interface virtual ethernet2 0 5 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 5 vrrp vrid 3 virtual ip 172 16 1 254 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 5 quit NPE1 interface virtual ethernet2 0 7 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 7 vrrp vrid 4 virtual ip 172 ...

Page 224: ...PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 100 preempt yes delay time 0 TimerRun 1 TimerConfig 1 Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0104 Check TTL YES Config type member vrrp Virtual Ethernet2 0 5 Virtual Router 3 state Master Virtual IP 172 16 1 254 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 100 preempt yes delay time 0 TimerRun 1 TimerConfig 1 Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0103 Check TTL ...

Page 225: ...2 NPE1 bfd session peer2 discriminator local 342 NPE1 bfd session peer2 discriminator remote 432 NPE1 bfd session peer2 min tx interval 30 NPE1 bfd session peer2 min rx interval 30 NPE1 bfd session peer2 commit NPE1 bfd session peer2 quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 bfd NPE2 bfd quit NPE2 bfd peer1 bind peer ip 192 168 1 1 NPE2 bfd session peer1 discriminator local 431 NPE2 bfd session peer1 discriminator...

Page 226: ...ip 4 4 4 9 nexthop 10 4 1 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 UPE2 bfd session link2 discriminator local 24 UPE2 bfd session link2 discriminator remote 42 UPE2 bfd session link2 process pst UPE2 bfd session link2 commit UPE2 bfd session link2 quit Configure NPE1 NPE1 bfd link1 bind ldp lsp peer ip 1 1 1 9 nexthop 10 1 1 1 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 NPE1 bfd session link1 discriminator local 31 ...

Page 227: ...peer NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 1 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 31 link NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 1 quit NPE1 interface virtual ethernet2 0 3 NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 3 vrrp vrid 2 track bfd session 342 peer NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 3 vrrp vrid 2 track bfd session 32 link NPE1 Virtual Ethernet2 0 3 quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 interface virtual ethernet2 0 1 NPE2 Virtual Ethernet2 0 1 vrrp vrid 1 track b...

Page 228: ...2 0 1 Virtual Router 1 state Master Virtual IP 192 168 1 254 PriorityRun 120 PriorityConfig 120 MasterPriority 120 preempt yes delay time 0 TimerRun 1 TimerConfig 1 Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp Track BFD 31 type link bfd session state up Track BFD 341 type peer bfd session state up Step 6 Configure the access of CEs through the access network to MP...

Page 229: ...spf 200 area 0 CE4 ospf 200 area 0 0 0 0 network 172 19 1 0 0 0 0 255 CE4 ospf 200 area 0 0 0 0 quit CE4 ospf 200 quit Step 7 Verify the configuration CE1 CE2 CE3 and CE4 can ping through each other Take CE1 as example CE1 ping 172 18 1 1 PING 172 18 1 1 56 data bytes press CTRL_C to break Reply from 172 18 1 1 bytes 56 Sequence 1 ttl 255 time 31 ms Reply from 172 18 1 1 bytes 56 Sequence 2 ttl 25...

Page 230: ...state Master Virtual IP 192 168 2 254 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 120 preempt yes delay time 0 TimerRun 1 TimerConfig 1 Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0102 Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp Track BFD 32 type link bfd session state up Track BFD 342 type peer bfd session state DOWN Virtual Ethernet2 0 1 Virtual Router 1 state Initialize Virtual IP 192 168 1 254 Priorit...

Page 231: ...e of UPE1 sysname UPE1 mpls lsr id 1 1 1 9 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi admin vsi1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 10 peer 3 3 3 9 upe peer 4 4 4 9 upe admin vsi encapsulation ethernet vsi vsi1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 101 peer 3 3 3 9 peer 4 4 4 9 encapsulation ethernet track admin vsi admin vsi1 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface G...

Page 232: ... 2 2 9 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi admin vsi2 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 20 peer 3 3 3 9 upe peer 4 4 4 9 upe admin vsi encapsulation ethernet vsi vsi2 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 102 peer 3 3 3 9 peer 4 4 4 9 encapsulation ethernet track admin vsi admin vsi2 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 4 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip...

Page 233: ... l Configuration file of NPE1 sysname NPE1 ip vpn instance VPN1 ipv4 family route distinguisher 100 1 vpn target 111 1 both ip vpn instance VPN2 route distinguisher 100 21 ipv4 family vpn target 222 1 both mpls lsr id 3 3 3 9 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls l2vpn default martini mpls ldp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0001 00 interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown link protocol ppp ip address 10 5 1 2 255 255 ...

Page 234: ...0 1 3 vrrp vrid 3 virtual ip 172 16 1 254 vrrp vrid 3 track admin vrrp interface virtual ethernet2 0 1 1 vrid 1 unflowdown interface virtual ethernet2 0 1 4 vrrp vrid 3 virtual ip 172 17 1 254 vrrp vrid 4 track admin vrrp interface virtual ethernet2 0 1 2 vrid 2 unflowdown interface Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 ve group 2 l2 terminate interface Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 1 vlan type dot1q 1 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 9 ...

Page 235: ...l 32 discriminator remote 23 process pst commit bfd peer1 bind peer ip 192 168 1 2 discriminator local 341 discriminator remote 431 min tx interval 30 min rx interval 30 commit bfd peer2 bind peer ip 192 168 2 2 discriminator local 342 discriminator remote 432 min tx interval 30 min rx interval 30 commit bgp 100 peer 5 5 5 9 as number 100 peer 5 5 5 9 connect interface LoopBack1 ipv4 family unicas...

Page 236: ...v4 family vpn target 222 1 both mpls lsr id 4 4 4 9 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls l2vpn default martini mpls ldp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0002 00 interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown link protocol ppp ip address 10 6 1 2 255 255 255 0 isis enable 1 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 4 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2 0 1 undo shutdown ip...

Page 237: ...al ethernet2 0 1 4 vrrp vrid 3 virtual ip 172 17 1 254 vrrp vrid 4 track admin vrrp interface virtual ethernet2 0 1 2 vrid 2 unflowdown interface Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 ve group 2 l2 terminate interface Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 1 vlan type dot1q 1 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 9 20 interface Virtual Ethernet2 0 3 ve group 2 l3 access interface Virtual Ethernet2 0 4 ve group 3 l2 terminate interface Virtual Ethernet...

Page 238: ...x interval 30 commit bfd peer2 bind peer ip 192 168 2 1 discriminator local 432 discriminator remote 342 min tx interval 30 min rx interval 30 commit bgp 100 peer 5 5 5 9 as number 100 peer 5 5 5 9 connect interface LoopBack1 ipv4 family unicast undo synchronization peer 5 5 5 9 enable ipv4 family vpnv4 policy vpn target peer 5 5 5 9 enable ipv4 family vpn instance VPN1 import route ospf 100 impor...

Page 239: ...ess 172 18 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip binding vpn instance VPN2 ip address 172 19 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface Pos2 0 0 undo shutdown link protocol ppp ip address 10 5 1 1 255 255 255 0 isis enable 1 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos3 0 0 undo shutdown link protocol ppp ip address 10 6 1 1 255 255 255 0 isis enable 1 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 5 5 ...

Page 240: ... 0 0 0 20 area 0 0 0 0 network 172 19 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 10 ip address 172 16 1 1 255 255 255 0 ospf 100 area 0 0 0 0 network 172 16 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet...

Page 241: ...tocol needs to be configured to prevent this problem In this example the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP is used Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E On the network shown in Figure 4 20 a UPE is dual homed to two directly connected NPEs forming a ring network VRRP backup group 1 is configured on VLANIF 10 of NPE1 NPE1 is the...

Page 242: ... VRRP backup group and set VRRP priority values on the two NPEs to implement device backup Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l IP address of VLANIF 10 10 1 1 2 on NPE1 and that 10 1 1 3 on NPE2 l Multiple Spanning Tree MST region name RG1 and multiple spanning tree instance MSTI name MSTI1 on each device l VRID 1 virtual IP address 10 1 1 1 VRRP priority va...

Page 243: ...rnet1 0 1 portswitch NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit NPE2 vlan 10 NPE2 vlan10 port gigabitethernet 1 0 1 NPE2 vlan10 quit NPE2 interface vlanif10 NPE2 vlanif10 ip address 10 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 NPE2 vlanif10 quit l Configure an Eth Trunk between NPE1 and NEP2 Configure NPE1 NPE1 interface eth trunk 1 NPE1 Eth Trunk1 quit NPE1 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 NPE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown N...

Page 244: ...gion configuration NPE2 mst region quit l Set a Spanning Tree Protocol STP priority value for NPE1 to allow NPE1 to function as MSTI1 s root bridge in RG1 NPE1 stp instance 1 priority 0 l Enable MSTP on each device and interface Configure the UPE UPE stp enable UPE interface gigabitethernet 2 0 1 UPE GigabitEthernet2 0 1 stp enable UPE GigabitEthernet2 0 1 quit UPE interface gigabitethernet 2 0 2 ...

Page 245: ...y stp brief MSTID Port Role STP State Protection 0 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 DESI FORWARDING NONE 0 Eth Trunk1 DESI FORWARDING NONE 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 DESI FORWARDING NONE 1 Eth Trunk1 ROOT FORWARDING NONE Step 3 Configure VRRP on each NPE On NPE1 create VRRP backup group 1 and set the VRRP priority to 130 NPE1 interface vlanif10 NPE1 vlanif10 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 1 1 1 NPE1 vlanif10 vrrp vrid...

Page 246: ...quit Run the display vrrp command on NPE1 NPE1 s status has successfully changed to Initialize in VRRP backup group 1 NPE1 display vrrp Vlanif10 Virtual Router 1 State Initialize Virtual IP 10 1 1 1 Master IP 0 0 0 0 PriorityRun 130 PriorityConfig 130 MasterPriority 0 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth type NONE Virtual MAC 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type normal ...

Page 247: ...undo shutdown eth trunk 1 interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 priority 130 interface Eth Trunk1 portswitch port link type trunk port trunk allow pass vlan 10 stp region configuration region name RG1 instance 1 vlan 10 active region configuration stp instance 1 priority 0 stp enable return l Configuration file of NPE1 sysname NPE2 vlan ba...

Page 248: ...rnet2 0 2 undo shutdown portswitch port default vlan 10 stp region configuration region name RG1 instance 1 vlan 10 active region configuration stp enable return 4 12 5 Example for Configuring an mVRRP Backup Group to Ignore the Interface Down Event In this example an mVRRP backup group is configured to ignore the interface Down event allowing both the mVRRP backup group and a peer BFD session to ...

Page 249: ...k BFD session with each CE l In an mVRRP backup group enabled with the function to ignore the interface Down event a VRRP enabled interface can directly change its VRRP status to Master but not Initialize if the directly connected VRRP enabled interface goes Down CEs are connected to QinQ termination sub interfaces of NPEs on the VPLS aggregation network shown in Figure 4 21 On the NPEs an mVRRP b...

Page 250: ... 102 virtual ip 10 102 1 200 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 ip address 10 103 1 254 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 103 virtual ip 10 103 1 200 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 ip address 10 100 1 253 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 100 virtual ip 10 100 1 200 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 ip address 10 101 1 253 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 101 virtual ip 10 101 1 200 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 ip ...

Page 251: ...VRIDs and virtual IP addresses for VRRP backup groups on each NPE 10 1 1 1 for backup group 10 10 100 1 200 for backup group 100 10 101 1 200 for backup group 101 10 102 1 200 for backup group 102 and 10 103 1 200 for backup group 103 among which backup group 10 is an mVRRP backup group and others are service VRRP backup groups l Peer BFD session parameters on each NPE peer IP address of 10 1 1 25...

Page 252: ...tEthernet1 0 1 quit NPE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 100 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 control vid 100 qinq termination NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 qinq termination pe vid 10 ce vid 101 to 200 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 ip address 10 100 1 254 24 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 arp broadcast enable NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 quit NPE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 101 NPE1 GigabitEtherne...

Page 253: ...uit NPE2 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 103 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 control vid 103 qinq termination NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 qinq termination pe vid 10 ce vid 401 to 500 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 ip address 10 103 1 253 24 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 arp broadcast enable NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 quit NOTE After the IP address is assigned to each QinQ termination sub interfac...

Page 254: ...tes 56 Sequence 4 ttl 255 time 150 ms Reply from 10 100 1 1 bytes 56 Sequence 5 ttl 255 time 120 ms 10 100 1 1 ping statistics 5 packet s transmitted 5 packet s received 0 00 packet loss round trip min avg max 120 152 180 ms NPE2 ping 10 100 1 1 PING 10 100 1 1 56 data bytes press CTRL_C to break Reply from 10 100 1 1 bytes 56 Sequence 1 ttl 255 time 190 ms Reply from 10 100 1 1 bytes 56 Sequence ...

Page 255: ... vrid 10 ignore if down NPE1 Eth Trunk1 1 quit NPE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 100 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 qinq vrrp pe vid 10 ce vid 101 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 vrrp vrid 100 virtual ip 10 100 1 200 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 quit NPE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 101 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 qinq vrrp pe vid 10 ce vid 201 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 vrrp vrid 101 virt...

Page 256: ...value of the Type field is Normal NPE2 display vrrp brief VRID State Interface Type Virtual IP 10 Backup Eth Trunk1 1 Admin 10 1 1 1 100 Master GE1 0 1 100 Normal 10 100 1 200 101 Master GE1 0 1 101 Normal 10 101 1 200 102 Master GE1 0 1 102 Normal 10 102 1 200 103 Master GE1 0 1 103 Normal 10 103 1 200 NOTE Split horizon configured on the VPLS aggregation network prevents traffic transmission bet...

Page 257: ...value of the State field is Master and the value of the Type field is Admin l In each of service VRRP backup groups the value of the State field is Master and the value of the Type field is Member NPE1 display vrrp brief VRID State Interface Type Virtual IP 10 Master Eth Trunk1 1 Admin 10 1 1 1 100 Master GE1 0 1 100 Member 10 100 1 200 101 Master GE1 0 1 101 Member 10 101 1 200 102 Master GE1 0 1...

Page 258: ...fd session link4 commit NPE1 bfd session link4 quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 bfd NPE2 bfd quit NPE2 bfd peer1 bind peer ip 10 1 1 254 interface eth trunk 1 1 source ip 10 1 1 253 auto NPE2 bfd session peer1 commit NPE2 bfd session peer1 quit NPE2 bfd link1 bind peer ip 10 100 1 1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 100 source ip 10 100 1 253 auto NPE2 bfd session link1 commit NPE2 bfd session link1 quit NPE...

Page 259: ...terface eth trunk 1 1 NPE1 Eth Trunk1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name peer1 peer NPE1 Eth Trunk1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link1 link NPE1 Eth Trunk1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link2 link NPE1 Eth Trunk1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link3 link NPE1 Eth Trunk1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link4 link NPE1 Eth Trun...

Page 260: ...Priority 120 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 010a Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp Backup forward disabled Config track link bfd down number 2 Track BFD link1 type link BFD session state UP Track BFD link2 type link BFD session state UP Track BFD link3 type link BFD session state UP Track BFD link4 type link BFD session state UP Trac...

Page 261: ... GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 shutdown NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 quit The link BFD session between NPE1 and CE1 goes Down NPE1 display bfd session all Local Remote PeerIpAddr State Type InterfaceName 8192 8192 10 1 1 253 Up S_AUTO_IF Eth Trunk1 1 8193 0 10 100 1 1 Down S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 8194 8193 10 101 1 1 Up S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 8195 8194 10 102 1 1 Up S_AUTO_IF Gi...

Page 262: ...101 shutdown NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 quit The link BFD session between NPE1 and CE2 goes Down NPE1 display bfd session all Local Remote PeerIpAddr State Type InterfaceName 8192 8192 10 1 1 253 Up S_AUTO_IF Eth Trunk1 1 8193 0 10 100 1 1 Down S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 8194 0 10 101 1 1 Down S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 8195 8194 10 102 1 1 Up S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 ...

Page 263: ...ession between each NPE and CE1 goes Up NPE1 display bfd session all Local Remote PeerIpAddr State Type InterfaceName 8192 8192 10 1 1 253 Up S_AUTO_IF Eth Trunk1 1 8193 8192 10 100 1 1 Up S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 8194 8193 10 101 1 1 Up S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 8195 8194 10 102 1 1 Up S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 8196 8195 10 103 1 1 Up S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103...

Page 264: ...track bfd session session name link1 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link2 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link3 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link4 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name peer1 peer vrrp vrid 10 track link bfd down number 2 vrrp trigger route arp broadcast enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown mode user t...

Page 265: ...eth trunk 1 bfd link1 bind peer ip 10 100 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 source ip 10 100 1 254 auto commit bfd link2 bind peer ip 10 101 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 source ip 10 101 1 254 auto commit bfd link3 bind peer ip 10 102 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 source ip 10 102 1 254 auto commit bfd link4 bind peer ip 10 103 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 source ...

Page 266: ...dcast enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 control vid 102 qinq termination qinq termination pe vid 10 ce vid 301 to 400 qinq vrrp pe vid 10 ce vid 301 ip address 10 102 1 253 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 102 virtual ip 10 102 1 200 vrrp vrid 102 track admin vrrp interface Eth Trunk1 1 vrid 10 unflowdown arp broadcast enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 control vid 103 qinq termination qinq ...

Page 267: ... ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 10 l2 binding vsi ldp1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 undo shutdown ip address 200 1 35 3 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 200 1 34 0 0 0 0 255 network 200 1 35 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration fil...

Page 268: ... 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 network 200 1 34 0 0 0 0 255 network 200 1 45 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 mpls lsr id 5 5 5 5 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 100 peer 3 3 3 3 peer 4 4 4 4 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 10 l2 binding vsi ldp1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip addr...

Page 269: ...trol vid 102 qinq termination qinq termination pe vid 10 ce vid 310 ip address 10 102 1 1 255 255 255 0 arp broadcast enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 control vid 103 qinq termination qinq termination pe vid 10 ce vid 410 ip address 10 103 1 1 255 255 255 0 arp broadcast enable bfd link11 bind peer ip 10 100 1 254 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 source i p 10 100 1 1 auto commit bfd li...

Page 270: ...ing scenarios l On a VPLS aggregation network run by another operator different from the operator running the access and core networks a link BFD session cannot be established between NPEs and PEs l PEs do not support BFD On the network shown in Figure 4 22 CEs connect to QinQ termination sub interfaces on NPEs across a VPLS aggregation network On the NPEs an mVRRP backup group and its service VRR...

Page 271: ...stablished between each NPE and each CE The mVRRP backup group tracks each link BFD session The mVRRP backup group can rapidly perform a master backup VRRP switchover if two or more link BFD sessions go Down HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 4 VRRP Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 254 ...

Page 272: ...0 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 ip address 10 100 1 253 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 100 virtual ip 10 100 1 200 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 ip address 10 101 1 253 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 101 virtual ip 10 101 1 200 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 ip address 10 102 1 253 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 102 virtual ip 10 102 1 200 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 ip address 10 103 1 253 255 25...

Page 273: ...group 101 10 102 1 200 for backup group 102 and 10 103 1 200 for backup group 103 among which backup group 10 is an mVRRP backup group and others are service VRRP backup groups l Peer BFD session parameters on each NPE peer IP address of 10 1 1 253 outbound interface of GE 1 0 1 1 and source IP address of 10 1 1 254 on NPE1 peer IP address of 10 1 1 254 outbound interface of GE 1 0 1 1 and source ...

Page 274: ... GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit NPE2 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 control vid 1 qinq termination NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 qinq termination pe vid 10 ce vid 1 to 100 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 ip address 10 1 1 253 24 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 arp broadcast enable NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 quit NPE2 interface gigabitethernet...

Page 275: ... 255 time 100 ms Reply from 10 100 1 253 bytes 56 Sequence 3 ttl 255 time 190 ms Reply from 10 100 1 253 bytes 56 Sequence 4 ttl 255 time 100 ms Reply from 10 100 1 253 bytes 56 Sequence 5 ttl 255 time 90 ms 10 100 1 253 ping statistics 5 packet s transmitted 5 packet s received 0 00 packet loss round trip min avg max 90 114 190 ms Each NPE can ping CEs on the same network segment The links betwee...

Page 276: ...p vrid 103 virtual ip 10 103 1 200 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 quit Configure an mVRRP backup group with the VRID of 10 on GE 1 0 1 1 and configure common VRRP backup groups on other sub interfaces of NPE2 NPE2 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 qinq vrrp pe vid 10 ce vid 100 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vrrp vrid 10 virtual ip 10 1 1 1 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 admin ...

Page 277: ...t1 0 1 1 vrid 10 unflowdown NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 quit NPE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 101 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 vrrp vrid 101 track admin vrrp interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 vrid 10 unflowdown NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 quit NPE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 102 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 vrrp vrid 102 track admin vrrp interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 vrid 10 unflowd...

Page 278: ...e Type Virtual IP 10 Backup GE1 0 1 1 Admin 10 1 1 1 100 Backup GE1 0 1 100 Member 10 100 1 200 101 Backup GE1 0 1 101 Member 10 101 1 200 102 Backup GE1 0 1 102 Member 10 102 1 200 103 Backup GE1 0 1 103 Member 10 103 1 200 The command output shows that the service VRRP backup groups have been successfully bound to the mVRRP backup group and their statuses are correct Step 4 Configure basic BFD f...

Page 279: ...ng configurations and BFD configurations on each CE run the display bfd configuration all command on an NPE The command output shows that the value of the Commit field is True In the following example the display on NPE1 is used NPE1 display bfd configuration all CFG Name CFG Type LocalDiscr MIndex SessNum Commit AdminDown peer1 S_AUTO_IF 8192 256 1 True False link1 S_AUTO_IF 8193 257 1 True False...

Page 280: ...vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link1 link NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link2 link NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link3 link NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link4 link NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vrrp vrid 10 track link bfd down number 2 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 ...

Page 281: ...ssion state UP Create time 2010 06 22 17 35 00 Last change time 2010 06 22 17 35 06 Step 6 Verify the configuration After completing the preceding configurations run the display vrrp brief command on each NPE The command output on NPE1 is as follows l In mVRRP backup group 10 the value of the State field is Master and the value of the Type field is Admin l In each of service VRRP backup groups the...

Page 282: ...le if two or more link BFD sessions go Down the mVRRP backup group will rapidly perform a master backup VRRP switchover As only a single link BFD session went Down currently the mVRRP backup group will not perform a master backup VRRP switchover Run the display vrrp brief command on each NPE The command output on NPE1 is as follows l In mVRRP backup group 10 the value of the State field is Master ...

Page 283: ...ons go Down the mVRRP backup group will rapidly perform a master backup VRRP switchover As two link BFD sessions went Down currently the mVRRP backup group performs a master backup VRRP switchover Run the display vrrp brief command on each NPE The command output on NPE1 is as follows l In mVRRP backup group 10 the value of the State field is Initialize and the value of the Type field is Admin l In...

Page 284: ...oup 10 the value of the State field is Master and the value of the Type field is Admin l In each of service VRRP backup groups the value of the State field is Master and the value of the Type field is Member NPE1 display vrrp brief VRID State Interface Type Virtual IP 10 Master GE1 0 1 1 Admin 10 1 1 1 100 Master GE1 0 1 100 Member 10 100 1 200 101 Master GE1 0 1 101 Member 10 101 1 200 102 Master...

Page 285: ...face GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vrid 10 unflowdown arp broadcast enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 control vid 101 qinq termination qinq termination pe vid 10 ce vid 201 to 300 qinq vrrp pe vid 10 ce vid 201 ip address 10 101 1 254 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 101 virtual ip 10 101 1 200 vrrp vrid 101 track admin vrrp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vrid 10 unflowdown arp broadcast enable interfac...

Page 286: ...sion name link1 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link2 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link3 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name link4 link vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session session name peer1 peer vrrp vrid 10 track link bfd down number 2 vrrp trigger route arp broadcast enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 control vid 100 qinq termination qinq term...

Page 287: ...interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 source ip 10 100 1 253 auto commit bfd link2 bind peer ip 10 101 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 source ip 10 101 1 253 auto commit bfd link3 bind peer ip 10 102 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 source ip 10 102 1 253 auto commit bfd link4 bind peer ip 10 103 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 source ip 10 103 1 253 auto commit bfd peer1 bind pee...

Page 288: ... ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 100 peer 3 3 3 3 peer 5 5 5 5 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 200 1 34 4 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 10 l2 binding vsi ldp1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 4 undo shutdown ip address 200 1 45 4 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 i...

Page 289: ...wn ip address 200 1 45 5 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 5 5 5 5 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 network 200 1 35 0 0 0 0 255 network 200 1 45 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 bfd interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown mode user termination interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 control vid 100 qinq termination qinq...

Page 290: ...4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 103 source ip 10 103 1 1 auto commit bfd link21 bind peer ip 10 100 1 253 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 100 source ip 10 100 1 1 auto commit bfd link22 bind peer ip 10 101 1 253 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 101 source ip 10 101 1 1 auto commit bfd link23 bind peer ip 10 102 1 253 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 102 source ip 10 102 1 1 auto commit bfd link24 bind...

Page 291: ...iating a VRRP backup group with a BFD session RouterA RouterB SwitchA GE2 0 0 10 1 1 1 24 POS1 0 0 192 168 0 2 24 GE2 0 0 10 1 1 2 24 POS1 0 0 192 168 0 1 24 Backbone Network VRRP Backup group 10 Virtual IP address 10 1 1 3 Client GE2 0 0 GE2 0 1 GE2 0 3 NOTE l If a BFD session needs to be configured on two devices but one device does not support BFD configure a BFD session with the one arm Echo f...

Page 292: ...data l IP address of each interface on Router A and Router B For details see Configuration Files l VRID 10 virtual IP address 10 1 1 3 VRRP priorities 160 for Router A and 140 for Router B and value 40 by which Router B increases its VRRP priority and preempts the Master if a link fails l Local and remote discriminators of a peer BFD session Procedure Step 1 Assign an IP address to each interface ...

Page 293: ...er completing the preceding configurations run the display bfd session command on Router A or Router B The peer BFD session is Up In the following example the display on Router A is used RouterA display bfd session all Local Remote PeerIpAddr State Type InterfaceName 1 2 10 1 1 2 Up S_IP_IF GigabitEthernet2 0 0 Total UP DOWN Session Number 1 0 Step 4 Associate the VRRP backup group with the peer B...

Page 294: ...ter A to simulate that GE 2 0 0 of Router A fails RouterA interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 shutdown Run the display vrrp command on Router A The VRRP status is Initialize on Router A RouterA display vrrp GigabitEthernet2 0 0 Virtual Router 10 state Initialize Virtual IP 10 1 1 3 Master IP 10 1 1 1 PriorityRun 160 PriorityConfig 160 MasterPriority 0 Preempt YES Delay Tim...

Page 295: ... priority 160 bfd atob bind peer ip 10 1 1 2 interface gigabitethernet2 0 0 discriminator local 1 discriminator remote 2 min tx interval 50 min rx interval 50 commit return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB bfd interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 10 virtual ip 10 1 1 3 vrrp vrid 10 priority 140 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session 2 inc...

Page 296: ...es To speed up link switchovers configure a BFD session to monitor links and a VRRP backup group to track the BFD session If an interface or a link fails on the master device in the VRRP backup group the BFD session rapidly detects the fault and notifies the VRRP backup group of the fault After receiving the notification the VRRP backup group performs a master backup VRRP switchover The backup dev...

Page 297: ... triggered by a VRRP priority increase by 40 on Router B if the BFD session goes Down NOTE l This example only provides configurations on Router A and Router B l In the scenario described in this example usually on the master device in a VRRP backup group the VRRP backup group is configured to track an EFM session so that the VRRP status becomes Initialize if the EFM session enters the Discovery s...

Page 298: ...Router A The configuration on Router A is similar to that on Router B For the detailed configuration procedure see the configuration file of Router B RouterA bfd RouterA bfd quit RouterA bfd atob bind peer ip 10 1 1 2 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 RouterA bfd session atob discriminator local 1 RouterA bfd session atob discriminator remote 2 RouterA bfd session atob commit RouterA bfd session ato...

Page 299: ...that the VRRP backup group is tracking the peer BFD session and the peer BFD session goes Up RouterA display vrrp GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Virtual Router 10 State Master Virtual IP 10 1 1 111 Master IP 10 1 1 1 PriorityRun 160 PriorityConfig 160 MasterPriority 160 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0110 Check TTL YES Config type normal vrrp Bac...

Page 300: ...up forward disabled Track EFM GigabitEthernet1 0 1 EFM state DOWN Create time 2011 06 14 17 19 10 Last change time 2011 06 14 19 16 21 Run the display efm session all command on Router A The EFM status is Discovery on Router A Run the display vrrp command on Router B The VRRP status is Master on Router B RouterA display efm session all Interface EFM State Loopback Timeout GigabitEthernet1 0 0 disc...

Page 301: ...inator remote 2 commit return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB efm enable bfd interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 10 virtual ip 10 1 1 111 vrrp vrid 10 priority 140 vrrp vrid 10 track bfd session 2 increased 40 efm enable efm error frame period 5 efm error frame threshold 5 efm error frame notification enable efm error frame seco...

Page 302: ...eways are connected to a network along two links and VRRP is configured to determine the active and standby states for the two links If the active link fails and causes the reachable route to the network to change users cannot detect the change and uses the route to transmit traffic causing service data traffic loss To prevent traffic loss a VRRP backup group can be associated with the route If th...

Page 303: ...ace connected to the network If the tracked route is withdrawn or becomes inactive Router A reduces its VRRP priority value and triggers a master backup VRRP switchover Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l IP addresses of interfaces on the switch Router A Router B and Router C shown in Figure 4 25 For details see the configuration files l Virtual IP address ...

Page 304: ...20 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Configure a VRRP backup group with VRID of 1 on Router B RouterB interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 1 1 10 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit After completing the preceding configurations run the display vrrp command on Router A and Router B The VRRP status of Router A is Master and that of Router B is Backup R...

Page 305: ...rnet 2 0 0 RouterC GigabitEthernet2 0 0 isis enable 1 RouterC GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit After completing the preceding configuration run the display isis lsdb command on Router A to view IS IS LSDB information RouterA display isis lsdb Database information for ISIS 1 Level 1 Link State Database LSPID Seq Num Checksum Holdtime Length ATT P OL 0000 0000 0001 00 00 0x0000000d 0x61b6 797 96 0 0 0 0000...

Page 306: ...L 10 2 1 0 24 10 NULL GE2 0 0 Direct D L Flags D Direct A Added to URT L Advertised in LSPs S IGP Shortcut U Up Down Bit Set ISIS 1 Level 2 Forwarding Table IPV4 Destination IntCost ExtCost ExitInterface NextHop Flags 192 168 1 0 24 10 NULL GE1 0 0 Direct D L 10 2 1 0 24 10 NULL GE2 0 0 Direct D L Flags D Direct A Added to URT L Advertised in LSPs S IGP Shortcut U Up Down Bit Set Step 4 Associate ...

Page 307: ...39 45 Last change time 2011 06 08 16 02 16 RouterB display vrrp GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Virtual Router 1 State Master Virtual IP 10 1 1 10 Master IP 10 1 1 2 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 100 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type normal vrrp Backup forward disabled Create time 2011 06 08 15 39 45...

Page 308: ...d Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA isis 1 is level level 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0001 00 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 1 1 10 vrrp vrid 1 priority 120 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 20 vrrp vrid 1 track ip route 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 reduce 40 isis enable 1 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 ...

Page 309: ...v6 Backup Group In this example a VRRP IPv6 backup group is configured to implement backup for gateways that are the next hops of user devices Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E Users access an upper layer network through a gateway router To improve network reliability a VRRP IPv6 backup group can be configured on gateway route...

Page 310: ...state for the routers which ensures device level reliability for network links Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l IP address of each interface on each device For details see configuration files l VRRP priority of each router in the VRRP IPv6 backup group l VRID 1 and virtual IPv6 address 2001 db8 100 for the VRRP IPv6 backup group configured on Router A an...

Page 311: ...hutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 enable RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 address 2001 db8 2 64 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual ip FE80 1 link local RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual ip 2001 db8 100 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Step 4 Verify the configuration After completing the preceding configurations ping host B from host A The ping is successful...

Page 312: ...ackup forward disabled Create time 2000 01 12 20 15 46 UTC 08 00 Last change time 2000 01 12 20 24 16 UTC 08 00 RouterB display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Virtual Router 1 State Master Virtual IP FE80 1 2001 DB8 100 Master IP 2001 DB8 2 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 100 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 100 cs TimerConfig 100 cs Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0201 Check hop limit YES ...

Page 313: ...00 vrrp6 vrid 1 priority 120 vrrp6 vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 20 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 DB8 1 1 64 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB ipv6 ospfv3 1 router id 2 2 2 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 DB8 2 64 vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual i...

Page 314: ...interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E Users access an upper layer network through a gateway router A VRRP IPv6 backup group configured on a gateway router can improve network reliability To load balance traffic configure multiple VRRP IPv6 backup groups on a router Figure 4 27 shows two VRRP IPv6 backup groups working in load balancing mode Router A is the Master...

Page 315: ...e Master in backup group 1 and the Backup in backup group 2 3 Configure backup group 1 and backup group 2 on GE 1 0 0 of Router B and ensure that Router B is the Master in backup group 2 and the Backup in backup group 2 Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l IPv6 address of each interface on each device For details see configuration files l VRID 1 and virtual ...

Page 316: ...an IPv6 address to GE 1 0 0 on Router B create backup group 1 and backup group 2 on GE 1 0 0 set the VRRP priority to 120 for Router B in backup group 2 so that Router B is the Master in backup group 2 and the Backup in backup group 1 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterB RouterB ipv6 RouterB interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 ...

Page 317: ...en successfully created in which Router B is the Master in backup group 2 and the Backup in backup group 1 RouterB display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Virtual Router 1 State Backup Virtual IP FE80 1 2001 DB8 100 Master IP 2001 DB8 1 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 120 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 100 cs TimerConfig 100 cs Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0201 Check hop limit YES Confi...

Page 318: ...shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 DB8 1 1 64 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB ipv6 ospfv3 1 router id 1 1 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 DB8 2 64 vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual ip FE80 1 link local vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual ip 2001 DB8 100 vrrp6 vrid 2 virtual ip FE80 2 link local vrrp6 vrid 2 virtual ip 2001 DB8 60...

Page 319: ...gured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E Users access an upper layer network through a gateway router To improve network reliability the gateway router is configured with a VRRP IPv6 backup group VRRP IPv6 association can be configured to rapidly perform an active standby link switchover if a fault occurs On the network shown in Figure 4 28 the master router is transmitting data VRRP IPv6 as...

Page 320: ...ss of a directly connected interface is specified in the bfd bfd name bind peer ip command to configure the link BFD session Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Assign an IP address to each interface of each Router and configure OSPF on each Router to ensure network connectivity 2 Configure a VRRP IPv6 backup group on routers and set different VRRP priorities for the de...

Page 321: ...er A create VRRP IPv6 backup group 1 on GE 1 0 0 set the VRRP priority to 120 so that Router A is the Master HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterA RouterA ipv6 RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 enable RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 address 2001 db8 1 64 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual ip FE8...

Page 322: ...Remote PeerIpAddr State Type InterfaceName 1 2 2001 DB8 2 Up S_IP_IF GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Total UP DOWN Session Number 1 0 Step 5 Configure VRRP IPv6 association Associate the VRRP IPv6 backup group with the VRRP disabled interface connecting Router A to the upper layer network RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 vrrp6 vrid 1 track interface pos 1 0 0 reduce 40 Rou...

Page 323: ... command on POS 1 0 0 of Router A to simulate that POS 1 0 0 associated with the VRRP backup group fails Run the display vrrp6 command on Router A and Router B The command output shows that the VRRP status is Backup on Router A and Master on Router B RouterA display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Virtual Router 1 State Backup Virtual IP FE80 1 2001 DB8 100 Master IP 2001 DB8 2 PriorityRun 80 PriorityC...

Page 324: ...Priority 120 Preempt YES Delay Time 20 s TimerRun 100 cs TimerConfig 100 cs Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0201 Check hop limit YES Config type normal vrrp Backup forward disabled Track IF POS1 0 0 Priority reduced 40 IF State UP Create time 2010 06 22 17 40 00 UTC 08 00 Last change time 2010 06 22 17 40 04 UTC 08 00 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA ipv6 bfd ospfv3 1...

Page 325: ...8 100 vrrp6 vrid 1 track bfd session 2 increased 40 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 DB8 2 1 64 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 bfd atob bind peer ip 2001 DB8 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 min tx interval 50 min rx interval 50 commit return l Configuration file of Router C sysname RouterC i...

Page 326: ...0 0 0 interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 DB8 2 2 64 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 return HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 4 VRRP Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 309 ...

Page 327: ...ngle hop link 5 5 Configuring the Association Between the BFD Status and the Sub Interface Status By associating the BFD session status with the sub interface status you can trigger fast route convergence This function is applicable to the single hop BFD session that detects default multicast IP addresses 5 6 Configuring the BFD to Modify the PST By configuring a BFD session to modify the PST you ...

Page 328: ...ng an earlier version and between a Huawei device and a non Huawei device 5 13 Configuring the TTL Function Globally Configuring the TTL globally helps you connect the current device and a device running an early version 5 14 Configuring the Interval for Trap Messages Are Sent The interval at which trap messages are sent is set helping a device to suppress BFD trap messages 5 15 Setting the Trap T...

Page 329: ...t a fault between interconnected systems is difficult to locate BFD is developed to resolve these problems BFD provides the following functions l Detects faults rapidly along paths between neighboring forwarding engines with light loads and high speeds l Uses a single mechanism to monitor any kind of medium and protocol layer in real time Detection time and costs vary 5 1 2 BFD Features Supported ...

Page 330: ...cable If these two sessions share the same configurations the source address destination address outgoing interface and VPN index one BFD session works as both the dynamic BFD session and the static BFD session with automatically negotiated discriminators If the dynamic BFD session named DYN_local discriminator is configured prior to the static BFD session the static BFD session s name replaces th...

Page 331: ... about the IP Trunk configuration refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide WAN Access for information about the Eth Trunk configuration refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide LAN Access and MAN Access l VLANIF Ethernet member links in a VLAN VLANIF interface BFD sessions are separately created on a VLANIF interface and its VLANIF member interfaces to...

Page 332: ...tifies the application of the result Association between the BFD status and the interface status means that if the BFD session status changes the BFD status on the interface in the IFNET module is modified This function is applicable only to a single hop BFD session that is bound to the outgoing interface and uses the default multicast address Association is classified into the following modes l A...

Page 333: ...ity is required and a great number of services are configured on the sub interface such as a large scale MAN Ethernet Changing Detection Parameters Dynamically After a BFD session is set up detection parameters such as the minimum sending interval minimum receiving interval or detecting mode can be changed without affecting the current session status Binding a VPN Instance On the NE80E 40E a BFD s...

Page 334: ... its neighbors can be monitored by exchanging Hello packets at intervals The minimum allowable sending interval is 3s and a neighbor is declared Down after at least three intervals during which no response Hello packet is received from the neighbor IS IS takes more than one second to detect that a neighbor becomes Down resulting in loss of a large amount of high speed data To solve this problem BF...

Page 335: ...rface the link status can be rapidly detected and fault detection can be completed in milliseconds This speeds up OSPF convergence when the link status changes Configuring BFD for OSPF BFD for OSPFv3 To increase the convergence speed of OSPFv3 when the link status changes you can configure BFD on OSPFv3 links BFD keeps track of liveliness of network links and detects any faults in the links much f...

Page 336: ...speeds up RIP processes response to network topology changes and achieves rapid RIP route convergence Configuring Static BFD for RIP Configuring BFD for RIP BFD for BGP As technologies develop voice and video services are widely applied These services are quite sensitive to the packet loss and delay BGP periodically sends Keepalive packets to its peers to detect the status of its peers The detecti...

Page 337: ...o monitor the connectivity of the static LSP that is established manually Configuring Static BFD for Static LSP BFD for LDP LSP With BFD for LDP LSP failure detection speeds up and the workload of configuring decreases In addition LDP FRR is well supported for the LSP for providing better services Configuring Static BFD for LDP LSP Configuring Dynamic BFD for LDP LSP BFD for LDP Tunnel Dynamic BFD...

Page 338: ...SVP If a Layer 2 device exists on a link between RSVP neighboring nodes the neighboring node cannot rapidly detect the fault after the link fails resulting in a great loss of data BFD detects faults at millisecond level in protected links or nodes BFD for RSVP rapidly detects faults in an RSVP neighbor allowing packets to switch to a backup LSP rapidly BFD for RSVP is applied to a scenario where T...

Page 339: ...t up between PEs BFD can be used to detect faults of the PWs In this way the speed for sensing link faults and the speed of the fast switchover of applications at the upper layer are accelerated Configuring Static BFD for PW Configuring Dynamic BFD for PW BFD for VSI PW When VPLS PW redundancy is used on metro Ethernet networks configuring BFD for the primary PW speeds up fault detection and there...

Page 340: ...eighbor relationship This shortens the duration of interruption of data transmission and enhances the reliability of the network Configuring BFD for IPv4 PIM Configuring BFD for IPv6 PIM 5 2 Configuring Single hop BFD A single hop BFD session rapidly detects faults on direct links over a network 5 2 1 Before You Start Before configuring a single hop BFD session familiarize yourself with the usage ...

Page 341: ...w The system view is displayed Step 2 Run bfd BFD is enabled globally and the BFD view is displayed Step 3 Optional Run default ip address ip address The default multicast IP address of BFD is configured The default multicast IP address used by BFD is 224 0 0 184 NOTE l Currently multicast address detection is supported only in BFD for IPv4 but not BFD for IPv6 Therefore this command is applicable...

Page 342: ...source ip to specify a correct source IP address for BFD packets during the creation of a BFD binding as URPF checks the source IP address of received packets If this is not done correctly BFD packets are discarded mistakenly On a Layer 2 interface or a Layer 3 physical member interface without an IP address run bfd bfd name bind peer ip default ip interface interface type interface number source ...

Page 343: ...ions of a single hop BFD session are complete Context NOTE Statistics and detailed information about BFD sessions can be queried only after BFD session parameters have been set and BFD sessions have been set up Procedure l Run the display bfd configuration all static name bfd name discriminator local discr value dynamic peer ip peer ip vpn instance vpn instance name verbose command to check BFD co...

Page 344: ...Hop Ip Address 2001 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 Bind Interface GigabitEthernet1 2 0 FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interface status Disable Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms Active Multi 3 Last...

Page 345: ...at the remote end In the IP packet that encapsulates the BFD Echo packet the destination address and the source address are the IP address of the outgoing interface of the local end Therefore in the ACL rule both the source addresses of the remote end and the local end must be permitted Data Preparation To configure the BFD passive Echo function you need the following data No Data 1 Optional ACL n...

Page 346: ...fy the permit parameter for both the local and remote devices source addresses You can enable the passive Echo function for BFD control packets that match the permit action and disable the passive Echo function for BFD control packets that match the deny action or do not match any ACL rules NOTE If an ACL rule is created or changed after a BFD session goes Up through negotiations this ACL rule can...

Page 347: ...nit TmrID Session WTR TmrID Session Echo Tx TmrID PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 Session Description The command output shows that the Echo Passive field indicates Enable which means that the passive echo function is enabled for the BFD session If the Echo Passive field indicates Disable this means that the passive echo function is disabled for the BFD session The passive echo function can be ...

Page 348: ...r the forwarding of BFD packets is not affected Pre configuration Tasks Before configuring the association between BFD status and interface status you need to complete the task of 5 2 Configuring Single hop BFD NOTE Only the one hop BFD session to which the default multicast IP address is bound can implement the association between BFD status and interface status You can run the bfd bfd name bind ...

Page 349: ...d to the interface notifies the interface that the BFD session is Down when the NE80E 40E is restarted in view of the initial status of an interface being Down l Before the BFD status is associated with the interface status the BFD configurations on the two NE80E 40Es must be correct and symmetrical If the BFD status on the local interface is Down check whether the BFD configuration on the peer is...

Page 350: ...op Ip Address 224 0 0 184 Bind Interface GigabiEthernet2 0 0 FSM Board Id 2 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interface status Enable Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms Active Multi 3 Last Local Diagnostic No Diagnostic...

Page 351: ...lowing tasks l Enable BFD globally l Set up the one hop BFD session which is bound to the main interface and uses the default multicast address for detection l Set up the BFD session and ensure that the BFD session is Up Data Preparation To configure the association between the BFD status and the sub interface status you need the following data No Data 1 Name of the BFD session 5 5 2 Configuring t...

Page 352: ...FD session notifies the interface of the Up state Otherwise the BFD session regards the link as failed and notifies the interface of the Down state after the timer expires In this manner the BFD session status and the interface status are in real time synchronization l If the shutdown command is run the BFD status will not be send to the interface l If the process interface status command is saved...

Page 353: ...ber Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interface status Enable Sub If Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms Active Multi 3 Last Local Diagnostic Bind Application IFNET Session TX TmrID Session Detect TmrID Session Init TmrID Session WTR TmrID Session Echo Tx TmrID PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 Session Description The preceding display shows that the value of the field Proc interface status is E...

Page 354: ...he HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide IP Routing l For information about the IP FRR for the private network refer to Chapter 4 BGP MPLS IP VPN Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN Pre configuration Tasks Before configuring the BFD to modify the PST complete the task of 5 2 Configuring Single hop BFD Data Preparation To configure the BFD to mod...

Page 355: ...om flapping when the member interface joins or exits from the main interface For the configuration of the WTR for the BFD session see 5 11 3 Configuring the BFD WTR Step 4 Run commit The configurations are committed End 5 6 3 Checking the Configurations By viewing the enabling status of a PST you can check whether the configurations are successful Prerequisites The configurations of the BFD to mod...

Page 356: ...Session WTR TmrID Session Echo Tx TmrID PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 Session Description Total UP DOWN Session Number 1 0 5 7 Configuring the Multi Hop BFD By configuring a multi hop BFD session you can fast detect and monitor multi hop links on a network 5 7 1 Before You Start Before configuring a multi hop BFD session familiarize yourself with the usage scenario and data preparation Applic...

Page 357: ...D view is displayed End 5 7 3 Setting Up a BFD Session By creating a BFD session on both ends of a multi hop link you can fast detect faults on the multi hop link Context Perform the following steps on the router Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Select the step based on the type of the link detected by BFD l For an IPv4 link Run the bfd bfd name bind peer ip pee...

Page 358: ...IPv6 link Run the bfd bfd name bind peer ipv6 peer ipv6 vpn instance vpn instance name source ipv6 ipv6 address command to configure a BFD6 session When setting up a BFD6 session for the first time you need to bind the peer IPv6 address to the session The binding cannot be modified once the BFD6 session is set up If the specified peer IPv6 address is a link local address the outbound interface sho...

Page 359: ...tor discr value dynamic peer ip peer ip vpn instance vpn instance name static verbose slot slot id to check the BFD session l Run thedisplay bfd session all static peer ipv6 peer ipv6 vpn instance vpn instance name verbose slot slot id command to check information about the BFD6 session l Run the display bfd statistics slot slot id to check the global statistics of the BFD session l Run the displa...

Page 360: ...vice and another device on which a BFD session has been dynamically established The static BFD session with automatically negotiated discriminators is applicable to static routes 5 8 1 Before You Start Before configuring a static BFD session with automatically negotiated discriminators familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain data required for th...

Page 361: ...Session A static BFD session with automatically negotiated discriminators is configured to rapidly detect link faults Context Perform the following steps on the router on which a static BFD session with automatically negotiated discriminators is used to detect link faults Perform the following step as required to configure BFD for IPv4 or BFD for IPv6 Procedure l To configured BFD for IPv4 1 Run s...

Page 362: ...iscriminator discr value peer ip peer ip vpn instance vpn instance name verbose slot slot id command to check information about a BFD session End Example After the configuration is complete run the display bfd session all verbose command You can see that a BFD session of the Static_Auto type has been established The local and remote discriminators of this BFD session are 8193 and 8192 respectively...

Page 363: ...rt Before configuring a delay for a BFD session status change to Up familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the data required for the configuration Applicable Environment If BFD is Up on a network the interface bound to BFD goes Up and traffic can be switched back to the interface If the interface goes Up before the status of the routing protoco...

Page 364: ...tions are successful Prerequisites The configurations of the delay of a BFD session to go Up are complete Procedure Step 1 Run the display bfd statistics slot slot id command to check statistics about global BFD End Example After the configuration restart the router After the restart run the display bfd statistics command The System Session Delay Up Timer field in the command output This field dis...

Page 365: ...0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 0 24 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 28 0 29 0 30 0 31 0 32 0 33 0 34 0 35 0 36 0 37 0 BFD HA Information Core Current HA Status Normal Shell Current HA Status Normal BFD for LSP Information Ability of auto creating BFD session on egress Disable Period of LSP Ping 60 System Session Delay Up Timer OFF 5 10 Configuring a ...

Page 366: ...ion with the one arm Echo function you need the following data No Data 1 Name of a BFD session 2 Minimum interval at which BFD packets are received 5 10 2 Enable BFD Globally BFD associated configurations can be performed only after BFD has been enabled globally Context Perform the following steps on the BFD supported device at one end of a link Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is ...

Page 367: ...discriminator rather than a remote discriminator Step 4 Optional Run min echo rx interval interval The minimum interval between receipt of BFD packets is set By default the minimum interval between receipt of BFD packets is 10 milliseconds Step 5 Run commit The configuration is committed NOTE After configuring the local discriminator parameter and any other required parameters for a BFD session wi...

Page 368: ... 1 Remote Discriminator Session Detect Mode Asynchronous One arm echo Mode BFD Bind Type Interface gigabitEthernet1 0 0 Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer IP Address 10 1 1 2 NextHop Ip Address 10 1 1 2 Bind Interface EigabitEthernet1 0 0 FSM Board Id 0 TOS EXP 7 Echo Rx Interval ms 100 Actual Tx Interval ms 1000 Actual Rx Interval ms 1000 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 3000 Echo Passive ...

Page 369: ...sion If none of the preceding parameters is set the default configurations are used Pre configuration Tasks Before adjusting BFD parameters you need to set up a BFD session Data Preparation To adjust BFD parameters you need the following data No Data 1 BFD configuration name 2 Local intervals at which BFD packets are sent and received 3 Local BFD detection multiplier 5 11 2 Modifying the Detection...

Page 370: ...eated run a corresponding command such as process pst process interface status min tx interval min rx interval detect multiplier tos exp BFD session view wtr or description The modification takes effect immediately without the commit command configured End Follow up Procedure To efficiently use system resources when detecting that a BFD session goes Down the system automatically adjusts the interv...

Page 371: ... one end changes l To modify a parameter after a BFD session has been created run a corresponding command such as process pst process interface status min tx interval min rx interval detect multiplier tos exp BFD session view wtr or description The modification takes effect immediately without the commit command configured End 5 11 4 Adding the Description of a BFD Session Descriptions of BFD sess...

Page 372: ...fect immediately without the commit command configured End 5 11 5 Setting the Priority of a BFD Session A priority can be set for a BFD session Packets of a BFD session with high priority can be preferentially transmitted Procedure l Setting the Priority for a static BFD Session 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run bfd bfd name The BFD session view is displayed 3 Run tos exp tos va...

Page 373: ...value is an integer ranging from 0 to 7 The default priority is 7 End 5 11 6 Checking the Configurations By viewing the adjusted BFD parameters you can check whether the configurations are successful Prerequisites The configurations for BFD parameter adjustment are complete Context NOTE Before viewing BFD session information you must set session parameters and create the session Procedure l Run th...

Page 374: ...ype Static Bind Peer Ip Address 10 1 1 2 NextHop Ip Address 10 1 1 2 Bind Interface GigabitEthernet1 2 0 FSM Board Id 6 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 500 Min Rx Interval ms 500 Actual Tx Interval ms 500 Actual Rx Interval ms 500 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interface status Disable Process PST Enable WTR Interval ms 60...

Page 375: ... destination port 3784 for the multi hop BFD control packet l To interwork with the non Huawei device the device running the NE80E 40E can be configured with destination port 4784 for the multi hop BFD control packet Pre configuration Tasks Before globally configuring the destination port number for the multi hop BFD control packet complete the following tasks l Install the device and turning it o...

Page 376: ... and 3784 and finally run the undo shutdown command to restore the BFD session End 5 12 3 Checking the Configurations By viewing the destination port number and TTL in multi hop BFD control packets you can check whether the configurations are successful Prerequisites All global configurations of the destination port number of the multi hop BFD control packet are completed Context NOTE You can view...

Page 377: ...Bind Session TX TmrID Session Detect TmrID Session Init TmrID Session WTR TmrID Session Echo Tx TmrID PDT Index FSM B030000 RCV 0 IF B030000 TOKEN 0 Session Description 5 13 Configuring the TTL Function Globally Configuring the TTL globally helps you connect the current device and a device running an early version 5 13 1 Before You Start Before configuring the TTL globally familiarize yourself wit...

Page 378: ...single hop BFD packets is 255 and the TTL for multi hop BFD packets is 254 in a dynamic BFD session the TTL for single hop BFD packets is 255 and the TTL for multi hop BFD packets is 253 l If a TTL is set for packets in a multi hop BFD session that is in the same segment as a single hop BFD session the single BFD session must be configured with the same IP address a longer mask than that for the m...

Page 379: ...s are sent familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the data required for the configuration Applicable Environment If BFD is enabled with the SNMP trap function the NMS receives messages indicating that the BFD session is Up or Down If the BFD session flaps the NMS will receive a large number of trap messages In this case BFD trap messages need t...

Page 380: ...messages are sent is 120 seconds End 5 14 3 Checking the Configurations By viewing the interval at which trap messages are sent you can check whether the configurations are successful Prerequisites The configurations of the interval at which trap messages are sent are complete Procedure l Run the display current configuration configuration bfd command to view the configuration of the BFD trap func...

Page 381: ...mission channel in percentage If the bandwidth consumed by a service session exceeds the set threshold the device reports a trap to the NMS Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run oam bandwidth threshold alarm threshold slot slot id The trap threshold is set for the bandwidth consumption in the fast packet transmission channel alarm threshold is an integer ranging ...

Page 382: ...g BFD statistics and monitoring BFD operations 5 16 1 Clearing BFD Statistics Deleting previous BFD statistics before collecting BFD statistics within a specified period of time is recommended Context NOTICE BFD statistics cannot be restored after being deleted Exercise caution when using the command Procedure l Run the reset bfd statistics all slot slot id discriminator discr value command in the...

Page 383: ... slot id command in any view to check statistics about a BFD session l Run the display bfd statistics session all static peer ipv6 peer ipv6 slot slot id command in any view to check statistics about a BFD6 session End 5 17 Configuration Examples The following sections provide several examples for configuring fast BFD link detection Each configuration example consists of the networking requirement...

Page 384: ...ultiplier for BFD control packets are used Procedure Step 1 Configure IP addresses for directly connected interfaces on Router A and Router B Configure the IP address of the interface on Router A HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterA RouterA interface pos 1 0 0 RouterA Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA Pos1 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 1 24 RouterA Pos1 0 0 quit Configure the IP address of the interface...

Page 385: ...ample RouterA display bfd session all verbose Session MIndex 256 One Hop State Up Name atob Local Discriminator 1 Remote Discriminator 2 Session Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface Pos1 0 0 Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer Ip Address 10 1 1 2 NextHop Ip Address 10 1 1 2 Bind Interface Pos1 0 0 FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ...

Page 386: ...single hop BFD sessions on IP Trunk member interfaces are configured to rapidly check direct links between IP Trunk member interfaces Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models ofNE80E 40Es On the network shown in Figure 5 5 an IP Trunk link composed of two POS links exists between Router A and Router B BFD is performed on the IP Trunk member POS 1 0 0...

Page 387: ...runk1 undo shutdown RouterA Ip Trunk1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA Ip Trunk1 least active linknumber 1 RouterA Ip Trunk1 quit RouterA interface pos 1 0 0 RouterA Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA Pos1 0 0 link protocol hdlc RouterA Pos1 0 0 ip trunk 1 RouterA Pos1 0 0 quit RouterA interface pos 2 0 0 RouterA Pos2 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA Pos2 0 0 link protocol hdlc RouterA Pos2 0 0 ip t...

Page 388: ...ut bandwidth utilization 0 01 Output bandwidth utilization 0 01 PortName Status Weight Pos1 0 0 UP 1 Pos2 0 0 UP 1 The Number of Ports in Trunk 2 The Number of UP Ports in Trunk 2 The IP Trunk interfaces of Router A and Router B can ping through each other RouterA ping a 10 1 1 1 10 1 1 2 PING 10 1 1 2 56 data bytes press CTRL_C to break Reply from 10 1 1 2 bytes 56 Sequence 1 ttl 255 time 310 ms ...

Page 389: ...ddress 224 0 0 184 NextHop Ip Address 224 0 0 184 Bind Interface Pos1 0 0 FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interface status Disable Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms 300000 Active Multi 3 Last Local Dia...

Page 390: ...ocol up time 2009 11 12 11 22 19 Description Ip Trunk1 Interface Route Port Route Port Hash arithmetic According to flow Maximal BW 5G Current BW 5G The Maximum Transmit Unit is 4470 Internet Address is 10 1 1 1 24 Link layer protocol is nonstandard HDLC Physical is IP_TRUNK Last 300 seconds input rate 192 bits sec 0 packets sec Last 300 seconds output rate 24 bits sec 0 packets sec Realtime 0 sec...

Page 391: ...default ip interface pos 1 0 0 discriminator local 20 discriminator remote 10 wtr 5 commit return 5 17 3 Example for Configuring Singe hop BFD for an IP Trunk Link In this example a single hop BFD session is configured to rapidly check direct links between two IP Trunk interfaces Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models ofNE80E 40Es On the network sh...

Page 392: ...igure an IP Trunk interface Create an IP Trunk interface on Router A and set the lower threshold of IP Trunk member links in the Up state to 1 NOTE By default the lower threshold of IP Trunk member links in the Up state is 1 It is configurable based on networking environments HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterA RouterA interface ip trunk 1 RouterA Ip Trunk1 undo shutdown RouterA Ip Trunk1 ip...

Page 393: ...nit is 4470 Internet Address is 10 1 1 1 24 Link layer protocol is nonstandard HDLC Physical is IP_TRUNK Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec Realtime 0 seconds input rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec Realtime 0 seconds output rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec Input 0 packets 0 bytes 0 errors 0 drops Output 0 packets 0 bytes 0 errors 0 ...

Page 394: ...lay bfd session all verbose command on Router A or Router B You can view that a single hop BFD session has been set up and its status is Up Use the display on Router A as an example RouterA display bfd session all verbose Session MIndex 256 One Hop State Up Name atob Local Discriminator 10 Remote Discriminator 20 Session Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface I...

Page 395: ...pplication No Application Bind Session TX TmrID Session Detect TmrID Session Init TmrID Session WTR TmrID PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 Session Description Total UP DOWN Session Number 1 0 RouterA display interface ip trunk 1 Ip Trunk1 current state UP Line protocol current state UP Last line protocol up time 2007 11 14 10 12 45 Description Ip Trunk1 Interface Route Port Route Port Hash arith...

Page 396: ...l Detection Time Expired Bind Application No Application Bind Session TX TmrID Session Detect TmrID Session Init TmrID Session WTR TmrID PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 Session Description Total UP DOWN Session Number 1 0 RouterA display interface ip trunk 1 Ip Trunk1 current state Down Line protocol current state Down Last line protocol up time 2007 11 15 12 12 19 Description Ip Trunk1 Interfa...

Page 397: ...tor local 10 discriminator remote 20 wtr 5 commit return l Configuration file Router B sysname RouterB bfd interface Ip Trunk1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol hdlc undo shutdown ip trunk 1 interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol hdlc undo shutdown ip trunk 1 bfd btoa bind peer ip 10 1 1 1 interface ip trunk 1 discriminator local 20 discriminator remote 10 ...

Page 398: ...2 Configure single hop BFD for a specified member link Data Preparation To configure the one hop BFD for Layer 3 Eth Trunk member link you need the following data l Peer IP address for a BFD session which is the IP address of an Eth Trunk member link l Local member link interface sending and receiving BFD control packets l Local and remote discriminators of a BFD session NOTE Default values of the...

Page 399: ...or Router B You can view that the status of the interface is Up Use the display on Router A as an example RouterA display interface eth trunk 1 Eth Trunk1 current state UP Line protocol current state UP Last line protocol up time 2007 11 10 11 35 19 Current system time 2010 08 30 18 02 12 Description Eth Trunk1 Interface Route Port Hash arithmetic According to flow Maximal BW 4G Current BW 4G The ...

Page 400: ... bind peer ip default ip interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterB bfd session to_link1 discriminator local 11 RouterB bfd session to_link1 discriminator remote 10 RouterB bfd session to_link1 wtr 5 RouterB bfd session to_link1 commit RouterB bfd session to_link1 quit Step 3 Verify the configuration After the configurations run the display bfd session all verbose command on Router A and Router B You...

Page 401: ...ation No Application Bind Session TX TmrID Session Detect TmrID Session Init TmrID Session WTR TmrID PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 Session Description Total UP DOWN Session Number 1 0 RouterA display interface eth trunk 1 Eth Trunk1 current state UP Line protocol current state UP Last line protocol up time 2007 11 23 11 52 49 Current system time 2010 08 30 18 04 12 Description Eth Trunk1 Inte...

Page 402: ...0 discriminator local 10 discriminator remote 11 wtr 5 commit return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB bfd interface Eth Trunk1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown eth trunk 1 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown eth trunk 1 bfd to_link1 bind peer ip default ip interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 discriminator local 11 dis...

Page 403: ... 2 Configure single hop BFD for a Layer 3 Eth Trunk link Data Preparation To configure single hop BFD for a Layer 3 Eth Trunk link you need the following data l Peer IP address for a BFD session which is the IP address of the peer Eth Trunk interface l Local interface sending and receiving BFD control packets l Local and remote discriminators of a BFD session NOTE Default values of the minimum sen...

Page 404: ...ce gigabitethernet 2 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 eth trunk 1 RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit After the configurations are complete run the display interface eth trunk command on Router A or Router B You can view that the status of the interface is Up Use the display on Router A as an example RouterA display interface eth trunk 1 Eth Trunk1 current ...

Page 405: ...riminator remote 20 RouterA bfd session atob wtr 5 RouterA bfd session atob commit RouterA bfd session atob quit Enable BFD on Router B configure the BFD session between Router B and Router A and bind Router B s Eth Trunk interface to the BFD session RouterB bfd RouterB bfd quit RouterB bfd btoa bind peer ip 10 1 1 1 interface eth trunk 1 RouterB bfd session btoa discriminator local 20 RouterB bfd...

Page 406: ...hout Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface Eth Trunk1 Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer Ip Address 10 1 1 2 NextHop Ip Address 10 1 1 2 Bind Interface Eth Trunk1 FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interfac...

Page 407: ... Address 10 1 1 2 Bind Interface Eth Trunk1 FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interface status Disable Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms 300000 Active Multi 3 Last Local Diagnostic Control Detection Time...

Page 408: ...name RouterA bfd interface Eth Trunk1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown eth trunk 1 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown eth trunk 1 bfd atob bind peer ip 10 1 1 2 interface Eth Trunk 1 discriminator local 10 discriminator remote 20 wtr 5 commit return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB bfd interface Eth Trunk1 undo s...

Page 409: ...1 0 0 GE1 0 0 VLANIF10 10 1 1 1 24 VLANIF10 10 1 1 2 24 Configuration Roadmaps The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure a VLAN based on the interface 2 Configure a single hop BFD session between VLANIF interfaces Data Preparation To configure single hop BFD for VLANIF interfaces you need the following data l Peer IP address for a BFD session which is the IP address of the peer VLANIF in...

Page 410: ...ent state UP Last line protocol up time 2007 11 14 10 45 35 Current system time 2010 08 30 18 13 11 Description Vlanif10 Interface Route Port The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Internet Address is 10 1 1 1 24 IP Sending Frames Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 00e0 fc50 c43d Physical is VLANIF Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits sec 0 ...

Page 411: ...se command on Router A and Router B You can view that a single hop BFD session has been set up and that its status is Up Use the display on Router A as an example RouterA display bfd session all verbose Session MIndex 256 One Hop State Up Name atob Local Discriminator 10 Remote Discriminator 20 Session Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface Vlanif10 Bind Sessio...

Page 412: ...l Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc interface status Disable Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms Active Multi 3 Last Local Diagnostic Control Detection Time Expired Bind Application No Application Bind Session TX TmrID Session Detect TmrID Session Init TmrID Session WTR TmrID PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TO...

Page 413: ...ssion devices fails Router A and Router B take a long time to detect the link failure This causes a long route aging time and long traffic interruption In this case you can configure the association between the BFD sessions status and the interface status The status of the BFD session between GE 1 0 0 on Router A and GE 1 0 0 on Router B can affect the protocol status of these interfaces which tri...

Page 414: ...s of the interface on Router B HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterB RouterB interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 2 24 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Step 2 Configure a single hop BFD session On Router A enable BFD and configure a BFD session between Router A and Router B RouterA bfd RouterA bfd quit Router...

Page 415: ... PDT Index FSM 5000000 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 Session Description Total UP DOWN Session Number 1 0 Step 3 Configure the association between the BFD status and the interface status Configure the association between the BFD status and the interface status on Router A RouterA bfd atob RouterA bfd session atob process interface status RouterA bfd session atob commit RouterA bfd session atob quit Configure...

Page 416: ...own Name atob Local Discriminator 10 Remote Discriminator 20 Session Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer Ip Address 224 0 0 184 NextHop Ip Address 224 0 0 184 Bind Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 FSM Board Id 3 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Inter...

Page 417: ... 0 packets Alignment 0 packets Fragment 0 packets Undersized Frame 0 packets RxPause 0 packets Output Unicast 8622 packets Multicast 5293 packets Broadcast 11 packets Jumbo 0 packets Lost 0 packets Overflow 0 packets Underrun 0 packets TxPause 0 packets Unknown Vlan 0 packets End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA bfd interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown i...

Page 418: ...ion between the BFD status and the sub interface status RouterA RouterB GE1 0 0 GE1 0 0 GE1 0 0 1 GE1 0 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure a BFD session on Router A 2 Configure a BFD session on Router B 3 Associate the BFD status with the sub interface status when the BFD session on Router A is Up 4 Associate the BFD status with the sub interface status w...

Page 419: ...thernet1 0 0 1 undo shutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 ip address 10 2 1 2 24 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 10 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Step 2 Configure single hop BFD On Router A enable BFD and configure a BFD session between Router A and Router B and bind the session with the main interface RouterA bfd RouterA bfd quit RouterA bfd atob bind peer ip default ip int...

Page 420: ...us Configure the association between the BFD status and the sub interface status on Router A RouterA bfd atob RouterA bfd session atob process interface status sub if RouterA bfd session atob commit RouterA bfd session atob quit Configure the association between the BFD status and the sub interface status on Router B RouterB bfd btoa RouterB bfd session btoa process interface status sub if RouterB...

Page 421: ...t Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer Ip Address 224 0 0 184 Bind Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 FSM Board Id 3 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 378...

Page 422: ...net1 0 0 discriminator local 10 discriminator remote 20 process interface status sub if commit return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB bfd interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 undo shutdown vlan type dot1q 10 ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 bfd btoa bind peer ip default ip interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 di...

Page 423: ...owing data l Peer IP address for a BFD session l Local and remote discriminators of a BFD session NOTE Default values of the minimum sending interval minimum receiving interval and local detection multiplier for BFD control packets are used Procedure Step 1 Configure reachable routes between Router A Router B and Router C In this example static routes are used The detailed configurations are not p...

Page 424: ...al Discriminator 10 Remote Discriminator 20 Session Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Peer Ip Address Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer Ip Address 10 2 1 2 Bind Interface FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number De...

Page 425: ... 1 1 discriminator local 20 discriminator remote 10 wtr 10 commit ip route static 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 2 1 1 return 5 17 10 Example for Configuring a BFD Session with the One Arm Echo Function In this example configuring the one arm Echo function on a BFD capable device on one end of a link allows you to use BFD to rapidly detect and monitor the direct link between the BFD capable device and ...

Page 426: ...ction l The minimum interval between the receipt of BFD packets Procedure Step 1 Assign IP addresses to the interfaces directly connecting Router A and Router B Assign an IP address to the interface on Router A HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterA RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 1 24 RouterA Giga...

Page 427: ...rnet1 0 0 FSM Board Id 0 TOS EXP 7 Echo Rx Interval ms 100 Actual Tx Interval ms 1000 Actual Rx Interval ms 1000 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 3000 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 255 Proc Interface Status Disable Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms Local Demand Mode Disable Active Multi 3 Last Local Diagnostic Control Detection Time Expired Bind Application No ...

Page 428: ... GE 1 0 0 of PE1 and GE 1 0 0 of PE2 are bound to VPN A l BFD in asynchronous mode is used to detect faults in the VPN route between PE1 and PE2 Figure 5 14 Networking diagram of BFD for VPN routes POS2 0 0 172 16 1 1 24 GE1 0 0 10 1 1 2 24 POS1 0 0 172 16 1 2 24 POS2 0 0 172 20 1 1 24 POS2 0 0 172 20 1 2 24 GE1 0 0 10 1 1 1 24 GE1 0 0 10 2 1 1 24 GE1 0 0 10 2 1 2 24 Loopback1 1 1 1 1 32 Loopback1...

Page 429: ...e 1 ttl 254 time 60 ms Reply from 10 2 1 2 bytes 56 Sequence 2 ttl 254 time 50 ms Reply from 10 2 1 2 bytes 56 Sequence 3 ttl 254 time 50 ms Reply from 10 2 1 2 bytes 56 Sequence 4 ttl 254 time 60 ms Reply from 10 2 1 2 bytes 56 Sequence 5 ttl 254 time 50 ms 10 2 1 2 ping statistics 5 packet s transmitted 5 packet s received 0 00 packet loss round trip min avg max 50 54 60 ms Step 4 Configure BFD ...

Page 430: ...l Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passive Disable Acl Number Destination Port 3784 TTL 254 Proc interface status Disable Process PST Disable WTR Interval ms 300000 Active Multi 3 Last Local Diagnostic No Diagnostic Bind Application No Application Bind Session TX TmrID Session Detect TmrID Session Init TmrID Session WTR TmrID PDT Index FSM ...

Page 431: ...eer 10 1 1 1 as number 65410 import route direct ospf 100 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 172 16 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 ip vpn instance vpna ipv4 family route distinguisher 200 1 vpn target 111 1 export extcommunity vpn target 111 1 import extcommunity mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls ldp bfd interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip addr...

Page 432: ... 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 172 20 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of the P sysname P mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 172 16 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 172 20 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 ...

Page 433: ...ag can be reliably and stably sent over the network Networking Requirements On the network shown in Figure 5 15 users of VLAN 10 access an ISP network through a default gateway GE 2 0 0 1 is a sub interface for dot1q VLAN tag termination on Router A and GE 2 0 0 1 is a sub interface for dot1q VLAN tag termination on Router B The networking requirements are as follows l A BFD session is configured ...

Page 434: ...re connectivity between Router A Router B and Router C 3 Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on the switch 4 Configure sub interfaces for dot1q VLAN tag termination on Router A and Router B 5 Configure a BFD session on Router A and Router B to detect the link between Router A and Router B 6 Configure VRRP backup group 1 on GE 2 0 0 1 of Router A and GE 2 0 0 1 of Router B Router A functions ...

Page 435: ...Ethernet1 0 0 quit RouterA interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 undo shutdown RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 ip address 10 1 1 1 24 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 quit RouterA ospf 1 RouterA ospf 1 area 0 RouterA ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 RouterA ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 RouterA ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 quit RouterA ospf 1 quit C...

Page 436: ... 24 Direct 0 0 D 10 1 1 1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 10 1 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 127 0 0 0 8 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 127 0 0 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 Route Flags R relay D download to fib Routing Tables Public Destinations 17 Routes 17 Destination Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface 192 168 2 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 192 168 2 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 192 16...

Page 437: ...gure a BFD session Configure Router A RouterA bfd RouterA bfd quit RouterA bfd atob bind peer ip default ip interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 1 RouterA bfd session atob discriminator local 1 RouterA bfd session atob discriminator remote 2 RouterA bfd session atob dot1q vid 10 RouterA bfd session atob commit RouterA bfd session atob quit Configure Router B RouterB bfd RouterB bfd quit RouterB bfd ato...

Page 438: ...priority 160 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 arp broadcast enable RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 quit Configure Router B RouterB interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 1 RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 dot1q vrrp vid 10 RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 vrrp vrid 1 virtual 10 1 1 100 RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 2 R...

Page 439: ...t ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB bfd interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 192 168 1 1 24 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown mode user termination interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 undo shutdown control vid 1 dot1q termination dot1q termination vid 10 dot1q vrrp vid 10 ...

Page 440: ...igabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown port trunk allow pass vlan 10 return 5 17 13 Example for Configuring Sub interfaces for QinQ VLAN Tag Termination to Support BFD On a typical network sub interfaces for QinQ VLAN tag termination are configured to support BFD In this manner user packets with double tags can be reliably and stably sent over the network Networking Requirements On the network shown in...

Page 441: ...tworking diagram of configuring sub interfaces for QinQ VLAN tag termination to support BFD MPLS IP backbone RouterC GE1 0 0 192 168 2 1 24 GE1 0 0 192 168 2 2 24 GE1 0 0 192 168 1 1 24 GE2 0 0 192 168 1 2 24 GE2 0 0 1 10 1 1 1 24 GE2 0 0 1 10 1 1 2 24 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 2 RouterB RouterA VLAN10 Host 100 1 1 3 24 GE1 0 0 Switch1 Switch2 GE1 0 0 GE2 0 0 BFD session Configuration Roadmap The configuratio...

Page 442: ...et2 0 0 mode user termination RouterA GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit Configure Router B RouterB interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 mode user termination RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit Step 2 Configure an IGP to ensure connectivity between devices Assign IP addresses to interfaces as shown in Figure 5 16 Configure an IGP on Router A...

Page 443: ... 192 168 1 2 24 RouterC GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit RouterC ospf 1 RouterC ospf 1 area 0 RouterC ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 RouterC ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 RouterC ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 quit RouterC ospf 1 quit After the configuration OSPF on Router A and Router B calculates the route between Router A and Router B Router A and Router B can ping each oth...

Page 444: ... 0 undo shutdown Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 port trunk allow pass vlan 10 Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Step 4 Configure QinQ to allow Switch 2 to send packets with double tags to Router A and Router B HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname Switch1 Switch1 vlan 100 Switch1 vlan100 quit Switch1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 Switch1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 port vlan stacking vlan 10 stack vlan 100 S...

Page 445: ... Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer IP Address 224 0 0 184 NextHop Ip Address 224 0 0 184 Bind Interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 FSM Board Id 6 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 10 Min Rx Interval ms 10 Actual Tx Interval ms 10 Actual Rx Interval ms 10 Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms 30 Echo Passiv...

Page 446: ...100 PriorityRun 160 PriorityConfig 160 MasterPriority 160 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 TimerRun 1 TimerConfig 1 Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type normal vrrp Config track link bfd down number 0 Track BFD 1 Priority reduced 10 BFD session state UP End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA bfd interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 192 ...

Page 447: ...rp vrid 1 track bfd session 2 arp broadcast enable bfd atob bind peer ip default ip interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 1 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 qinq pe vid 100 ce vid 10 commit ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of Router C sysname RouterC bfd interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 192 168 2 ...

Page 448: ... 5 17 14 Example for Configuring Single hop BFD6 for a Layer 3 Physical Link This example describes how to configure single hop BFD6 for a Layer 3 physical link to monitor and rapidly detect faults in the IPv6 link between two directly connected devices Networking Requirements On the network shown in Figure 5 17 BFD in asynchronous mode is set to detect faults in the direct link between Router A a...

Page 449: ...net1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 enable RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 address 2001 db8 1 64 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Assign an IPv6 address to the interface on Router B HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterB RouterB ipv6 RouterB interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 enable RouterB Gigabit...

Page 450: ...criminator 2 Session Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer Ip Address 2001 db8 2 NextHop Ip Address 2001 db8 2 Bind Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 1000 Min Rx Interval ms 1000 Actual Tx Interval ms Actual Rx Interval ms Local Detect Multi 3 Detect Interval ms Ec...

Page 451: ...n links along the path Networking Requirements On the network shown in Figure 5 18 BFD in asynchronous mode is used to detect faults in a multi hop link between Router A and Router C Figure 5 18 Networking diagram of multi hop BFD6 RouterA RouterB RouterC 2001 db8 1 1 64 GE1 0 0 2001 db8 1 2 64 GE1 0 0 2001 db8 2 1 64 GE2 0 0 2001 db8 2 2 64 GE2 0 0 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap ...

Page 452: ... HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname RouterB RouterB ipv6 RouterB interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 enable RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ipv6 address 2001 db8 1 2 64 RouterBA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit RouterB interface GigabitEthernet 2 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown RouterB GigabitEthernet2 0 0 ipv6 enable Rou...

Page 453: ...ession all verbose Session MIndex 256 Multi Hop State Up Name atoc Local Discriminator 10 Remote Discriminator 20 Session Detect Mode Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type Peer Ip Address Bind Session Type Static Bind Peer Ip Address 2001 db8 2 2 Bind Interface FSM Board Id 1 TOS EXP 7 Min Tx Interval ms 1000 Min Rx Interval ms 1000 Actual Tx Interval ms Actual Rx Interval ms Local...

Page 454: ...pfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 db8 2 1 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 return l Configuration file of Router C sysname RouterC ipv6 bfd ospfv3 1 router id 1 1 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001 db8 2 2 ospfv3 1 area 0 0 0 0 bfd ctoa bind peer ipv6 2001 db8 1 1 discriminator local 20 discriminator remo...

Page 455: ...ether to improve HA of devices 6 3 Maintaining HA This section describes how to maintain HA The detailed operation includes monitoring the operations status of HA 6 4 Configuration Examples The following section provides an example for configuring GR Familiarize yourself with the configuration procedures against the networking diagram The configuration example consists of the networking requiremen...

Page 456: ...dex to evaluate equipment maintenance The formula of MTTR is as follows MTTR Fault detection time Board replacement time System initialization time Link recovery time Route coverage time Forwarding recovery time The less the time is the greater the MTTR is and the higher the device reliability is In the telecommunication industry 99 999 availability means that service interruption caused by device...

Page 457: ...roviding hot backup The components and terms related to HSB are described as follows l Active Main Board AMB indicates the current active main board of the two main boards on a router l Standby Main Board SMB indicates the backup main board of the two main boards on a router l HA channel indicates the communication channel between the AMB and SMB l Switchover indicates the AMB is switched to the S...

Page 458: ...ce board After the switchover the SMB switches itself to the AMB and runs smoothly All data on the AMB is backed up therefore the sessions with other routers are not affected and other routers are not aware of the switchover That is the HSB switchover is self contained The requirements for the hardware and software to implement the HSB are as follows l Supporting two main boards that serve as the ...

Page 459: ...of notifying the neighbor to maintain the adjacency during AMB SMB switchover GR Helper indicates the neighbor of the GR Restarter The GR Helper should be able to identify the GR signaling maintain the adjacency with the GR Restarter during the AMB SMB switchover and help the GR Restarter to restore the network topology NOTE The GR Restarter and the GR Helper interact with each other When the GR H...

Page 460: ...o Router A A session with the GR capability is established between the GR Restarter and each GR Helper 2 The GR Restarter performs the AMB SMB switchover Figure 6 3 AMB SMB switchover of the GR Restarter RouterD GR Helper RouterA GR Restarter RouterB GR Helper GR Helper RouterC Session with GR capability The administrator restarts the GR restarter or the GR restarter itself fails HUAWEI NetEngine8...

Page 461: ...GR Restarter is restarted to sends signals to the GR Helpers and re establish sessions 4 The GR Restarter obtains topology information from neighbors Figure 6 5 GR Restarter obtaining topology information from neighbors GR restarter gets topology information or routes from neighbors RouterD GR Helper RouterA GR Restarter RouterB GR Helper GR Helper RouterC After the GR Restarter obtains the topolo...

Page 462: ...idly l Interoperability Some of the GR specifications are still drafts and the implementation varies with vendors l Concurrent collapse If a GR router and its neighbor s collapse concurrently GR cannot work normally l Long convergence time When a GR router in the Down state cannot recover again its neighbors assume that the GR Restarter will restart so the neighbors do not delete the related routi...

Page 463: ...ession on the TCP connection If you do not expect the neighbors to be aware of the switchover you must back up the continuously changing TCP link status from the AMB to the SMB 6 1 2 GR Features Supported in the NE80E 40E The GR features include system level GR System level GR is a technology that combines redundancy backup GR and HSB to implement the uninterrupted forwarding during the AMB SMB sw...

Page 464: ...em level GR function familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the required data Applicable Environment The system level GR function is used in the following situations l A system fault triggers the AMB SMB switchover l When upgrading the software or maintaining the system the administrator manually triggers the AMB SMB switchover To ensure that s...

Page 465: ... steps on the GR Restarter Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run slave default slot id The default slot number for the SMB is configured End 6 2 3 Enabling the Automatic Synchronization of the AMB SMB Configuration You can enable the SMB to automatically synchronize configurations with the AMB when the AMB is writing the configurations Context Perform the followi...

Page 466: ...ure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run slave switchover enable The force AMB SMB switchover is enabled After the configuration you can run the slave switchover command to perform the force AMB SMB switchover manually By default the force AMB SMB switchover is enabled To disable the force AMB SMB switchover run the slave switchover disable command End 6 2 5 Optional Rest...

Page 467: ...B HUAWEI display switchover state Slot 8 HA FSM State master realtime or routine backup Slot 7 HA FSM State slave receiving realtime or routine data 6 3 Maintaining HA This section describes how to maintain HA The detailed operation includes monitoring the operations status of HA 6 3 1 Monitoring the Running of HA By monitoring the operating status of HA you can view information about HA during th...

Page 468: ...g the AMB SMB switchover after a fault occurs on the device Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E Figure 6 6 shows a networking diagram of configuring the system level GR l In AS65009 OSPF is used as the IGP protocol an EBGP connection is set up between Router A and Router B Router C is a non BGP device in the AS l Router B has du...

Page 469: ...ss for each interface For configuration details see Configuration Files in this section Step 2 Configure basic OSPF and BGP functions For configuration details see Configuration Files in this section Step 3 Configure OSPF GR functions Enable the link local signaling and out of band synchronization capability of OSPF on Router B The configuration of Router C is the same as the configuration of Rout...

Page 470: ...view that the forwarding entry related to Router B still exists The forwarding is not interrupted and the service transmission is not affected RouterC display fib FIB Table Total number of Routes 9 Destination Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface TunnelID 127 0 0 1 32 127 0 0 1 HU t 42 InLoop0 0x0 127 0 0 0 8 127 0 0 1 U t 42 InLoop0 0x0 10 1 2 2 32 127 0 0 1 HU t 561 InLoop0 0x0 10 1 2 0 24 10 1...

Page 471: ... as number 65009 ipv4 family unicast undo synchronization network 10 1 4 0 255 255 255 0 peer 10 1 1 2 enable return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 1 255 255 255 0 interface LoopBack1 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 bgp 65009...

Page 472: ... interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 2 255 255 255 0 interface LoopBack1 ip address 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 ospf 100 opaque capability enable graceful restart period 600 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 network 10 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 return HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 6 GR Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary an...

Page 473: ...ted technologies 7 2 Configuring NSR After NSR is configured route processing and traffic forwarding are not interrupted during the active standby switchover of main control boards HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 7 NSR Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 456 ...

Page 474: ...hbors For details about the GR configuration see the chapter GR Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability l NSR ensures that route processing is not interrupted on the control plane and the forwarding plane during the active standby switchover of main control boards by using the backup mechanism of a related protocol During the active standby switchover of...

Page 475: ...ility l Interworking problem Different vendors may use different methods to implement NSF due to immature standards l Depending on neighbor status A device needs the help of its neighbor to complete GR If all devices become faulty at the same time due to a software defect NSF cannot work properly l Low convergence speed If an NSF enabled device becomes faulty and is no longer started the remote de...

Page 476: ...ed and more system resources are consumed NSR and GR On the device that performs the active standby switchover of main control boards the system supports two HA protection mechanisms NSR and GR NSR and GR are mutually exclusive That is during the active standby switchover of main control boards the system can use either NSR or GR for a specific protocol When being deployed with NSR a device can ke...

Page 477: ...ng limitations l The switchover time is not strictly controlled because the switchover time is not the key performance index after the active standby switchover of main control boards l Because the neighbor relationship is kept during the active standby switchover of main control boards on the local device the remote device may consider that existing neighbor relationships need to be re establishe...

Page 478: ...quisites NSR has been configured Procedure l Run the display switchover mode command to view the HA working mode of the current system l Run the display ip routing table verbose command to view the routing information after the active standby switchover of main control boards l Run the display fib verbose command to view the forwarding information after the active standby switchover of main contro...

Page 479: ...ctive main control board l Interface information Link State Database LSDB information and routing information on the standby main control board are consistent with those on the active main control board HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 7 NSR Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 462 ...

Page 480: ...M defines OAM functions for Ethernet bearer networks CFM applies to large scale E2E Ethernet networks and monitor network wide connectivity and locate connectivity faults 8 3 EFM Configuration Ethernet in the First Mile EFM can be enabled on the devices at both ends of a point to point link to monitor the connectivity and quality of the link 8 4 Y 1731 Configuration Y 1731 is an OAM protocol at th...

Page 481: ...et Internet Groper ping and traceroute tools on IP networks Ethernet OAM can work with the Automatic Protection Switching APS to trigger protection switching when detecting connectivity faults This ensures service interruption in no more than 50 ms to achieve carrier class reliability l Performance management Performance management is used to measure the packet loss ratio delay and jitter during t...

Page 482: ... CFM Y 1731 Access Link OAM Connectivity Layer OAM Service Layer OAM l 802 3ah also known as Ethernet in the First Mile EFM is used to monitor the first mile link connectivity It is a type of link level OAM technology EFM provides link connectivity detection link fault monitoring remote fault notification and remote loopback for two directly connected devices l 802 1ag also known as Connectivity F...

Page 483: ...ese two versions Table 8 1 Differences between IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 and IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 Feature IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 Remarks Maintenance Domain Supported Supported The features and configurations supported by 802 1ag Draft 7 and Standard 802 1ag 2007 are the same Default MD Not supported Supported Maintenance Association Supported Supported The features and co...

Page 484: ...tandard 802 1ag 2007 are classified into the same types The difference between the MIP generation rules in 802 1ag Draft 7 and Standard 802 1ag 2007 however is as follows l According to 802 1ag Draft 7 the MIP is created on the basis of the interface l According to Standard 802 1ag 20 07 the MIP is created on the basis of the MD MA service or default MD HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration...

Page 485: ...A separately MEP A Maintenance association End Point MEP is an edge point within an MA For the devices on the network enabled with Ethernet CFM their MEPs are called local MEPs For the other devices in the same MA their MEPs are called the Remote Maintenance association End Points RMEPs MIP A Maintenance association Intermediate Point MIP is an intermediate point within an MA According to IEEE 802...

Page 486: ...intermediate device and the destination device All the intermediate devices can respond with a Linktrace Reply LTR PBB TE MAC trace PBB TE MAC trace locates the connectivity fault on the PBB TE tunnel PBB TE MAC trace is initiated by one end of the PBB TE tunnel and destined for the other end Fault Association l Association between Ethernet CFM and an interface When a MEP detects a connectivity fa...

Page 487: ...FM sends fault messages to MPLS OAM MPLS OAM sends fault messages to Ethernet CFM 8 2 2 Configuring Basic Ethernet CFM By configuring basic Ethernet CFM functions you can implement end to end detection advertisement verification and location of connectivity faults Before You Start Before configuring basic Ethernet CFM functions familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configur...

Page 488: ...the interfaces on which devices are located at the edge of the MA that is to determine that MEPs must be configured on the interfaces on which devices When implementing automatic connectivity detection on directly connected links you also need to ensure that l The devices at both ends must be configured in the same MA within an MD l An MA can be either associated with a VLAN or not l MEPs must be ...

Page 489: ...ystem view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm version draft7 standard The IEEE 802 1ag version is switched NOTE All the devices on the network must be enabled with either IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 or IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 and IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 cannot be enabled at the same time on a network End Enabling Ethernet CFM Globally You must enable Ethernet CFM globally before confi...

Page 490: ... the device running IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 By default an MD is at level 0 Level 0 is the lowest level Repeat Step 2 to create more MDs Up to 64 MDs can be created on the NE80E 40E NOTE The 802 1ag packets from a lower level MD are discarded when being transmitted through the same level MD or a higher level MD The 802 1ag packets from a higher level MD can be transmitted through a lower level M...

Page 491: ...vity of each MA separately Context Perform the following steps on the NE80E 40E that requires Ethernet CFM Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed Step 3 Run ma ma name format icc based iccbased ma format name string ma format name An MA is created and the MA view is displayed On the NE80E 40E up to 4k MAs can be created in a...

Page 492: ...dded to the VLAN The inward facing MEP then broadcasts the OAMPDUs in the VLAN associated with the MA That is the inwarding facing MEP sends the OAMPDUs out through all the interfaces excluding the interface on which the MEP resides in the VLAN associated with the MAC l When the outward facing MEP is created the MA is not required to be associated with a VLAN However if the MA is associated with a...

Page 493: ...ed MEP is only used to detect connectivity faults in the multicast VLAN The interface based MEP is used for other scenarios End Follow up Procedure l If you need to create multiple MEPs in an MA repeat Step 4 l If you need to create multiple MEPs in multiple MAs repeat Step 3 and Step 4 l If you need to create multiple MEPs in multiple MDs repeat Step 2 to Step 4 Creating an RMEP For other devices...

Page 494: ...e used to locate faults Context Currently IEEE 802 1ag has two versions that is IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 and IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 The types of the MIP generation rule are the same in these two versions Differences of the MIP generation rules between these two versions however are as follows l According to IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 MIPs are automatically generated on the basis of the interface l Accor...

Page 495: ...belongs without a MEP of a higher level and a MIP of a lower level l explicit MIPs can be generated on the interface to which the MD or default MD belongs with a MEP of a lower level but without a MEP of a higher level or a MIP of a lower level l none MIPs cannot be generated on the interface to which the MD or default MD belongs If the rule for creating the MIP is default or explicit the device g...

Page 496: ... use automatic rules to create MIPs Table 8 3 MIP automatic generation rules Manual MIPs Exist on an Interface Creation Rule Are MEPs Configured on Low Level MDs Are MIPs Created Yes No No Default No Yes Explicit Yes Yes None Defer If the defer MIP generation rule is configured in the MA view MIPs are created in an MA using rules configured in the MD to which MIPs belong A device can use a specifi...

Page 497: ...c id raw tagged Port service MIPs are manually created 2 Configure a device to automatically create MIPs MIP generation rules in compliance with either IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 or IEEE Std 802 1ag 2007 can be configured on a device l Configure a MIP generation rule in accordance with IEEE 802 1ag Draft 7 in the system view Run cfm enable system view CFM is enabled globally Run mip create type default ...

Page 498: ...n accordance with IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 is configured in a specific MA End Enabling CC Detection With continuity check CC detection Ethernet CFM can periodically send CCMs between MEPs to monitor connectivity between MEPs Context Do not configure a MEP or an RMEP before configuring this function Perform the following steps on the edge devices on which MEPs reside within MAs Procedure Step 1 R...

Page 499: ... tlv type command Step 7 Optional Run ccm tlv interface status Encapsulates the Interface Status TLV field in CCMs to be sent By default the CCMs to be sent do not carry the Interface Status TLV field l The sending of CCMs is enabled by using the mep ccm send enable command l The receiving of CCMs is enabled by using the remote mep ccm receive enable command If any of the preceding conditions is m...

Page 500: ...lt MDs all interfaces of the specified VLAN can generate MIPs based on default MDs Context Perform the following steps on each device Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm default md level level The default MD is created and the default MD view is displayed Step 3 Run vlan vlan id1 to vlan id2 1 10 The specified VLAN is created End Optional Configuring an MP ...

Page 501: ...MEPs and MIPs you can check whether the configurations are successful Prerequisites The configurations of the Ethernet CFM function are complete Procedure l Run the display cfm md md name command to check the configuration information about an MD l Run the display cfm ma md md name ma ma name command to check detailed information about an MA l Run the display cfm mep md md name ma ma name mep id m...

Page 502: ... the MD is created successfully HUAWEI display cfm md The total number of MDs is 2 MD Name Level md2 7 md3 3 Run the display cfm md command on the device running IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 If information about the name of the MD MD name format MD level MIP generation rule and sender ID TLV type is displayed it means that the MD is created successfully HUAWEI display cfm md mdcustomer The total num...

Page 503: ... Format string Level 7 MD Name Format string MEP ID 40 VLAN ID 10 VSI Name Interface Name GigabitEthernet1 0 1 CCM Send enabled Direction outward MD Name md3 MD Name Format string Level 3 MA Name ma1 MA Name Format string MEP ID 100 VLAN ID 20 VSI Name Interface Name GigabitEthernet2 0 1 CCM Send enabled Direction outward Run the display cfm remote mep command If information about the RMEP is disp...

Page 504: ...reate Type On Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 none Run the display cfm mip command If information about the MIP is displayed it means that the configuration is successful HUAWEI display cfm mip Interface Name Level MAC GigabitEthernet2 0 8 0 0018 82e2 377f Run the display cfm default md command If information about the level of the default MD MIP generation rule sender ID TLV type and VLAN chain as...

Page 505: ...s 1 The number of MEPs is 1 The number of MIPs is 0 HUAWEI display cfm mp info interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 level 6 inward vlan 300 MD Name md1 MD Name Format string Level 6 MA Name ma1 MEP ID 10 VLAN ID 300 VSI Name Interface Name gigabitethernet 1 0 1 CCM Send enable Direction inward MAC Address 0018 8247 b977 MEP Pe vid MEP Ce vid MEP Vid Alarm Status none Run the display oam global configur...

Page 506: ... connectivity fault alarm is incorrect To solve the problem you can set the RMEP activation time If the local device is configured with the RMEP activation time and enabled with the function of receiving CCMs from a certain RMEP the local device can receive CCMs at the set RMEP activation time That is the activation time for receiving CCMs from the RMEP is the time reserved for configuring the RME...

Page 507: ...Configuring the RMEP Activation Time The RMEP activation time is reserved for you to configure an RMEP After the configuration of the RMEP activation time the local device can receive CCMs after the configured RMEP activation time expires Context Perform the following steps on each edge device in an MA Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name The MD v...

Page 508: ... Step 4 Run alarm finish time time The anti jitter time during alarm restoration is configured End Optional Configuring the Anti Jitter Time During Alarm Generation By configuring the anti jitter time during alarm restoration you can suppress the alarm flapping Context Perform the following steps on each device Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name...

Page 509: ...m view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed Step 3 Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed Step 4 Run mep mep id mep id alarm rdi disable The RDI alarm reporting function is disabled End 8 2 4 Fault Verification on the Ethernet By sending detection packets and waiting for replies you can test connectivity of the path between devices Before You Start Befor...

Page 510: ...he device on which the destination MEP resides or ID of the destination MEP 2 Optional Bridge MAC address of the device on which the destination MIP resides 3 Optional Number size timeout period and outbound interface of LBMs 4 Optional VLAN to which the destination node belongs 5 Optional Name of the PBB TE tunnel Optional Implementing 802 1ag MAC Ping By performing the 802 1ag MAC ping you can d...

Page 511: ...the outbound interface is specified it cannot be configured with an inward facing MEP The interface must be added to the VLAN associated with the MA l If the destination node is a MEP either mac mac address or remote mep mep id mep id can be selected If remote mep mep id mep id is selected the RMEP must already be created with the remote mep command and the MAC address of the interface where the R...

Page 512: ... command is run to detect connectivity of the link between the local and peer devices End 8 2 5 Locating the Fault on the Ethernet By sending test packets and waiting for a reply you can test connectivity of the path between devices and locate faults Before You Start Before configuring the Ethernet fault verification function familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configurat...

Page 513: ...tional Time to Live TTL of LTMs 6 Optional VLAN to which the destination node belongs 7 Optional Name of the PBB TE tunnel Optional Implementing 802 1ag MAC Trace By performing the 802 1ag MAC trace you can detect connectivity between MEPs or between MEPs and MIPs within an MA and locate faults Context Similar to tracerout or tracert 802 1ag MAC trace tests the path between the local device and a ...

Page 514: ...ttl The connectivity fault between the router and the remote router is located When implementing 802 1ag MAC trace ensure that l The MA is associated with a VLAN or a VSI l The MEP is configured in the MA l If the outbound interface is specified it cannot be configured with an inward facing MEP The interface must be added to the VLAN associated with the MA l If the destination node is a MEP either...

Page 515: ...trace Perform the following steps on the router at one end of the link to be tested 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run cfm portid tlv type The portid tlv type for trace packets is set 3 Run trace mac mac address vlan vlan id interface interface type interface number t timeout The connectivity fault between the router and the remote router is located A MEP is not required to initi...

Page 516: ...nt After Ethernet CFM is associated with an interface when a MEP detects a connectivity fault between the MEP and a specified RMEP within the same MA the OAM management module shuts down and then turns on the interface on which the MEP resides so that the other modules can sense the fault Figure 8 3 Diagram of associating Ethernet CFM with an interface 1 The interface associated with Ethernet CFM ...

Page 517: ...ernet CFM detects the link connectivity by exchanging CCMs between MEPs of the same link You can then associate Ethernet CFM with the interfaces When a connectivity fault occurs on Link 1 the OAM management modules on Router A and Router B shut down and then turn on their GE 1 0 1 interfaces respectively In this manner the LACP module senses the connectivity fault on Link 1 and switches the servic...

Page 518: ...ing Ethernet CFM with an interface complete the following tasks l Configure the link aggregation group l Configure Ethernet CFM Data Preparation To associate Ethernet CFM with an interface you need the following data No Data 1 Type and number of an interface 2 Name of an MD MA and ID of an RMEP Associating Ethernet CFM with an Interface Through the configured association between Ethernet CFM and a...

Page 519: ...nfigurations By viewing the Trigger If down field you can check whether the configurations are successful Prerequisites The configurations of Associating Ethernet CFM with an Interface function are complete Procedure Step 1 Run the display cfm remote mep md md name ma ma name mep id mep id command to check detailed information about an RMEP End Example Run the display cfm remote mep command If the...

Page 520: ...and PE As shown in Figure 8 7 EFM OAM or Ethernet CFM runs between CE1 and PE1 and between CE2 and PE2 Ethernet CFM runs between PE1 and PE2 Configure the association between Ethernet OAMs When a fault occurs on the link between CE1 and PE1 Ethernet CFM sends alarms of the fault to CE2 Figure 8 7 Diagram of associating Ethernet OAM with Ethernet OAM CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2 Pre configuration Tasks Before a...

Page 521: ...ce type interface number Ethernet CFM is configured to send fault messages to EFM OAM l Run oam bind ingress cfm md md name1 ma ma name1 egress cfm md md name2 ma ma name2 Ethernet CFM at one side is configured to send fault messages to Ethernet CFM at the other side l Run oam bind cfm md md name1 ma ma name1 cfm md md name2 ma ma name2 The bidirectional transmission of fault messages between Ethe...

Page 522: ... data Applicable Environment As shown in Figure 8 8 CEs access PEs in dual homing mode PEs communicate through the MPLS network To implement the end to end link detection you can configure MPLS OAM or BFD on the MPLS Label Switch Path LSP or Virtual Leased Line VLL between PEs Ethernet OAM runs between CEs and PEs When detecting faults MPLS OAM or BFD at the core side notifies Ethernet OAM of the ...

Page 523: ...D sessions Configuring Ethernet OAM Functions You can configure Ethernet OAM between a CE and a PE to detect connectivity faults in between Context Configure Ethernet OAM to run between CEs and PEs For details see Configuring EFM OAM and Configuring Ethernet CFM Associating Ethernet OAM with MPLS OAM or BFD Ethernet OAM and MPLS OAM or BFD can send fault information to each other Context Perform t...

Page 524: ...rectional transmission of fault messages between EFM OAM and BFD is configured l Run oam bind ingress cfm md md name ma ma name egress mpls oam interface tunnel tunnel number Ethernet CFM is configured to send fault messages to MPLS OAM l Run oam bind ingress mpls oam lsp name lsp name lsr id lsr id tunnel id tunnel id egress cfm md md name ma ma name MPLS OAM is configured to send fault messages ...

Page 525: ...red to monitor link connectivity and implement MAC ping and trace to locate and diagnose faults PE1 and PE2 are connected by a VLL network CFM is configured between CE1 and PE1 CE1 and PE2 and PE1 and PE2 PE1 accesses the VLL network through one of the following interfaces l Common interface l QinQ sub interfaces l QinQ stacking sub interface l 1 to 1 QinQ mapping is configured on sub interface l ...

Page 526: ...nd MAs 4 ID of a MEP name of the interface on which the MEP resides and type of the MEP 5 Optional ID of an RMEP and MAC address of the interface where the RMEP resides 6 Interval for MEPs sending CCMs in an MA Configuring Ethernet CFM on PEs on a VLL Ethernet CFM provides end to end connectivity detection fault notification fault verification and fault location Providing the preceding functions E...

Page 527: ...ation tagged Encapsulation VLAN Encapsulation VLANIF interface l default mode No action is performed l trunk mode The outer tags are stripped No action is performed l default mode Adds a tag default VLAN ID of the interface l trunk mode No action is required Ethernet main interface Tags are stripped No action is performed Dot1q sub interface Strips one tag Reserves the tag and no action is require...

Page 528: ...ces the tag with the tag that is encapsulated on the outbound interface QinQ termination sub interface in symmetrical mode Adds the outer tag Replaces the outer tag with the tag that is encapsulated on the outbound interface QinQ termination sub interface in asymmetrical mode Adds double tags Removes the outer tag and then adds two tags that are encapsulated Step 5 Configure a MEP based on the int...

Page 529: ...ommand to create a MEP VLAN member interface accessing to a VLL network Run the mep mep id mep id interface type interface number vlan vlan id inward command to create a MEP PW Run themep mep id mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id mac mac address ouward inward command to create a MEP Step 6 Run remote mep mep id mep id mac mac address An RMEP is created in the MA Step 7 Run mep ccm send mep id mep ...

Page 530: ...Table 8 8 Table 8 7 Packet processing on the inbound interface Type of the Inbound Interface raw Encapsulation Ethernet Encapsulation tagged Encapsulation VLAN Encapsulation VLANIF interface l default mode No action is performed l trunk mode The outer tags are stripped No action is performed l default mode Adds a tag default VLAN ID of the interface l trunk mode No action is required Ethernet main...

Page 531: ... is replaced in trunk mode Ethernet main interface A specific tag is added The tag is replaced Dot1q sub interface Adds one tag Replaces the tag with the tag that is encapsulated on the outbound interface Dot1q termination sub interface Adds one tag Replaces the tag with the tag that is encapsulated on the outbound interface QinQ termination sub interface in symmetric mode Adds the outer tag Repla...

Page 532: ... vlan id outward command to create a MEP 6 Run remote mep mep id mep id mac mac address An RMEP is created in the MA 7 Run mep ccm send mep id mep id enable A MEP is enabled to send CCMs 8 Run remote mep ccm receive mep idmep id enable The MEP is enabled to receive CCMs from the RMEP in the same MA l Perform the following steps on the CE 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run cfm md ...

Page 533: ...the MIP needs to be configured on transit nodes For the rule for creating the MIP see Configuring MIPs Checking the Configuration After Ethernet CFM is associated with VLL by using sub interfaces for QinQ VLAN tag termination you can view information about the MEPs and REMPs in the specified MD and MA and the CFM status of different MAs Prerequisites The configurations of associating Ethernet CFM ...

Page 534: ...sfully HUAWEI display cfm md mdcustomer MD Name mdcustomer MD Name Format Level 2 MIP Create type none SenderID TLV type defer MA list MA Name mdcustomer1 Interval 1000 Vlan ID L2VC ID 11 Run the display cfm ma command If information about the MA is displayed it means that the configuration succeeds HUAWEI display cfm ma md mdcustomer The total number of MAs is 1 MD Name mdcustomer MD Name Format ...

Page 535: ... VPLS network you can configure CFM to monitor and manage the connectivity faults of the link Before You Start Before configuring CFM and VPLS combination familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the required data Applicable Environment On the VPLS network shown in Figure 8 10 CFM can be configured to monitor link connectivity and implement MAC p...

Page 536: ...fer to the chapter VPLS Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN l Configure a sub interface to access the VPLS network For the procedure of connecting a sub interface or VLAN to the VPLS network see the chapter VPLS Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN For the procedure of connecting a QinQ sub interface or QinQ stacking su...

Page 537: ...ayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name level level An MD is created and the MD view is displayed Step 3 Run ma ma name An MA is created and the MA view is displayed Step 4 Run map vsi vsi name The MA is associated with a VSI Step 5 Configure a MEP based on the interface type Table 8 10 MEP configurations on different interfaces Interface Type Configuration Note Common interface Run the mep mep id mep id i...

Page 538: ...bnumber vlan vlan id inward command to create a MEP VLAN member interface accessing to a VPLS network Run the mep mep id mep id interface type interface number vlan vlan id inward command to create a MEP PW Run themep mep id mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id mac mac address ouward inward command to create a MEP Step 6 Run remote mep mep id mep id mac mac address An RMEP in the MA is created Step ...

Page 539: ...tion sub interface Run the mep mep id mep id interface interface type interface number subnumber pe vid pe vid ce vid ce vid outward command to create a MEP Dot1q termination sub interface Run the mep mep id mep id interface type interface number vlan vlan id outward command to create a MEP VLAN member interface accessing to a VPLS network Run the mep mep id mep id interface type interface number ...

Page 540: ... MA is enabled to receive CCMs sent by the RMEP in the same MA End Configuring Ethernet CFM on the Switch and Remote PE Run Ethernet CFM between the switch and remote PE to check connectivity by exchanging CCMs In addition MAC ping and MAC trace can be performed Context The detailed configuration is similar to that in Configuring Ethernet CFM on the CE and Local PE and is not mentioned here NOTE l...

Page 541: ...e number command to view the rule for creating the MIP l Run the display cfm mip interface interface type interface number level level command to view information about the MIP NOTE You can run the display mip create type and display cfm mip commands to view detailed information about a MIP only after the MIP is created End Example In the IEEE Standard 802 1g 2007 run the display cfm md command If...

Page 542: ...ddress 0018 82a0 23a7 MD Name four MD Name Format Level 2 MA Name four MEP ID 7 VSI Name vsi1 Interface Name GigabitEthernet1 0 2 1 CCM Send enabled Direction outward MAC Address 0018 82a0 23a7 Run the display cfm remote mep command If information about the RMEP is displayed it means that the configuration succeeds HUAWEI display cfm remote mep The total number of RMEPs is 2 The status of RMEPs 1 ...

Page 543: ...hese services are frequently transmitted For example ETH OAM 802 1ag packets are transmitted at an interval of 3 3 ms Therefore a large number of sessions are created causing great bandwidth consumption in the fast packet transmission channel on the LPU If the bandwidth consumption reaches the trap threshold service packets may be randomly dropped the sessions may frequently alternate between Up a...

Page 544: ...bps Session rx total bandwidth is 0 bps 8 2 13 Associating CFM with VRRP When the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP is used for device level reliability in dual homing network connectivity fault management CFM can be associated with it to resolve the dual master problem that may temporarily occur if a link failure Context As networks are increasingly popular and new applications emerge diver...

Page 545: ...with VRRP When the CFM mechanism between UPE2 and UPE1 detects a fault it notifies the VRRP backup group of the fault The master NPE1 then changes its VRRP state to Initialize and NPE2 changes its VRRP state from Backup to Master after a time as long as three times the interval at which VRRP packets are sent This ensures that only one master device is in the VRRP backup group Pre configuration Tas...

Page 546: ... ma ma name remote mep mep id mep id command in the user view to clear statistics of error CCMs End Monitoring the Running Status of Ethernet OAM By monitoring the operating status of Ethernet OAM you can view information about Ethernet OAM Context In routine maintenance you can select to run the following commands in any view To check the running status of Ethernet OAM Procedure l Run the display...

Page 547: ... example consists of the networking requirements configuration precautions and configuration roadmap Context NOTE This document takes interface numbers and link types of the NE40E X8 as an example In working situations the actual interface numbers and link types may be different from those used in this document Example for Configuring Ethernet CFM In this example by configuring basic Ethernet CFM ...

Page 548: ...cept Router G Associate MA 1 with VLAN 2 4 Create MA 2 within MD 1 on all the routers except Router E and Router I Associate MA 2 with VLAN 3 5 Create MD 2 at level 4 on Router A Router B Router C and Router D Create MA 3 within MD 2 Associate MA 3 with VLAN 4 6 Create MEPs and RMEPs on Router I Router H and Router E in MA 1 within MD 1 7 Create MEPs and RMEPs on Router H and Router G in MA 2 with...

Page 549: ...outer E Router F Router H and Router I within MD 1 The configuration is similar to that on Router A Step 4 Create and configure MA 2 within MD 1 on all the device except Router E and Router I Create and configure MA 2 on Router A within MD 1 RouterA md md1 ma ma2 RouterA md md1 ma ma2 map vlan 3 RouterA md md1 ma ma2 quit RouterA md md1 quit Create and configure MA 2 on Router B Router C Router D ...

Page 550: ...ep id 3 Configure an RMEP on RouterI in MA 1 within MD 1 RouterI md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 2 RouterI md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 3 Step 7 Configure MEPs and RMEPs on Router H and Router G in MA 2 within MD 1 Configure a MEP on Router H in MA 2 within MD 1 RouterH cfm md md1 RouterH md md1 ma ma2 RouterH md md1 ma ma2 mep mep id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 inward Configure a MEP on ...

Page 551: ... sending and receiving of CCMs Enable the sending of CCMs on the MEP on Router A RouterA md md2 ma ma3 mep ccm send enable Enable the receiving of CCMs from the RMEP on Router A RouterA md md2 ma ma3 remote mep ccm receive enable Enable the sending of CCMs on MEPs and the receiving of CCMs from RMEPs on Router B Router C Router D Router E Router F Router G Router H and Router I The configuration i...

Page 552: ... 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 to 4 cfm md md1 level 6 ma ma1 map vlan 2 ma ma2 map vlan 3 cfm md md2 level 4 ma ma3 map vlan 4 return l Configuration file of Router C sysname RouterC vlan batch 2 to 4 cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 to 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan...

Page 553: ...m md md2 level 4 ma ma3 map vlan 4 mep mep id 3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 inward mep ccm send mep id 3 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable return l Configuration file of Router E sysname RouterE vlan batch 2 cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 interface Gigab...

Page 554: ...an 2 ma ma2 map vlan 3 return l Configuration file of Router G sysname RouterG vlan batch 3 cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 3 cfm md md1 level 6 ma ma2 map vlan 3 mep mep id 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 inward mep ccm send mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm re...

Page 555: ...erI vlan batch 2 cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 cfm md md1 level 6 ma ma1 map vlan 2 mep mep id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 e...

Page 556: ...onitor the connectivity of the link between the CE and PE3 3 Configure CFM to monitor the connectivity of the link between the CE and PE4 4 Configure CFM to monitor the connectivity of the link between PE3 and PE4 Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l MD name and MA name Procedure Step 1 Configure a VPLS connection Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and ...

Page 557: ...e 2000 01 28 23 56 24 Total Up Time 3 days 22 hours 56 minutes 10 seconds PW Information Peer Ip Address 2 2 2 2 PW State up Local VC Label 4096 Remote VC Label 4096 PW Type label Tunnel ID 0x82004004 Broadcast Tunnel ID 0x82004004 Broad BackupTunnel ID 0x0 Ckey 0x6 Nkey 0x5 Main PW Token 0x82004004 Slave PW Token 0x0 Tnl Type LSP OutInterface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Backup OutInterface Stp Enable 0 ...

Page 558: ...alse Last Up Time 2000 01 01 01 01 21 Total Up Time 3 days 22 hours 29 minutes 36 seconds Interface Name GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 State up Access Port false Last Up Time 2000 01 01 01 42 11 Total Up Time 3 days 21 hours 48 minutes 46 seconds PW Information Peer Ip Address 1 1 1 1 PW State up Local VC Label 4096 Remote VC Label 4096 PW Type label Tunnel ID 0x81004001 Broadcast Tunnel ID 0x81004001 Br...

Page 559: ...1 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 1 vlan type dot1q 2 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 1 quit PE3 cfm md md PE3 md md ma ma PE3 md md ma ma mep mep id 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 1 vlan 2 outward PE3 md md ma ma mep ccm send mep id 2 enable PE3 md md ma ma remote mep mep id 1 PE3 md md ma ma remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable PE3 md md ma ma remote mep mep id 3 PE3 md md ma ma remote mep ccm receive mep...

Page 560: ... If Down disabled CFM Status up Alarm Status none Interface TLV disabled Connect Status up Run the display cfm remote mep command on PE3 The command output shows that the remote MEP is Up PE3 display cfm remote mep The total number of RMEPs is 2 The status of RMEPS 2 up 0 down 0 disable MD Name md Level 0 MA Name ma RMEP ID 1 VLAN ID VSI Name L2VC ID MAC CCM Receive enabled Trigger If Down disable...

Page 561: ...ma ma map vlan 2 mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable return l Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls l2vpn HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethe...

Page 562: ...2 2 223 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 return l Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 1 vlan type dot1q 2 cfm md md ma ma mep mep id 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 1 vlan 2 outward mep ccm send mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OA...

Page 563: ... Configuring the Default MD for Ethernet CFM In this example you can configure the default MD on a device on which a lower level MD resides so that the higher level MD can detect the topology change of the lower level MD Networking Requirements As shown in Figure 8 14 Router B and Router C are managed by ISP1 and Router A Router D Router E and Router F are managed by ISP2 To enable the CFM functio...

Page 564: ...he default MD with VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and set the MIP generation rule to default 5 Create and configure MA1 within MD1 on all the devices except for Router B and Router C MA1 is associated with VLAN 2 Create and configure MA2 within MD1 on all the devices except for Router B and Router C MA2 is associated with VLAN 3 6 Create and configure MEPs and RMEPs on MA1 in MD1 of Router A and Router F Creat...

Page 565: ...tandard 802 1ag 2007 cannot be enabled at the same time on a network Step 2 Create a VLAN and add related interfaces to the VLAN For configuration details see Configuration Files in this section Step 3 Create MD1 Create MD1 on Router A RouterA system view RouterA cfm enable RouterA cfm md md1 level 6 RouterA quit Create MD1 on Router D Router E and Router F The configurations on Router D Router E ...

Page 566: ...1 ma ma1 RouterA md md1 ma ma1 map vlan 2 RouterA md md1 ma ma1 quit Create MA1 within MD1 on Router D and Router F The configurations on Router D and Router F are the same as the configurations on Router A and are not mentioned here Step 8 Create and configure MA2 within MD1 on all the devices except for Router B and Router C Create MA2 within MD1 on Router A RouterA md md1 ma ma2 RouterA md md1 ...

Page 567: ...uter A with the function of receiving CCMs from the RMEP RouterA md md1 ma ma2 remote mep ccm receive enable Enable the function of sending CCMs on all MEPs of Router E and Router F and enable the function of receiving CCMs from all RMEPs on Router E and Router F The configurations on Router E and Router F are the same as the configurations on Router A and are not mentioned here Step 12 Verify the...

Page 568: ...ceed in tracing the destination address aa99 6600 5600 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA vlan batch 2 to 3 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 undo shutdown portswi...

Page 569: ...ation file of Router C sysname RouterC vlan batch 2 to 3 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 to 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 2 to 3 cfm md md2 level 4 cfm default md level 6 mip create type default vlan 2 to 3 return l Configuration file of Router D sysname Route...

Page 570: ...ortswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 3 cfm md md1 level 6 ma ma2 map vlan 3 mep mep id 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 inward mep ccm send mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable return l Configuration file of Router F sysname RouterF vlan batch 2 cfm version standard cfm enabl...

Page 571: ... Router B acts as the UPE device It is required that the following be achieved l The bandwidth for the user network to access the ISP network is 2000 Mbit s and an inactive link that serves as a backup is provided l When the active link between the user network and the ISP network fails the LACP module on the interface can sense the fault within 50 ms and stop forwarding data on the active link Fi...

Page 572: ...p in static LACP mode For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide LAN Access and MAN Access Step 2 Configure Ethernet CFM Enable Ethernet CFM globally on Router A RouterA cfm enable Create the MD MA MEP and RMEP on Router A RouterA cfm md md1 RouterA md md1 ma ma1 RouterA md md1 ma ma1 ccm interval 10 RouterA md md1 ma ma1 mep mep id 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 ...

Page 573: ...3 ccm interval 10 RouterB md md1 ma ma3 mep mep id 5 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 3 outward RouterB md md1 ma ma3 remote mep mep id 6 RouterB md md1 ma ma3 mep ccm send enable RouterB md md1 ma ma3 remote mep ccm receive enable RouterB md md1 ma ma3 quit RouterB md md1 quit RouterB quit Verify the configuration Run the display cfm mep command and the display cfm remote mep command If information ...

Page 574: ...atus None Interface TLV disabled Connect Status up MD Name md1 Level 0 MA Name ma3 RMEP ID 6 VLAN ID VSI Name L2VC ID MAC CCM Receive enabled Trigger If Down disabled CFM Status up Alarm Status None Interface TLV disabled Connect Status up Step 3 Associate Ethernet CFM with the member interfaces of the aggregation group in static LACP mode Associate Ethernet CFM with the member interfaces of Eth T...

Page 575: ...ify the configuration Run the display cfm remote mep command If the item of Trigger If down is displayed as enable it means that the configuration succeeds For example the detailed information on Router B is displayed as follows RouterB display cfm remote mep md md1 The total number of RMEPs is 3 The status of RMEPs 3 up 0 down MD Name md1 Level 0 MA Name ma1 RMEP ID 2 VLAN ID VSI Name L2VC ID MAC...

Page 576: ... id 2 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable ma ma2 ccm interval 10 mep mep id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 outward mep ccm send mep id 4 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable ma ma3 ccm interval 10 mep mep id 6 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 outward mep ccm send mep id 6 enable remote mep mep id 5 remote mep ccm receive mep id 5 enable re...

Page 577: ... send mep id 5 enable remote mep mep id 6 remote mep ccm receive mep id 6 enable return Example for Associating EFM OAM with Ethernet CFM In this example by configuring EFM OAM and Ethernet CFM you can implement the fault notification Networking Requirements As shown in Figure 8 16 configure EFM OAM to run between Router A and Router B and between Router C and Router D configure Ethernet CFM to ru...

Page 578: ...A RouterA efm enable RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 efm mode passive RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 efm enable RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Configure RouterB RouterB efm enable RouterB interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 efm enable RouterB GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Step 3 Configure Ethernet CFM to run between Router B and Router C C...

Page 579: ...terD GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Step 5 Associate EFM OAM with Ethernet CFM Associate EFM OAM running between Router A and Router B with Ethernet CFM running between Router B and Router C RouterB oam mgr RouterB oam mgr oam bind cfm md md1 ma ma1 efm interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 Associate Ethernet CFM running between RouterB and RouterC with EFM OAM running between Router C and Router D RouterC o...

Page 580: ... ccm send enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive enable oam mgr oam bind cfm md md1 ma ma1 efm interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 return l Configuration file of Router C sysname RouterC vlan batch 10 efm enable cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 10 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 10 cfm md md1 ma m...

Page 581: ...vlan 10 return Example for Configuring VPLS Ethernet CFM In this example by configuring VPLS Ethernet CFM you can detect connectivity faults between PEs Networking Requirements As shown in Figure 8 17 Martini VPLS runs on the backbone network and LDP is used as signaling to create Pseudo Wires PWs Configure VPLS Ethernet CFM on PEs to fast detect VPLS connectivity between PEs HUAWEI NetEngine80E 4...

Page 582: ...hen can communicate 2 Configure the routing protocols on the backbone network to enable communication between routers and basic functions of MPLS 3 Set up LSP tunnels between PEs 4 Enable MPLS L2VPN on PEs 5 Create Virtual Switch Instances VSIs on PEs and bind VSIs to Attachment Circuit AC interfaces 6 Configure VPLS Ethernet CFM on PEs Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the f...

Page 583: ... GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit PE2 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 ip address 10 3 1 1 30 PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 undo shutdown PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 quit Configure PE3 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE3 PE3 interface loopback 1 PE3 LoopBack1 ip address 3 3 3 3 32 PE3 LoopBack1 quit PE3 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 PE3 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 ip address 10 2 1 2 30 PE3 ...

Page 584: ...7 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 2 2 2 2 32 OSPF 10 2 D 10 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 3 3 3 3 32 OSPF 10 2 D 10 2 1 2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 10 1 1 0 30 Direct 0 0 D 10 1 1 1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 1 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 Gigabitethernet2 0 0 10 1 1 2 32 Direct 0 0 D 10 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 3 1 0 30 OSPF 10 2 D 10 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 OSPF 10 2 D 10 2 1 2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 10 2 1 0 30 ...

Page 585: ...eceding configuration LDP sessions are set up between PEs Run the display mpls ldp session command You can view that the Status field displays Operational Take the display on PE1 as an example PE1 display mpls ldp session LDP Session s in Public Network Peer ID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KA Sent Rcv 2 2 2 2 0 Operational DU Passive 000 00 02 10 10 3 3 3 3 0 Operational DU Passive 000 00 02 9 9 TOTA...

Page 586: ... 1 undo shutdown PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Configure PE2 PE2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 PE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 10 PE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 l2 binding vsi ldp1 PE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 undo shutdown PE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Configure PE3 PE3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 10 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 l2 bindi...

Page 587: ...dp Member Discovery Style static PW MAC Learn Style unqualify Encapsulation Type vlan MTU 1500 VSI State up Resource Status Valid VSI ID 2 Peer Router ID 3 3 3 3 VC Label 23552 Peer Type dynamic Session up Tunnel ID 0x6002003 Peer Router ID 2 2 2 2 VC Label 23553 Peer Type dynamic Session up Tunnel ID 0x6002000 Interface Name GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 State up PW Information Peer Ip Address 2 2 2 2 P...

Page 588: ...d 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 inward PE1 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 2 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 3 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 mep ccm send enable PE1 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep ccm receive enable PE1 md md1 ma ma1 quit Configure PE2 PE2 cfm enable PE2 cfm md md1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 ccm interval 100 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 map vsi ldp1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep mep id 2 interface g...

Page 589: ...ormat string MEP ID 3 VLAN ID VSI Name Interface Name GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 CCM Send enabled Direction inward PE1 display cfm remote mep md md1 The total number of RMEPs is 2 The status of RMEPs 2 up 0 down MD Name md1 Level 0 MA Name ma1 RMEP ID 2 VLAN ID VSI Name L2VC ID MAC CCM Receive enabled Trigger If Down disabled CFM Status up Alarm Status None Interface TLV disabled Connect Status up MD ...

Page 590: ...55 255 255 252 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 ccm interval 100 map vsi ldp1 mep mep id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 591: ... 255 255 255 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 ccm interval 100 map vsi ldp1 mep mep id 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 3 network 10 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 return l Configuration file of PE3 sysna...

Page 592: ... 0 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 3 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 10 2 1 0 0 0 0 3 network 10 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 return l Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 undo shutdown vlan typ...

Page 593: ...AC interface of each PE and is bound to a VSI to access the VPLS network Then CFM is enabled on the sub interface Networking Requirements As shown in Figure 8 18 user VLAN 10 access the network where PEs reside through switches Switches send frames with double tags to PEs Martini VPLS runs on the backbone network and LDP is used as signaling to create PWs To help to improve reliability of the netw...

Page 594: ...GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure the interface mode on each PE to the user termination mode 2 Run an IGP to ensure connectivity of routers on the backbone network 3 Enable a routing protocol on the backbone network to ensure connectivity of routers and enable MPLS 4 Set up an LSP tunnel between PEs 5 Enable MPLS L2VPN on each PE 6 Configure ...

Page 595: ...own PE1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit Configure PE2 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE2 PE2 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 mode user termination PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit Configure PE3 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE3 PE3 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 PE3 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 mode user termination PE3 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 un...

Page 596: ...E2 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 quit PE2 ospf 1 quit Configure PE3 PE3 interface loopback 1 PE3 LoopBack1 ip address 3 3 3 3 32 PE3 LoopBack1 quit PE3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 2 30 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit PE3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 ip address 10 1 2 1 30 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 ...

Page 597: ...nce 5 ttl 255 time 60 ms 10 1 2 2 ping statistics 5 packet s transmitted 5 packet s received 0 00 packet loss round trip min avg max 30 92 250 ms Step 3 Enable MPLS and LDP on the backbone network Configure PE1 PE1 mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 PE1 mpls PE1 mpls quit PE1 mpls ldp PE1 mpls ldp quit PE1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 mpls PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 mpls ldp PE1 Gigabit...

Page 598: ...sive 0000 00 03 13 13 TOTAL 2 session s Found NOTE If two PEs are not directly connected you can run the mpls ldp remote peer command and the remote ip command to set upa a remote LDP session between the PEs Step 4 Enable MPLS L2VPN on each PE Configure PE1 PE1 mpls l2vpn Configure PE2 PE2 mpls l2vpn Configure PE3 PE3 mpls l2vpn Step 5 Create a VSI and specify LDP as signaling Configure PE1 PE1 vs...

Page 599: ...net2 0 0 1 qinq termination l2 symmetry PE3 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 qinq termination pe vid 100 ce vid 10 PE3 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 l2 binding vsi ldp1 PE3 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 undo shutdown PE3 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 quit NOTE When you run the qinq termination command on the same main interface the ce vid values must be different if the pe vid values of the two sub interfaces are the same Step ...

Page 600: ...an 100 Switch1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Switch1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 Switch1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown Switch1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port vlan stacking vlan 10 stack vlan 100 Switch1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit Configure Switch2 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname Switch2 Switch2 vlan 100 Switch2 vlan100 quit Switch2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 Switch1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 port...

Page 601: ... vlan type dot1q 10 CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 undo shutdown CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Configure CE3 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname CE3 CE3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 CE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 ip address 10 1 1 3 24 CE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 10 CE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 undo shutdown CE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Step 9 Verify the configuration After the preced...

Page 602: ...M Receive enabled Trigger If Down disabled CFM Status up Alarm Status None Interface TLV disabled Connect Status up End Configuration Files l Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 2 peer 2 2 2 2 peer 3 3 3 3 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown mode user termination interface Gi...

Page 603: ...ote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 3 network 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 3 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 2 peer 1 1 1 1 peer 3 3 3 3 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthern...

Page 604: ...ote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 2 0 0 0 0 3 network 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 3 return l Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 2 peer 1 1 1 1 peer 2 2 2 2 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown mode user termination interface Gigab...

Page 605: ... network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 2 0 0 0 0 3 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 3 return l Configuration file of Switch1 sysname Switch1 vlan batch 100 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown port trunk allow pass vlan 100 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown port vlan stacking vlan 10 stack vlan 100 return l Configuration file of Switch2 sysname Switch2 vlan batch 100 interface GigabitEther...

Page 606: ...mple for Configuring VLL based Ethernet CFM Through Sub interfaces for QinQ VLAN Tag Termination A PE receives a frame with two tags and then accesses a VLL network To improve reliability of the network a sub interface for QinQ VLAN tag termination is configured on the AC interface of each PE and is bound to an L2VC interface to access the VLL network Then CFM is enabled on the sub interface Netwo...

Page 607: ... roadmap is as follows 1 Configure the interface mode on PE1 and PE2 to the user termination mode 2 Run an IGP to ensure connectivity of routers on the backbone network 3 Enable MPLS on the backbone network and set up an LSP tunnel 4 Set up the remote MPLS LDP peer relationship between PEs on both ends of the PW 5 Configure a sub interface for QinQ VLAN tag termination on the AC interface of each ...

Page 608: ... address to each interface on each PE and the P router as shown in Figure 8 19 After OSPF is enabled the 32 bit loopback addresses of PE1 P and PE2 must be advertised Configure PE1 PE1 interface loopback 1 PE1 LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 9 32 PE1 LoopBack1 quit PE1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 1 24 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown PE1 GigabitEther...

Page 609: ...irect 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 2 2 2 9 32 OSPF 10 2 D 10 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 3 3 9 32 OSPF 10 3 D 10 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 1 1 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 10 1 1 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 1 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 1 1 2 32 Direct 0 0 D 10 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 1 2 0 24 OSPF 10 2 D 10 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 127 0 0 0 8 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoo...

Page 610: ...and the P router and between the P router and PE2 Run the display mpls ldp session command You can view that the Status field is Operational in the command output Take the display on PE1 as an example PE1 display mpls ldp session LDP Session s in Public Network Codes LAM Label Advertisement Mode SsnAge Unit DDDD HH MM A before a session means the session is being deleted PeerID Status LAM SsnRole ...

Page 611: ... GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 quit Configure PE2 PE2 mpls l2vpn PE2 l2vpn quit PE2 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 1 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 control vid 1 qinq termination PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 qinq termination l2 symmetry PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 qinq termination pe vid 100 ce vid 10 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 9 101 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 undo shutdown PE2 GigabitEthernet2...

Page 612: ...em view HUAWEI sysname Switch2 Switch2 vlan 100 Switch2 vlan100 quit Switch2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 port trunk allow pass vlan 100 Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Switch2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch Switch2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo ...

Page 613: ...number of MEPs is 1 MD Name md1 MD Name Format string Level 0 MA Name ma1 MA Name Format string MEP ID 2 VLAN ID VSI Name L2VC ID 101 tagged Interface Name GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 CCM Send enabled Direction inward MAC Address 00e0 fc6e bb11 MEP Pe vid 100 MEP Ce vid 10 MEP Vid PE1 display cfm remote mep md md1 The total number of RMEPs is 1 The status of RMEPs 1 up 0 down MD Name md1 Level 0 MA Nam...

Page 614: ...d md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 101 tagged ccm interval 30 mep mep id 1 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 1 pe vid 100 ce vid 10 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 9 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 3 3 3 9 mpls mpls l2v...

Page 615: ...le ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 9 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of the P router sysname P mpls lsr id 2 2 2 9 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface Gigabitethernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 2 2 2 9 255 255 255 2...

Page 616: ...terface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown port trunk allow pass vlan 100 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown port vlan stacking vlan 10 stack vlan 100 return Example for Associating EFM OAM with MPLS OAM In this example through the association between EFM OAM and MPLS OAM the EFM OAM sessions can send fault information to each other through Ethernet CFM Networking Requirements On the pro...

Page 617: ...network so that devices can communicate 2 Configure MPLS OAM between NPEs 3 Configure EFM OAM between NPEs and UPEs 4 Configure EFM OAM between UPE1 and NPE1 to send fault messages to MPLS OAM and MPLS OAM then sends fault messages to EFM OAM between NPE2 and UPE2 Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l IP addresses of the interface on the routers name of tunne...

Page 618: ...itethernet 3 0 0 NPE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 isis enable 1 NPE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 undo shutdown NPE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 quit NPE1 interface loopback 1 NPE1 LoopBack1 isis enable 1 NPE1 LoopBack1 quit Configure P P isis 1 P isis 1 network entity 00 0005 0000 0000 0004 00 P isis 1 is level level 2 P isis 1 quit P interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 P GigabitEthernet1 0 0 isis enable 1 P GigabitEthern...

Page 619: ...0 2 2 2 9 32 ISIS 15 10 D 100 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 3 3 9 32 ISIS 15 20 D 100 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 4 4 4 9 32 ISIS 15 20 D 100 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 5 5 5 9 32 ISIS 15 30 D 100 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 100 1 1 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 100 1 1 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 100 1 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 100 2 1 0 24 ISIS 15 20 D 100 1 1 2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 100 3 1 0 24 ISIS 15 20 D 10...

Page 620: ...0 NPE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 mpls NPE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 mpls te NPE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 mpls rsvp te NPE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit NPE2 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 NPE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 mpls NPE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 mpls te NPE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 mpls rsvp te NPE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 quit Step 4 Configure IS IS TE on NPEs and P Configure NPE1 NPE1 isis 1 NPE1 isis 1 cost style w...

Page 621: ...PE1 display interface tunnel Tunnel2 0 0 current state UP Line protocol current state UP Description Tunnel2 0 0 Interface The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 bytes Internet Address is unnumbered using address of LoopBack1 2 2 2 2 32 Encapsulation is TUNNEL loopback not set Tunnel destination 3 3 3 3 Tunnel protocol transport MPLS MPLS ILM is available primary tunnel id is 0x1002001 secondary tunnel...

Page 622: ...s and NPEs Configure UPE1 UPE1 efm enable UPE1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 UPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 efm enable UPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Configure NPE1 NPE1 efm enable NPE1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 efm enable NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit Configure UPE2 UPE2 efm enable UPE2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 UPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 efm enable UPE2 Gigabit...

Page 623: ...eceding configuration when EFM OAM running between UPE1 and NPE1 detects faults the faults can be sent to EFM OAM running between UPE2 and NPE2 through MPLS OAM End Configuration Files l Configuration file of UPE1 sysname UPE1 efm enable isis 1 is level level 2 network entity 00 0005 0000 0000 0001 00 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 100 1 1 1 255 255 255 252 isis enable 1 e...

Page 624: ...isis enable 1 interface Tunnel2 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 3 3 3 3 mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te path explicit path npe1 to npe2 mpls te commit mpls oam ingress Tunnel2 0 0 type ffd frequency 100 mpls oam ingress enable Tunnel2 0 0 oam mgr oam bind ingress efm interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 egress mpls oam Tunnel 2 0 0 return l Configuration ...

Page 625: ...hop 100 4 1 2 isis 1 is level level 2 cost style wide network entity 00 0005 0000 0000 0003 00 traffic eng level 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 100 5 1 1 255 255 255 252 isis enable 1 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 100 2 1 2 255 255 255 252 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te interface GigabitEthernet3 0 0 undo shutdown ip address ...

Page 626: ...000 0000 0005 00 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 100 5 1 2 255 255 255 252 isis enable 1 efm enable interface LoopBack1 ip address 5 5 5 5 255 255 255 255 isis enable 1 return Example for Configuring EFM OAM Extension for VRRP In this example by configuring EFM OAM on CEs and PEs and configuring a VRRP backup group on the PEs you can use the master device to transmit networ...

Page 627: ...ys that is PE1 and PE2 VLAN IF interfaces are configured to group PE1 and PE2 into a broadcast domain that is a VLAN Then the downstream interfaces configured as a Layer 2 interfaces of the two PEs are added into the VLAN Based on EFM OAM extension the SoftX can detect the faults on the links connecting the SoftX to PE1 and PE2 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Config...

Page 628: ...ss 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 PE1 vlanif10 quit Configure PE2 Create VLAN 10 and add GE 2 0 0 and GE 3 0 0 into VLAN 10 PE2 system view PE2 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 portswitch PE2 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 quit PE2 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 portswitch PE2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 quit PE2 vlan 10 PE2 vlan10 port gigabitethernet 2 0 0 PE2 vlan10 por...

Page 629: ... isis 1 quit Configure PE3 PE3 interface loopback 1 PE3 LoopBack1 ip address 4 4 4 4 32 PE3 LoopBack1 quit PE3 interface pos 1 0 0 PE3 Pos1 0 0 ip address 100 1 1 2 24 PE3 Pos1 0 0 isis enable PE3 Pos1 0 0 quit PE3 interface pos 2 0 0 PE3 Pos2 0 0 ip address 100 2 1 2 24 PE3 Pos2 0 0 isis enable PE3 Pos2 0 0 quit PE3 isis 1 PE3 isis 1 is level level 1 2 PE3 isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0003 ...

Page 630: ...tance vpna vpn target 111 1 both PE1 vpn instance vpna quit PE1 interface vlanif 10 PE1 vlanif10 ip binding vpn instance vpna PE1 vlanif10 ip address 10 1 1 2 24 PE1 vlanif10 quit Configure PE2 PE2 ip vpn instance vpna PE2 vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 100 2 PE2 vpn instance vpna vpn target 111 1 both PE2 vpn instance vpna quit PE2 interface vlanif 10 PE2 vlanif10 ip binding vpn instance v...

Page 631: ...d PE3 Configure PE1 PE1 bgp 100 PE1 bgp peer 3 3 3 3 as number 100 PE1 bgp peer 3 3 3 3 connect interface loopback 1 PE1 bgp peer 4 4 4 4 as number 100 PE1 bgp peer 4 4 4 4 connect interface loopback 1 PE1 bgp ipv4 family vpnv4 PE1 bgp peer 3 3 3 3 enable PE1 bgp peer 4 4 4 4 enable PE1 bgp quit Configure PE2 PE2 bgp 100 PE2 bgp peer 2 2 2 2 as number 100 PE2 bgp peer 2 2 2 2 connect interface loo...

Page 632: ...10km Loopback none full duplex mode negotiation disable Pause Flowcontrol Receive Enable and Send Enable Last physical up time 2008 12 27 19 40 57 Last physical down time 2008 12 27 19 40 56Statistics last cleared 2008 12 27 17 13 58 Last 300 seconds input rate 520 bits sec 1 packets sec Last 300 seconds output rate 592 bits sec 1 packets sec Input 2041312 bytes 15821 packets Output 591032 bytes 9...

Page 633: ... vrrp Track IF GigabitEthernet3 0 0 priority reduced 60 IF State DOWN End Configuration Files l Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 vlan 10 ip vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 100 1 vpn target 111 1 export extcommunity vpn target 111 1 import extcommunity mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls ldp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0001 00 interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vr...

Page 634: ...ort route static ip route static vpn instance vpna 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 10 1 1 1 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 vlan 10 ip vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 100 1 vpn target 111 1 export extcommunity vpn target 111 1 import extcommunity mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls ldp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0002 00 interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid ...

Page 635: ...able peer 4 4 4 4 enable ipv4 family vpn instance vpna import route direct import route static ip route static vpn instance vpna 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 10 1 1 1 return l Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 mpls lsr id 4 4 4 4 mpls mpls ldp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0003 00 interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp ip address 100 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos2 0 0 link prot...

Page 636: ...default vlan 10 interface LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 ip route static 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 111 return Example for Configuring EFM OAM Extension for Static Routes In this example by configuring EFM OAM on CEs and PEs and configuring the PEs with static routes to the CEs you can implement the link protection switchover Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configur...

Page 637: ...s that is PE1 and PE2 On PE1 and PE2 static routes destined for CE1 are configured and EFM OAM extension for static routes are configured to realize link protection and failover Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure IS IS between PEs to implement interworking between the PEs 2 Establish MPLS LSPs between PEs 3 Configure VPN instances on PEs and associate the int...

Page 638: ... interface pos 20 0 PE2 Pos2 0 0 ip address 100 3 1 1 24 PE2 Pos2 0 0 isis enable PE2 Pos2 0 0 quit PE2 isis 1 PE2 isis 1 is level level 1 2 PE2 isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0002 00 PE2 isis 1 quit Configure PE3 PE3 interface loopback 1 PE3 LoopBack1 ip address 4 4 4 4 32 PE3 LoopBack1 quit PE3 interface pos 1 0 0 PE3 Pos1 0 0 ip address 100 1 1 2 24 PE3 Pos1 0 0 isis enable PE3 Pos1 0 0 qui...

Page 639: ...1 2 POS1 0 0 100 3 1 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 100 3 1 1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 100 3 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 100 3 1 255 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 255 255 255 255 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 Step 2 Configure basic MPLS functions and MPLS LDP on the MPLS backbone network and set up LDP LSPs Configure PE1 PE1 mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 PE1 mpls PE1 mpls quit PE1 mpls ldp PE1 ldp quit PE1 interface p...

Page 640: ...n instance vpna vpn target 111 1 both PE1 vpn instance vpna quit PE1 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 PE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 ip binding vpn instance vpna PE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 2 24 PE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 quit Configure PE2 PE2 ip vpn instance vpna PE2 vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 100 2 PE2 vpn instance vpna vpn target 111 1 both PE2 vpn instance vpna quit PE2 inter...

Page 641: ...quence 5 ttl 255 time 2 ms 10 1 1 1 ping statistics 5 packet s transmitted 5 packet s received 0 00 packet loss round trip min avg max 2 2 5 ms Step 4 Enable EFM OAM extension between PE1 and CE1 and between PE2 and CE1 Configure PE1 PE1 efm enable PE1 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 PE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 efm enable PE1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 quit Configure PE2 PE2 efm enable PE2 interface gigabi...

Page 642: ...0 PE2 bgp peer 2 2 2 2 connect interface loopback 1 PE2 bgp peer 4 4 4 4 as number 100 PE2 bgp peer 4 4 4 4 connect interface loopback 1 PE2 bgp ipv4 family vpnv4 PE2 bgp peer 2 2 2 2 enable PE2 bgp peer 4 4 4 4 enable PE2 bgp quit Configure PE3 PE3 bgp 100 PE3 bgp peer 2 2 2 2 as number 100 PE3 bgp peer 2 2 2 2 connect interface loopback 1 PE3 bgp peer 3 3 3 3 as number 100 PE3 bgp peer 3 3 3 3 c...

Page 643: ...Destination Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface 1 1 1 1 32 BGP 255 0 RD 1 1 1 1 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 10 1 1 0 24 BGP 255 0 RD 1 1 1 1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 2 1 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 10 2 1 2 GigabitEthernet3 0 0 10 2 1 2 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 10 2 1 255 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 10 3 1 0 24 BGP 255 0 RD 4 4 4 4 POS1 0 0 10 3 1 2 32 BGP 255 0 RD 4 4 4 4 POS1 0 0 25...

Page 644: ... 4 4 POS1 0 0 10 3 1 2 32 BGP 255 0 RD 4 4 4 4 POS1 0 0 255 255 255 255 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 efm enable ip vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 100 1 vpn target 111 1 export extcommunity vpn target 111 1 import extcommunity mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls ldp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0001 00 interface Gigabit...

Page 645: ...ysname PE2 efm enable ip vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 100 2 vpn target 111 1 export extcommunity vpn target 111 1 import extcommunity mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls ldp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0002 00 interface GigabitEthernet3 0 0 ip binding vpn instance vpna ip address 10 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 efm enable interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp ip address 100 2 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpl...

Page 646: ...dp isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0003 00 interface Pos1 0 0 link protocol ppp ip address 100 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos2 0 0 link protocol ppp ip address 100 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 4 4 4 4 255 255 255 255 bgp 100 peer 2 2 2 2 as number 100 peer 2 2 2 2 connect interface LoopBack1 peer 3 3 3 3 as number 100 peer 3 3 3 3 connect int...

Page 647: ...vel reliability connectivity fault management CFM can be associated with it to prevent having more than one master device in a VRRP backup group should a link failure occur Applicable Networking Network administrators typically use various detection protocols on a network to improve service reliability As shown in Figure 8 23 VRRP can be used on network provider edges NPEs to support downstream us...

Page 648: ...is interrupted as UPE2 is still transmitting user uplink traffic through the link between UPE1 and UPE2 CFM can be used between UPE2 and each NPE to monitor the link connectivity between them When CFM between UPE2 and NPE1 detects a fault it sends a notification to the VRRP backup group The master NPE1 then changes its VRRP status to Initialize and the NPE2 changes its VRRP status from Backup to M...

Page 649: ...er BFD to implement a rapid master backup VRRP switchover when CFM detects a link failure User traffic can then be forwarded quickly by the backup NPE to minimize service interruption time PE1 cannot detect the master backup VRRP switchover so still sends network traffic to NPE1 which wastes bandwidth resources and interrupts services To prevent this VRRP can be associated with the direct network ...

Page 650: ... status of the peer BFD and local CFM leading to an increase in the cost values of routes through the association with the routing protocol on PE1 l The VRRP backup group on NPE2 changes the VRRP status of NPE2 to Master based on the status of the peer BFD and local CFM leading to a reduction in the cost values of routes through the association with the routing protocol on the upstream device l Th...

Page 651: ...PE1 cfm enable NPE1 cfm version standard NPE1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 NPE1 gigabitethernet1 0 0 1 undo shutdown NPE1 gigabitethernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 2 NPE1 gigabitethernet1 0 0 1 quit NPE1 cfm md mdforvrrp NPE1 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 NPE1 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 vlan 2 outward NPE1 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 remote mep mep id 2 NPE1 md mdforvrrp ma...

Page 652: ...forvrrp UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 mep mep id 2 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 outward UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 remote mep mep id 1 UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 remote mep ccm receive enable UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 mep ccm send enable UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma1 quit UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma2 UPE2 md mdforvrrp ma ma2 mep mep id 3 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 outward UPE2 md mdf...

Page 653: ... GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 ip address 192 168 1 2 24 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 192 168 1 11 NPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 ip address 192 168 1 3 24 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 192 168 1 11 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Step 4 Verify the V...

Page 654: ...uit NPE1 bfd NPE1toNPE2 bind peer ip 192 168 1 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 NPE1 bfd session NPE1toNPE2 discriminator local 1 NPE1 bfd session NPE1toNPE2 discriminator remote 2 NPE1 bfd session NPE1toNPE2 commit NPE1 bfd session NPE1toNPE2 quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 bfd NPE2 bfd quit NPE2 bfd NPE2toNPE1 bind peer ip 192 168 1 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 NPE2 bfd session NPE2toNPE1 discr...

Page 655: ...igure NPE2 NPE2 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 2 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 ip address 192 168 3 1 24 NPE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 quit NPE2 ospf 1 NPE2 ospf 1 default cost inherit metric NPE2 ospf 1 import route direct NPE2 ospf 1 area 0 NPE2 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 3 0 0 0 0 255 NPE2 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 quit NPE2 ospf 1 quit Step 8 Verify the routing configuration Run the display ip routi...

Page 656: ...RRP on NPEs Configure NPE1 NPE1 oam mgr NPE1 oam mgr oam bind ingress cfm md mdforvrrp ma ma1 egress vrrp vrid 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 NPE1 oam mgr quit Configure NPE2 NPE2 oam mgr NPE2 oam mgr oam bind ingress cfm md mdforvrrp ma ma2 egress vrrp vrid 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 NPE2 oam mgr quit Step 10 Associate VRRP with peer BFD on NPEs Configure NPE1 NPE1 interface Gigabit...

Page 657: ...on Run the shutdown command on GE 1 0 1 of UPE1 to simulate a link failure The VRRP status changes and the outbound interface of the route to the user side also changes on PE1 NPE1 display vrrp GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 Virtual Router 1 State Initialize Virtual IP 192 168 1 11 Master IP 0 0 0 0 PriorityRun 200 PriorityConfig 200 MasterPriority 0 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s...

Page 658: ...gabitEthernet0 0 0 100 1 2 0 24 O_ASE 150 0 D 192 168 3 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 127 0 0 0 8 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 127 0 0 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 127 255 255 255 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 192 168 1 0 24 O_ASE 150 0 D 192 168 3 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 192 168 1 11 32 O_ASE 150 0 D 192 168 3 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 192 168 2 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 192 168 2 2 Gigabit...

Page 659: ... 192 168 3 0 0 0 0 255 return l Configuration file of NPE1 sysname NPE1 cfm version standard cfm enable bfd interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 2 ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 192 168 1 11 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 1 peer direct route track vrrp vrid 1 degrade cost 200 interface HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Rout...

Page 660: ...ard mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable oam mgr oam bind ingress cfm md mdforvrrp ma ma1 egress vrrp vrid 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 return l Configuration file of UPE2 sysname UPE2 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch undo shutdown port trunk allow pass vlan 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 HUAWEI Net...

Page 661: ...able return l Configuration file of NPE2 sysname NPE2 FTP server enable cfm version standard cfm enable bfd interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 192 168 3 1 255 255 255 0 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 2 ip address 192 168 1 3 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 192 168 1 11 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 2 peer direct route track vrrp vrid 1 degrade cost HUAWE...

Page 662: ... 0 255 cfm md mdforvrrp ma ma2 mep mep id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan 2 outward mep ccm send mep id 4 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable return l Configuration file of UPE1 sysname UPE1 FTP server enable cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 portswitch undo shutdown HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 ...

Page 663: ... EFM Configuration Ethernet in the First Mile EFM can be enabled on the devices at both ends of a point to point link to monitor the connectivity and quality of the link 8 3 1 EFM Overview EFM is a feature for detecting network faults in the first mile direct Ethernet link Introduction EFM effectively improves Ethernet management and maintenance capabilities and ensures the stable operation of net...

Page 664: ...ected devices l 802 1ag also known as Connectivity Fault Management CFM defines OAM functions such as continuity check CC link trace LT and loopback LB for Ethernet networks CFM is network level OAM and applies to large scale networks l Y 1731 is an OAM protocol defined by the ITU T It covers the contents defined by IEEE 802 1ag and other OAM functions including the Alarm Indication Signal AIS Rem...

Page 665: ...whether to set up EFM connections by exchanging information OAMPDUs that carry EFM configuration information and supported EFM capabilities After an EFM connection is established the EFM entities at both sides exchange information OAMPDUs at a specified interval called a handshake message transmission interval to check whether the EFM connection is working properly If an EFM entity receives no inf...

Page 666: ...rk segment where faults occur l Remote fault indication When traffic is interrupted because a remote EFM entity fails or becomes unavailable the remote EFM entity will send an OAMPDU carrying one of the critical link events listed in Table 8 14 to the local EFM entity This helps administrators to understand link status in real time and troubleshoot link faults promptly Table 8 14 Critical link eve...

Page 667: ...terfaces and detection protocols to implement rapid fault detection EFM monitors link status and network performance and sends monitoring results to an associated interface or detection protocol When the associated interface or detection protocol senses a network status change it makes a rapid response to prevent communication interruption or service quality deterioration This improves network rel...

Page 668: ...2 and PE4 goes faulty CE1 cannot detect the fault As a result services are interrupted l If the link between CE1 and PE2 goes faulty PE4 cannot detect the fault As a result a large volume of unnecessary traffic continues to be forwarded to PE4 To address the preceding problems association between EFM and detection protocols can be configured so that faults can be reported to remote devices This as...

Page 669: ...deployed on PE2 The following results will be achieved l After detecting a link fault EFM will notify BFD of the fault l After detecting a link fault BFD will notify EFM of the fault Assoc iation betwe en EFM and MPLS OAM On the network shown in Figure 8 27 when EFM is deployed for the link between CE1 and PE2 and MPLS OAM is deployed for the link between PE2 and PE4 association between EFM and MP...

Page 670: ...nk connectivity ensuring reliability and stability of network connections Figure 8 28 Networking diagram for configuring basic EFM functions CE EFM OAM PE Pre configuration Tasks Before configuring basic EFM functions complete the following task l Connecting interfaces and setting their physical parameters to ensure that the interfaces are physically Up Data Preparation To configure basic EFM func...

Page 671: ...initiation Yes Yes Sends information OAMPDUs Yes Yes Sends event notification OAMPDUs Yes Yes Sends loopback control OAMPDUs Yes No Reacts to loopback control OAMPDUs Yes if both sides operate in active EFM mode Yes Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface interface type interface number The view of an interface at one end of a link is displayed Step 3 Run...

Page 672: ...l at which OAMPDUs are received l After setting up an EFM connection two EFM entities exchange OAMPDUs at a specific interval to check whether the connection is working properly If an EFM entity does not receive any OAMPDU from its remote EFM entity within the interval at which OAMPDUs are received it considers that the link is not working properly Network administrators can configure different in...

Page 673: ...TE The interval at which EFM OAMPDUs are sent must be configured after EFM OAM has been enabled globally and before EFM OAM is enabled on interfaces l Set the interval at which EFM OAMPDUs are received 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number The view of an interface at one end of a link is displayed 3 Run efm timeout period value The interval ...

Page 674: ... EFM you can check whether the EFM configuration succeeds Prerequisites All basic EFM function configurations are complete Procedure l Run the display efm all interface interface type interface number command to check the EFM configuration on interfaces l Run the display efm session all interface interface type interface number command to check the EFM status on interfaces End Example Run the disp...

Page 675: ...k administrators can detect link layer faults in various environments and dynamically monitor link quality Before You Start Before configuring link monitoring familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the required data Applicable Environment Fault detection on an Ethernet network is difficult especially when the physical connection on the network ...

Page 676: ...event detection Table 8 17 Minor link event detection Minor Link Event Detection Method Usage Scenario Errored symbol event An errored symbol event occurs if the number of symbol errors detected by a device during a specified period is greater than or equal to a configured threshold The device then notifies its remote device of the event This method is used to detect error symbols during data tran...

Page 677: ...iew of an interface at one end of a link is displayed 3 Run efm error code period period The period of detecting symbol errors is set on the interface By default the period of detecting symbol errors is 1 second on the interface 4 Run efm error code threshold threshold The threshold for the number of symbol errors that are detected in the specified period is set on the interface By default the thr...

Page 678: ... is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number The view of an interface at one end of a link is displayed 3 Run efm error frame second period period The period of detecting errored frame seconds is set on the interface By default the period of detecting errored frame seconds is 60 seconds on the interface 4 Run efm error frame second threshold threshold The threshold for the number ...

Page 679: ...ion enable ErrFramePeriod 1 ErrFrameThreshold 1 ErrFrameSecondNotification enable ErrFrameSecondPeriod 60 ErrFrameSecondThreshold 1 Hold Up Time 0 ThresholdEvtTriggerErrDown enable TriggerIfDown disable TriggerMacRenew disable RemoteMAC 00e0 fc7f 7258 Remote EFM Enable Flag enable Remote Mode passive Remote MaxSize 128 Remote Loopback Type ignore Remote Loopback IgnoreRequest Remote Parser loopbac...

Page 680: ...quest with the remote loopback function 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number The view of an interface in active EFM mode is displayed 3 Run efm loopback start timeout timeout transmit The interface is configured to initiate remote loopback The default timeout period of remote loopback is 20 minutes After the timeout period expires remote lo...

Page 681: ... the EFM modes of the interfaces at both ends of a link Step 2 Optional Configure a receiving device to ignore the remote loopback request 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run interface interface type interface number The interface view is displayed 3 Run efm loopback ignore request The interface is configured to ignore the remote loopback request By default the interface accepts a...

Page 682: ...ay efm session all interface interface type interface number command to check the EFM status on interfaces l Run the display test packet result command to check statistics about returned test packets After remote loopback is configured run the display efm session command on the device where the remote loopback interface resides The command output shows that the EFM status on the interface is Loopb...

Page 683: ...rformance Context After setting up an EFM connection two EFM entities exchange information OAMPDUs periodically When traffic is interrupted because an EFM entity fails or becomes unavailable the faulty EFM entity will send an information OAMPDU carrying a critical link event flag to its remote EFM entity record a log and send an alarm This mechanism helps administrators to understand the link stat...

Page 684: ...terface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 current state DOWN Line protocol current state DOWN ETHOAM Down Description HUAWEI Quidway Series GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Interface Route Port The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Internet protocol processing disabled IP Sending Frames Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 00e0 3c23 8100 Last physical up time 2011 04 21 12 08 46 UTC 08 00 Last physical down time 2011...

Page 685: ...mplement rapid fault detection EFM monitors link status and network performance and sends monitoring results to an associated interface or detection protocol When the associated interface or detection protocol senses a network status change it makes a rapid response to prevent communication interruption or service quality deterioration This improves network reliability For details on association b...

Page 686: ...CFM is deployed at the network side of a device association between EFM and CFM can be configured This allows EFM and CFM to notify each other of faults and ensures reliable service transmission Context For details on the principles and usage scenarios of association between EFM and CFM see Association Between EFM and Detection Protocols Association between EFM and CFM is bidirectional The details...

Page 687: ...ciation between EFM and CFM is configured the following situations occur l If EFM is disabled on an interface the association configuration will be deleted l If an MA or MD is deleted the association configuration will be deleted End Configuring Association Between EFM and BFD If EFM is deployed at the user side and BFD is deployed at the network side of a device association between EFM and CFM ca...

Page 688: ...run the oam bind ingress efm interface interface type interface number egress bfd session bfd session id and oam bind ingress bfd session bfd session id egress efm interface interface type interface number commands will be displayed in the configuration file End Configuring Association Between EFM and MPLS OAM If EFM is deployed at the user side and MPLS OAM is deployed at the network side of a de...

Page 689: ...m interface interface type interface number command to configure MPLS OAM to notify EFM of faults End 8 3 7 Maintaining EFM This section describes how to maintain EFM involving EFM debugging Debugging EFM In routine maintenance run debugging commands in any view to view the operating status of EFM Context NOTICE Debugging affects system performance After debugging is complete run the undo debuggin...

Page 690: ...s These services pose high requirements on network reliability and rapid fault detection In the networking shown in Figure 8 33 the network between CE1 and CE3 is newly deployed The requirements on the network are as follows l Link connectivity and quality on the network are tested before the network is started l Link quality is dynamically monitored after links are properly started l Traffic is s...

Page 691: ...GE 1 0 2 of CE1 Procedure Step 1 Configure basic EFM functions Enable EFM on CE1 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname CE1 CE1 efm enable Enable EFM on CE4 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname CE4 CE4 efm enable Configure the EFM mode to passive on GE 2 0 1 of CE4 CE4 interface gigabitethernet 2 0 1 CE4 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 efm mode passive Enable EFM on GE 2 0 1 of CE4 CE4 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 efm enabl...

Page 692: ... start interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 Step 4 Check returned test packets on CE1 CE1 display test packet result TestResult Value PacketsSend 0 PacketsReceive 0 PacketsLost 0 BytesSend 0 BytesReceive 0 BytesLost 0 StartTime 00 00 0000 00 00 00 UTC 00 00 EndTime 00 00 0000 00 00 00 UTC 00 00 Link quality can be evaluated based on data in the preceding command output Step 5 Disable remote loopback CE...

Page 693: ... 8 Verify the configuration If the preceding configurations are complete GE 1 0 2 of CE1 and GE 2 0 1 of CE4 will enter the handshake phase Run the display efm session all interface interface type interface num command on CE1 or CE4 The command output shows that the EFM state is detect on GE 1 0 2 or GE 2 0 1 CE1 display efm session interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 Interface EFM State Loopback Time...

Page 694: ...GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Interface Route Port The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Internet protocol processing disabled IP Sending Frames Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 00e0 304b 8200 Last physical up time 2011 05 05 13 58 45 UTC 08 00 Last physical down time 2011 05 05 14 04 02 UTC 08 00 Current system time 2011 05 05 14 04 14 08 00 Hardware address is 00e0 304b 8200 Last 300 seconds inpu...

Page 695: ...is section provides an example showing how to configure association between EFM and EFM Networking Requirements As networks develop quickly more and more IP networks are used to bear multiple services such as voice and video services These services pose high requirements on network reliability and rapid fault detection Link detection protocols are usually deployed on a network to detect link conne...

Page 696: ... follows 1 Configure EFM for the link between CE1 and CE4 to monitor link connectivity 2 Configure EFM for the link between CE4 and CE3 to monitor link connectivity 3 Configure association between EFM and EFM on CE4 to report link faults 4 Configure association between EFM and GE 1 0 3 on CE3 so that traffic can be switched to a backup link if the link between CE1 and CE4 fails Data Preparation To...

Page 697: ... session all Interface EFM State Loopback Timeout GigabitEthernet1 0 3 detect Step 2 Configure association between EFM and EFM Configure association between EFM and EFM on CE4 CE4 oam mgr CE4 oam bind efm interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 efm interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 2 CE4 quit Step 3 Configure association between EFM and interfaces Configure association between EFM and interfaces on CE3 CE3 in...

Page 698: ...0 bytes 0 packets Output 0 bytes 0 packets Input Unicast 0 packets Multicast 0 packets Broadcast 0 packets Output Unicast 0 packets Multicast 0 packets Broadcast 0 packets Input bandwidth utilization 0 00 Output bandwidth utilization 0 00 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 undo shutdown efm enable return l Configuration file of...

Page 699: ...easingly complex it is impossible to detect all link faults using a single detection technique Network environments and user requirements therefore need to be properly analyzed and various detection techniques are required to implement rapid link fault detection On the network shown in Figure 8 35 CE1 is dual homed to PE1 and PE3 The requirements on the network are as follows l The connectivity of...

Page 700: ...cts a link fault between CE1 and PE3 traffic can be switched to the backup link and return traffic is not forwarded to PE4 4 Configure association between CFM and EFM on PE3 and PE4 so that CFM and EFM can notify each other of faults Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l MD names MA names MEP IDs and REMP IDs l Names of interfaces associated with EFM Procedur...

Page 701: ...s will enter the handshake stage Run the display efm session all interface interface type interface num command on one of these devices The command output shows that the EFM status on GE 1 0 1 is Detect CE1 display efm session all Interface EFM State Loopback Timeout GigabitEthernet1 0 1 detect Step 2 Configure basic CFM functions MEPs of outward type are used as an example for configuring basic C...

Page 702: ...alue is Up PE3 display cfm remote mep The total number of RMEPs is 1 The status of RMEPs 1 up 0 down 0 disable MD Name md1 Level 0 MA Name ma1 RMEP ID 2 VLAN ID 2 VSI Name L2VC ID MAC CCM Receive enabled Trigger If Down disabled CFM Status up Alarm Status none Interface TLV disabled Connect Status up Step 3 Configure association between EFM and CFM Configure association between EFM and CFM on PE3 ...

Page 703: ... 08 00 Last physical down time 2011 05 12 15 15 46 UTC 08 00 Current system time 2011 05 13 10 51 49 08 00 Hardware address is 00e0 0845 8100 Last 300 seconds input rate 60 bytes sec 1 packets sec Last 300 seconds output rate 59 bytes sec 0 packets sec Input 56700 bytes 945 packets Output 56100 bytes 935 packets Input Unicast 0 packets Multicast 945 packets Broadcast 0 packets Output Unicast 0 pac...

Page 704: ...Ethernet1 0 1 egress cfm md md1 ma ma1 oam bind ingress cfm md md1 ma ma1 egress efm interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 return l Configuration file of PE4 sysname PE4 vlan batch 2 cfm enable efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 portswitch undo shutdown port trunk allow pass vlan 2 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliabilit...

Page 705: ...es such as voice and video services These services pose high requirements on network reliability and rapid fault detection Link detection protocols are usually deployed on a network to detect link connectivity and faults As network environments become increasingly complex it is impossible to detect all link faults using a single detection technique Network environments and user requirements theref...

Page 706: ... and PE3 and between CE2 and PE4 to monitor link connectivity 2 Configure BFD for the link between PE3 and PE4 to monitor link connectivity 3 Configure association between EFM and interfaces on CE2 so that if EFM detects a link fault between CE1 and PE3 traffic can be switched to the backup link and return traffic is not forwarded to PE4 4 Configure association between BFD and EFM on PE3 and PE4 s...

Page 707: ...ble EFM on GE 1 0 1 of PE4 PE4 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 PE4 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 efm enable PE4 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit Verify the configuration If EFM is correctly configured on PE3 CE1 PE4 and CE2 GE 1 0 1 of these devices will enter the handshake stage Run the display efm session all interface interface type interface num command on one of these devices The command output shows that th...

Page 708: ...gure association between EFM and BFD on PE3 PE3 oam mgr PE3 oam mgr oam bind efm interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 bfd session 1 PE3 oam mgr quit Configure association between EFM and BFD on PE4 PE4 oam mgr PE4 oam mgr oam bind efm interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 bfd session 2 PE4 oam mgr quit Step 4 Configure association between EFM and interfaces on CE2 CE2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 CE2 Gigab...

Page 709: ...ts Multicast 2157 packets Broadcast 0 packets Input bandwidth utilization 0 00 Output bandwidth utilization 0 00 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown efm enable return l Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 efm enable bfd interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo sh...

Page 710: ... 255 0 interface NULL0 bfd pe3tope4 bind peer ip 10 1 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 commit oam mgr oam bind ingress efm interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 egress bfd session 2 oam bind ingress bfd session 2 egress efm interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 return l Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo HUAWEI NetE...

Page 711: ...ts on the network are as follows l The connectivity of links between CE1 and PE1 between PE1 and PE3 and PE3 and CE2 l If the link between CE1 and PE1 goes faulty CE2 can detect the fault preventing return traffic from being forwarded to PE3 l When the link between PE1 and PE3 goes faulty CE1 or CE2 can detect the fault l If the link between CE1 and PE1 goes faulty a master backup link switchover ...

Page 712: ... masks for all interfaces including loopback interfaces as shown in Figure 8 37 For details see relevant configuration files Step 2 Configure IS IS to advertise routes Configure PE1 PE1 system view PE1 isis PE1 isis 1 isis PE1 isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0001 00 PE1 isis 1 quit PE1 interface LoopBack 1 PE1 LoopBack1 isis enable 1 PE1 LoopBack1 quit PE1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 PE1 Gig...

Page 713: ...extHop Interface 1 1 1 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 LoopBack0 2 2 2 2 32 ISIS L1 15 10 D 10 1 2 2 GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 3 3 3 3 32 ISIS L1 15 20 D 10 1 2 2 GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 10 1 2 0 24 Direct 0 0 D 10 1 2 1 GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 10 1 2 1 32 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 10 1 3 0 24 ISIS L1 15 20 D 10 1 2 2 GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 127 0 0 0 8 Direct 0 0 D 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 127 ...

Page 714: ...on run the display mpls te tunnel interface command on PE1 The tunnel interface is Up The command output is as follows PE1 display mpls te tunnel interface Tunnel2 0 0 Tunnel State Desc UP Active LSP Primary LSP Session ID 200 Ingress LSR ID 1 1 1 1 Egress LSR ID 3 3 3 3 Admin State UP Oper State UP Primary LSP State UP Main LSP State READY LSP ID 1 Run the display mpls static lsp command on PE1 T...

Page 715: ...DOWN 0 STATIC CRLSP S Name FEC I O Label I O If Status Tunnel1 0 2 1 1 1 1 32 NULL 70 GE1 0 1 Up Step 5 Configure the MPLS OAM function Enable MPLS OAM on ingress PE1 Use the default setting to send CV packets The parameters of the reverse tunnel depend on the egress location PE1 mpls PE1 mpls mpls oam PE1 mpls quit PE1 mpls oam ingress tunnel 2 0 0 PE1 mpls oam ingress enable all Enable MPLS OAM ...

Page 716: ...e Verbose information about NO 1 OAM at the egress lsp basic information oam basic information Lsp name oamlsp OAM Index 256 Lsp signal status Up OAM select board 1 Lsp establish type Static lsp Enable state Lsp incoming Label 30 Auto protocol Enable Lsp ingress lsr id 1 1 1 1 Auto overtime s 300 Lsp tnl id 200 Ttsi lsr id 1 1 1 1 Lsp id Ttsi tunnel id 200 Lsp Incoming int GigabitEthernet1 0 1 OAM...

Page 717: ...E3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 efm enable PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 quit Verify the configuration After correctly configuring EFM on PE1 CE1 PE2 and CE2 run the display efm session all interface interface type interface num command on each device The EFM status is detect In the following example the display on CE1 is used CE1 display efm session all Interface EFM State ...

Page 718: ... Port The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Internet protocol processing disabled IP Sending Frames Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 00e0 8a26 8300 Last physical up time 2011 08 27 16 46 35 UTC 08 00 Last physical down time 2011 08 27 13 49 06 UTC 08 00 Current system time 2011 08 27 17 16 57 08 00 Hardware address is 00e0 8a26 8300 Last 300 seconds input rate 59 bytes sec 0 packets sec La...

Page 719: ...down efm enable interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 shutdown interface GigabitEthernet2 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface NULL0 interface LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 isis enable 1 interface HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confiden...

Page 720: ...81D5C0000 snmp agent sys info version v3 mpls oam ingress Tunnel2 0 0 mpls oam ingress enable Tunnel2 0 0 oam mgr oam bind ingress efm interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 egress mpls oam interface Tunnel2 0 0 user interface con 0 user interface vty 0 4 user interface vty 16 20 return l Configuration file of PE4 sysname PE4 mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls te aaa authentication scheme default authorization...

Page 721: ...nterface NULL0 interface LoopBack1 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 isis enable 1 static lsp transit oamlsp incoming interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 in label 20 nexthop 10 1 3 2 out label 30 static cr lsp transit Tunnel1 0 2 incoming interface GigabitEthernet2 0 1 in label 70 nexthop 10 1 2 1 out label 80 bandwidth ct0 0 user interface con 0 user interface vty 0 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Con...

Page 722: ...lt isis 1 network entity 10 0000 0000 0003 00 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 3 2 255 255 255 0 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown efm HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright H...

Page 723: ...tunnel interface Tunnel1 0 2 destination 1 1 1 1 nexthop 10 1 3 1 out label 70 mpls oam egress lsp name oamlsp backward lsp Tunnel1 0 2 private oam mgr oam bind ingress mpls oam lsp name oamlsp egress efm interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 user interface con 0 user interface vty 0 4 user interface vty 16 20 return l Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo s...

Page 724: ...ts the fault and notifies the VRRP backup group of the fault After receiving the notification the VRRP backup group performs a master backup VRRP switchover The backup device becomes the Master and takes over traffic This active standby link switchover applies only to networks or devices that support BFD If a device supports 802 3ah but not BFD 802 3ah EFM can be used to monitor links On the netwo...

Page 725: ... that the backup device increases its VRRP priority and becomes a new Master if the BFD session enters the Down state Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l IP address of each interface on Router A and Router B For details see configuration files l VRID 10 virtual IP address 10 1 1 111 VRRP priorities 160 for Router A and 140 for Router B and value 40 by which...

Page 726: ...frames to 5s and the interval at which errored frame seconds are detected to 120s In the following example the display on Router A is used RouterA efm enable RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 1 efm enable RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 1 efm error frame period 5 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 1 efm error frame threshold 5 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 1 efm error frame second...

Page 727: ...Backup forward disabled Track BFD 2 Priority increased 40 BFD Session State UP Create time 2010 06 22 17 33 00 Last change time 2010 06 22 17 33 04 Step 6 Associate the VRRP backup group with the EFM session Configure Router A RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 1 vrrp vrid 10 track efm interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit Step 7 Verify th...

Page 728: ...tyRun 180 PriorityConfig 140 MasterPriority 180 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type normal vrrp Backup forward disabled Config track link bfd down number 0 Track BFD 2 Priority increased 40 BFD session state DOWN Create time 2011 06 14 17 19 50 Last change time 2011 06 14 19 27 13 End Configuration Files l Conf...

Page 729: ...gigabitethernet1 0 1 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 commit return l Configuration file of switch 1 sysname Switch1 vlan batch 10 efm enable interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 1 portswitch undo shutdown port default vlan 10 efm enable efm error frame period 5 efm error frame threshold 5 efm error frame notification enable efm error frame ...

Page 730: ...urement frame delay measurement frame jitter measurement and throughput measurement Background Originally Ethernet was mainly used in Local Area Networks LANs and had a poor OAM capability In addition Ethernet supports only the network element level management system that cannot meet network management requirements of most network operators After Ethernet is widely used in MANs the requirement on ...

Page 731: ...performance monitoring for end to end services When a user considers that the quality of purchased Ethernet tunnel services deteriorates or when an operator needs to conduct regular Service level agreement SLA monitoring Basic Concepts and Principles l Single ended frame loss measurement Frame loss measurement is performed by sending frames with ETH LM information to a remote Maintenance associati...

Page 732: ...remote MEPs Here the frame containing ETH LM request information is called a Continuity Check Message CCM 2 Each MEP processes the received CCMs and measures the number of frames lost on both the local and remote ends 3 Each MEP obtains corresponding measurement information based on contents in the CCMs and calculates frame loss ratios Figure 8 41 Networking diagram for dual ended frame loss measu...

Page 733: ...e ended SLM CE1 PE1 User Network User Network User Network PE2 PE3 CE3 CE2 SLM SLR Network l One way frame delay measurement One way frame delay measurement is performed between end to end MEPs by sending and receiving 1DM frames As shown in Figure 8 43 the process of one way frame delay measurement is as follows 1 A MEP periodically sends 1DM frames carrying TxTimeStampf 2 After receiving a 1DM f...

Page 734: ...elay measurement CE CE CE PE1 PE2 CE CE CE VLL VPLS VLAN Y 1731 DMM DMR l AIS AIS Alarm Indication Signal is a protocol used to transmit fault information As shown in Figure 8 45 the MEPs configured on the access interfaces of CE1 and CE2 reside in level 6 MD1 MD1 is a user domain and does not have a high requirement for fault detection time The MEPs configured on PE1 and PE2 reside in level 3 MD2...

Page 735: ...ity between the local and destination devices by sending test packets Unlike 802 1ag MAC ping multicast MAC ping can detect faults in links between multiple MEPs at a time Multicast MAC ping is applied to the networking where multiple MEPs are deployed Multicast MAC ping is initiated by the local MEP and responded to by the remote MEP Figure 8 46 Networking diagram for multicast MAC ping PE1 PE2 M...

Page 736: ...the MAC addresses of the remote MEPs MEP IDs and delay Y 1731 Features Supported by the NE80E 40E This section describes the functions and deployment scenarios of Y 1731 features that the NE80E 40E supports The Y 1731 features that the NE80E 40E supports include single ended frame loss measurement dual ended frame loss measurement one way frame delay measurement two way frame delay measurement sin...

Page 737: ...link between MEPs To measure the link delay time select either one or two way frame delay measurement l One way frame delay measurement can be used to measure the delay time on a unidirectional link between a MEP and its remote MEP RMEP The MEP must synchronize its time with its RMEP l Two way frame delay measurement can be used to measure the delay time on a bidirectional link between a MEP and i...

Page 738: ... networking As shown in Figure 8 47 the PEs are connected through a PW To take accurate statistics about frame loss on one end of a PW between PE1 and PE2 in VLL networking the following performance monitoring functions defined by Y 1731 can be used to monitor links l Single ended frame loss measurement l Dual ended frame loss measurement l One way frame delay measurement l Two way frame delay mea...

Page 739: ...elated configurations Configuring Y 1731 functions AIS and multicast MAC ping in VLL networking Completing CFM related configurations Data Preparation To configure Y 1731 functions in VLL networking you need the following data No Data 1 VC ID of the VLL bound to an MA 2 Interval at which frames are sent and number of sent frames during single ended frame loss measurement 3 Interval at which frames...

Page 740: ...stics about a specified PW will be available l To collect performance statistics about a PW do as follows on the PEs at both ends of a VLL Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed Step 3 Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed Step 4 Run map mpls l2vc vc id raw tagged The MA is bound to a specified L2VC NOTE MA cannot be assoc...

Page 741: ...ter tags and then adds another tag Table 8 21 Packet processing on an outbound interface Outbound Interface Type Raw Encapsulation Ethernet Encapsulation Tagged Encapsulation VLAN Encapsulation VLANIF interface l No action is performed by default l A specific tag is added in trunk mode l The tag is stripped by default l The tag is replaced in trunk mode Ethernet main interface A specific tag is ad...

Page 742: ...a PW configure on demand single end frame loss measurement in VLL networking l To implement continual single ended frame loss measurement for a PW configure proactive single ended frame loss measurement in VLL networking 802 1p priorities carried by packets on a network are used to differentiate services and therefore different policies can be deployed for services As shown in Figure 8 48 the 802 ...

Page 743: ...system view The system view is displayed b Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed c Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed d Run map mpls l2vc vc id raw tagged The MA is bound to a specified L2VC e Run mep mep id The MEP is configured f Optional Run measure point mep mep id ac pw A measurement point for collecting Y 1731 statistics is configured By default a measurement point for collecting ...

Page 744: ...stance 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs P2MP scenario 1 Run the test id test id command to configure a test instance for a specific RMEP 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs 3 On the transmitting device of a PW where single ended frame loss measurement will be imp...

Page 745: ...rame loss measurement Configure on demand single ended frame loss measurement for an AC 1 Perform the following steps on the devices at both ends of an AC where single ended frame loss measurement will be implemented a Run system view The system view is displayed b Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed c Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed d Perform the following steps on the devices whe...

Page 746: ...command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs 3 On the transmitting device of an AC where single ended frame loss measurement will be implemented run Table 8 25 Configurations for enabling a MEP to send LMMs Usage Scenario Step P2P scenario Run the loss measure single ended send mep mep id mac mac address remote mep mep id interval interval count count value command to enable on demand single ended f...

Page 747: ...statistics to generated statistics files and then sends the files to the NMS By default PM is disabled from managing Y 1731 proactive performance statistics c Optional Run y1731_record upload A device is enabled to send Y 1731 proactive performance statistics files to a server The y1731 pm mode enable and y1731_record upload commands are mutually exclusive d Run cfm md md name The MD view is displ...

Page 748: ...to receive LMMs computes the frame loss ratio based on the specified 802 1p priority If this parameter is not specified the device that is to receive LMMs computes the frame loss ratio for all packets Test instance based statistics 1 Run the test id test id command to configure a test instance 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs P2...

Page 749: ... an ID or a MAC address If the local MEP has not learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the MAC address of the remote MEP must be specified to implement single ended frame loss measurement If the local MEP has learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the ID of the remote MEP can be used to implement single ended frame loss measurement End Checking the Configurations Table 8 28 Verify the confi...

Page 750: ...00 30 75 0000 Average Local loss 20 Average Local loss Ratio 50 0000 Maximum Local loss 20 Maximum Local loss Ratio 50 0000 Minimum Local loss 20 Minimum Local loss Ratio 50 0000 Average Remote loss 30 Average Remote loss Ratio 75 0000 Maximum Remote loss 30 Maximum Remote loss Ratio 75 0000 Minimum Remote loss 30 Minimum Remote loss Ratio 75 0000 HUAWEI display y1731 statistic type single loss te...

Page 751: ... manage Y 1731 proactive performance statistics is enabled PM saves the statistics to generated statistics files and then sends the files to the NMS By default PM is disabled from managing Y 1731 proactive performance statistics 3 Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed 4 Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed 5 Run map mpls l2vc vc id raw tagged The MA is bound to a specified L2VC 6 Run mep ...

Page 752: ... 4 0 0 0000 0 0 0000 5 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 6 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 7 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 8 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 9 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 10 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 11 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 12 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 13 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 14 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 15 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 16 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 Average Local loss 5 Average Local loss Ratio 40 6250 Maximum Local loss 10 Maximum Local loss R...

Page 753: ...s on a network are used to differentiate services and therefore different policies can be deployed for services As shown in Figure 8 49 the 802 1p priority values contained in traffic passing through the P on the VLL are 1 and 2 One way frame delay measurement is performed for the link between PE1 and PE2 Assume that traffic with the priority value of 2 that is not involved in frame delay measurem...

Page 754: ...umber interface type interface number subnumber pe vid pe vid ce vid ce vid vlan vlan id Configure a PW based MEP mep mep id mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id mac mac address outward inward 3 Optional Run measure point mep mep id ac pw A measurement point for collecting Y 1731 statistics is configured By default a measurement point for collecting Y 1731 statistics is a PW interface This command c...

Page 755: ...ceive test id test id The peer device is enabled to receive 1DMs NOTE In point to multipoint scenarios test instance based statistics collection can be configured only on a PW based MEP 8 On the transmitting device on a PW where one way frame delay measurement will be implemented run Table 8 31 1DM transmission configuration Scenario Procedure Point to point Non test instance based statistics coll...

Page 756: ...stem view is displayed b Optional Run y1731 pm mode enable Performance management PM to manage Y 1731 proactive performance statistics is enabled PM saves the statistics to generated statistics files and then sends the files to the NMS By default PM is disabled from managing Y 1731 proactive performance statistics c Optional Run y1731_record upload A device is enabled to send Y 1731 proactive perf...

Page 757: ...e remote MEP ID is configured j Run mep ccm send enable The CCM transmission function is enabled This command can be configured only on an interface based MEP k Run remote mep ccm receive mep id mep id enable The CCM reception function is enabled 2 On the receiving device on a PW where proactive one way frame delay measurement will be implemented run Table 8 33 1DM reception configuration Scenario...

Page 758: ...1 Run test id test id mep mep id remote mep mep id mac mac address 8021p 8021p value description description A specific test instance is configured on a peer device 2 Run delay measure one way continual receive test id test id The peer device is enabled to receive 1DMs NOTE In point to multipoint scenarios test instance based statistics collection can be configured only on a PW based MEP End Check...

Page 759: ...L networking the clock frequency between the two ends are not synchronized and CFM is enabled to monitor link connectivity if the bidirectional delay measurement needs to be performed for a link two way frame delay measurement can be configured to monitor the quality of the link Context Two way frame delay measurement in VLL networking can be either on demand or proactive On demand two way frame d...

Page 760: ... incorrect frame delay statistics 802 1p priority based two way frame delay measurement can be configured for the VLL for accurate proactive frame delay tests Figure 8 50 Networking diagram for priority based frame loss measurement on a VLL CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2 User Network User Network MEP Y 1731 P Priority 1 Priority 2 Procedure l Configure on demand two way frame delay measurement Configure on deman...

Page 761: ...and can be configured only on an interface based MEP g Run remote mep mep id mep id The remote MEP ID is configured h Run mep ccm send enable The CCM transmission function is enabled This command can be configured only on an interface based MEP i Run remote mep ccm receive mep id mep id enable The CCM reception function is enabled 2 On the receiving device on a PW where two way frame delay measure...

Page 762: ...bled on the device that is to send DMMs on the PW side Point to multipoin t 1 Run test id test id mep mep id remote mep mep id mac mac address description description A test instance is configured 2 Run delay measure two way send test id test id interval interval count count On demand two way frame delay measurement is enabled on the device that is to send DMMs on the PW side NOTE In point to mult...

Page 763: ... configuration Operation Command Configure an interface based MEP mep mep id mep id interface interface type interface number interface type interface number subnumber pe vid pe vid ce vid ce vid vlan vlan id Configure a PW based MEP mep mep id mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id mac mac address outward inward h Optional Run measure point mep mep id ac pw A measurement point for collecting Y 1731 s...

Page 764: ...on a peer device 2 Run delay measure two way receive test id test id The peer device is enabled to receive DMMs NOTE In point to multipoint scenarios test instance based statistics collection can be configured only on a PW based MEP 3 On the transmitting device on a PW where proactive two way frame delay measurement will be implemented run Table 8 40 DMM transmission configuration Scenario Procedu...

Page 765: ... check the configuration of two way frame delay measurement on in VLL networking by using the NMS that matches the current device version Run the display y1731 statistic type command to view statistics about the delay in bidirectional frame transmission HUAWEI display y1731 statistic type twoway delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest two way delay statistics of 802 1p 2 Index Delay usec Delay variation usec 1...

Page 766: ...wn in Figure 8 51 the PE1 to PE3 traffic has two priorities 1 and 2 as indicated by the IEEE 802 1p field When implementing single ended SLM for traffic over the PE1 PE3 link PE1 sends SLM frames with varied priorities and checks the frame loss Based on the check result the network administrator can adjust the QoS policy for the link To collect accurate performance statistics configure 802 1p prio...

Page 767: ... send enable The MEP is enabled to send continuity check messages CCMs h Run remote mep ccm receive mep id mep id enable The RMEP is enabled to receive CCMs i Run test id test id value mep mep id remote mep mep id mac mac address description description A test instance is created 2 Perform the following configuration on the RMEP that receives SLM frames on the PW side Run loss measure single ended...

Page 768: ...PE run map mpls l2vc vc id raw tagged The MA is bound to a specified L2VC e Run mep mep id A MEP is configured f Run remote mep mep id mep id An RMEP is specified g Run mep ccm send enable The MEP is enabled to send CCMs h Run remote mep ccm receive mep id mep id enable The RMEP is enabled to receive CCMs i Run test id test id value mep mep id remote mep mep id mac mac address description descript...

Page 769: ...ates statistics files and allows the files to be sent to the network management system NMS c Optional Run y1731 record upload A device is enabled to send Y 1731 proactive performance statistics files to a server The y1731 pm mode enable and y1731 record upload commands are mutually exclusive d Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed e Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed f Run map mpls l2vc...

Page 770: ...hat receives SLM frames on the PW side Run loss measure single ended synthetic receive test id test id time out timeout value The RMEP is enabled to receive SLM frames 3 Perform the following configuration on the MEP that sends SLM frames to initiate proactive SLM on the PW side Run loss measure single ended synthetic send test id test id interval interval sending count count time out timeout The ...

Page 771: ...1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 697 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 698 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 699 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 700 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 701 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 702 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 703 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 704 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 705 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 706 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0...

Page 772: ...After a certain period a MEP in level 6 MD1 also detects the fault and sends the same alarm to the NMS Therefore the AIS function needs to be configured on the PEs to prohibit the MEP in the MD of a higher level from sending alarms to the NMS NOTE Millisecond level CC cannot be performed for the link between the CEs configured with alarm suppression Figure 8 52 Networking diagram of configuring AI...

Page 773: ...tting the interval at which AIS packets are sent to 60s is recommended 8 Run ais level level value The level of AIS packets to be sent is set 9 Run ais vlan pe vid pe vid ce vid low ce vid to hig ce vid 1 10 vid low vid to high vid 1 10 mep mep id The range of VLANs to which AIS packets are to be sent is set Step 2 Perform the following steps on a CE 1 Run system view The system view is displayed ...

Page 774: ...md md1 ma ma1 The total number of MAs is 1 MD Name md1 MD Name Format string Level 3 MIP Create type none SenderID TLV type Defer MA Name ma1 MA Name Format string Interval 1000 Priority 4 Vlan ID VSI Name L2VC ID 100 tagged MEP Number 1 RMEP Number 2 Suppressing Alarms No Sending Ais Packet Yes Interface TLV disabled RDI Track action l Run the display cfm ma command on a CE to check information a...

Page 775: ...is displayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed Step 3 Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed Step 4 Run ping mac multicast mep mep id c count t timeout t timeout c count Multicast MAC ping is configured By default three multicast LBMs are sent and the timeout period for waiting for an LBR is 5s End Follow up Procedure After configuring multicast MAC ping run the remote mep comman...

Page 776: ...d lower rate thresholds The test process repeats until a maximum bandwidth is found when no packets are dropped in a test In addition check for bit errors on MEP2 that receives test packets Figure 8 53 ETH test function for a VLL network VLL PE2 CE1 CE2 PE1 MEP1 PW MEP2 ETH TEST Procedure Step 1 Perform the following steps on PEs 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run cfm enable CFM ...

Page 777: ...surement one way frame delay measurement two way frame delay measurement AIS and multicast MAC ping in VPLS networking Before You Start Before configuring Y 1731 functions in VPLS networking familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the data required for the configuration Applicable Environment The VPLS technology implements MP2MP VPN networking a...

Page 778: ...itor links l Single ended frame loss measurement l Dual ended frame loss measurement l One way frame delay measurement l Two way frame delay measurement l Single ended synthetic loss measurement SLM l Alarm indication signal AIS l Multicast MAC ping l Alarm indication signal AIS l Multicast MAC ping Y 1731 functions implemented on the PW side include Y 1731 functions implemented by an interface ba...

Page 779: ...31 functions in VPLS networking complete the tasks listed in Table 8 43 Table 8 43 Pre configuration tasks for configuring Y 1731 functions in VPLS networking Function Pre configuration Task Configuring Y 1731 functions single ended frame loss measurement dual ended frame loss measurement one way frame delay measurement and two way frame delay measurement and single ended SLM for a PW in VPLS netw...

Page 780: ...s to be sent Binding an MA to a VPLS Network Binding an MA to a VPLS network is a prerequisite for configuring single ended frame loss measurement dual ended frame loss measurement one way frame delay measurement or two way frame delay measurement in VPLS networking Context VPLS based performance monitoring function is VSI specific Therefore when deploying Y 1731 bind an MA to a specified VSI and ...

Page 781: ...ed out continuously to permit proactive reporting of frame loss or performance results l To implement singular or periodic single ended frame loss measurement for a PW configure on demand single end frame loss measurement in VLL networking l To implement continual single ended frame loss measurement for a PW configure proactive single ended frame loss measurement in VLL networking Procedure l Conf...

Page 782: ... to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs Test instance based statistics 1 Run the test id test id command to configure a test instance 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs P2MP scenario 1 Run the test id test id command to configure a test instance for a specific RMEP 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to...

Page 783: ...s of the remote MEP must be specified to implement single ended frame loss measurement If the local MEP has learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the ID of the remote MEP can be used to implement single ended frame loss measurement l Configure on demand single ended frame loss measurement for an AC 1 Perform the following steps on the devices at both ends of an AC where single ended frame loss...

Page 784: ...Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs P2MP scenario 1 Run the test id test id command to configure a test instance for a specific RMEP 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs 3 On the transmitting device of an AC where single ended frame loss measurement will be implemented...

Page 785: ...form the following steps on the devices at both ends of a PW where proactive single ended frame loss measurement will be implemented a Run system view The system view is displayed b Optional Run y1731 pm mode enable Performance management PM to manage Y 1731 proactive performance statistics is enabled PM saves the statistics to generated statistics files and then sends the files to the NMS By defa...

Page 786: ...id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs Test instance based statistics 1 Run the test id test id command to configure a test instance 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs P2MP scenario 1 Run the test id test id command to configure a test instance for a specific RMEP 2 Run the loss measure single en...

Page 787: ...mote MEP can be used to implement single ended frame loss measurement End Checking the Configurations Table 8 50 Checking the configurations Usage Scenario Step P2P scenario After the configuration is complete run the display y1731 statistic type single loss md md name ma ma name 8021p 8021p value 1 3 count count value command on the PW or AC side MEP that initiates single ended frame loss measure...

Page 788: ...mum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Local loss 0 Minimum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Average Remote loss 0 Average Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Maximum Remote loss 0 Maximum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Remote loss 0 Minimum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Configuring Dual ended Frame Loss Measurement in VPLS Networking In VPLS networking CFM is enabled to monitor link connectivity if accurate frame loss mea...

Page 789: ...enabled 9 Run remote mep ccm receive mep id mep id enable The CCM reception function is enabled 10 Run loss measure dual ended continual mep mep id remote mep mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id Dual ended frame loss measurement is configured for a PW End Checking the Configurations Run the display y1731 statistic type dual loss md md name ma ma name count count value command on the devices that in...

Page 790: ...k one way frame delay measurement can be configured to monitor the quality of the link Context NOTE Before configuring a unidirectional delay synchronize the clock frequency between the two ends For details about frequency synchronization configuration see the chapter 1588v2 Configuration in Configuration Guide System Management One way frame delay measurement in VPLS networking can be either on d...

Page 791: ...interface number subnumber pe vid pe vid ce vid ce vid vlan vlan id Configure a PW based MEP mep mep id mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id mac mac address outward inward f Run remote mep mep id mep id The remote MEP ID is configured g Run mep ccm send enable The CCM transmission function is enabled This command can be configured only on an interface based MEP h Run remote mep ccm receive mep id me...

Page 792: ... test id The 1DM frame reception function is enabled 3 Table 8 53 Enabling the 1DM frame send function Scenario Procedure Point to point Non test instance based statistics collection by an interface based MEP Run delay measure one way send mep mep id mac mac address remote mep mep id interval interval count count value peer ip peer ip vc id vc id On demand one way frame delay measurement is config...

Page 793: ... for the link between the local MEP and a remote MEP identified by an ID or a MAC address If the local MEP has not learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the MAC address of the remote MEP must be specified to implement one way frame delay measurement If the local MEP has learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the ID of the remote MEP can be used to implement one way frame delay measurement l...

Page 794: ...ed MEP Run delay measure one way receive mep mep id The 1DM frame reception function is enabled Performance statistics collection based on a specified test instance 1 Run test id test id A test instance is configured 2 Run delay measure one way receive test id test id The 1DM frame reception function is enabled Point to multipoint 1 Run test id test id A test instance is configured 2 Run delay mea...

Page 795: ...etween the local MEP and a remote MEP identified by an ID or a MAC address If the local MEP has not learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the MAC address of the remote MEP must be specified to implement one way frame delay measurement If the local MEP has learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the ID of the remote MEP can be used to implement one way frame delay measurement l Configure proa...

Page 796: ...ion Command Configure an interface based MEP mep mep id mep id interface interface type interface number interface type interface number subnumber pe vid pe vid ce vid ce vid vlan vlan id Configure a PW based MEP mep mep id mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id mac mac address outward inward h Run remote mep mep id mep id The remote MEP ID is configured i Run mep ccm send enable The CCM transmission ...

Page 797: ... test id The 1DM reception function is configured on the device 3 Table 8 58 Enabling the 1DM frame reception function Scenario Procedure Point to point scenario Performance statistics collection not based on a test instance Run delay measure one way continual send mep mep id mac mac address remote mep mep id interval interval peer ip peer ip vc id vc id Proactive one way frame delay measurement i...

Page 798: ...name ma ma name count count value command on the device that initiates one way frame delay measurement to check statistics about the delay in unidirectional frame transmission NOTE Currently you can check the configuration of one way frame delay measurement on in VPLS networking by using the NMS that matches the current device version Run the display y1731 statistic type command to view statistics...

Page 799: ...ctive reporting of frame transmission delays or performance results l To implement singular or periodic two way frame delay measurement for a PW configure on demand two way frame delay measurement in VPLS networking l To implement continual two way frame delay measurement for a PW configure proactive two way frame delay measurement in VPLS networking Procedure l Configure on demand two way frame d...

Page 800: ...2 On the receiving device on a PW where on demand two way frame delay measurement will be implemented run Table 8 60 Enabling the DMM frame reception function Scenario Procedure Point to point scenario Performance statistics collection not based on a test instance Run delay measure two way receive mep mep id peer ip peer ip vc id vc id The DMM reception function is configured on the device Perform...

Page 801: ... specified test instance 1 Run test id test id A test instance is configured 2 Run delay measure two way send test id test id On demand two way frame delay measurement is configured for a PW Point to multipoint scenario 1 Run test id test id A test instance is configured 2 Run delay measure two way send test id test id On demand two way frame delay measurement is configured for a PW The peer ip pe...

Page 802: ...31 pm mode enable Performance management PM to manage Y 1731 proactive performance statistics is enabled PM saves the statistics to generated statistics files and then sends the files to the NMS By default PM is disabled from managing Y 1731 proactive performance statistics c Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed d Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed e Run map vsi vsi name The MA is boun...

Page 803: ...M reception function is configured on the device Performance statistics collection based on a specified test instance 1 Run test id test id A test instance is configured 2 Run delay measure two way receive test id test id The DMM reception function is configured on the device Point to multipoint scenario 1 Run test id test id A test instance is configured 2 Run delay measure two way receive test i...

Page 804: ...way frame delay measurement is configured for a PW End Checking the Configurations Run the display y1731 statistic type twoway delay md md name ma ma name count count value command on the device that initiates two way frame delay measurement to check statistics about the delay in bidirectional frame transmission NOTE Currently you can check the configuration of two way frame delay measurement on i...

Page 805: ...s statistics at one or more specific times for diagnosis It is used on the pseudo wire PW or attachment circuit AC side Proactive SLM collects single ended frame loss statistics periodically It is used on the PW side only Procedure l Configure single ended on demand SLM Configure single ended on demand SLM on the PW side 1 Perform the following steps on the devices at both ends of a PW where singl...

Page 806: ...ance is created 2 Perform the following configuration on the RMEP that receives SLM frames on the PW side Run loss measure single ended synthetic receive test id test id time out timeout value The RMEP is enabled to receive SLM frames 3 Perform the following configuration on the MEP that sends SLM frames to initiate on demand SLM on the PW side Run loss measure single ended synthetic send test id ...

Page 807: ...lowing configuration on the RMEP that receives SLM frames on the AC side Run loss measure single ended synthetic receive test id test id time out timeout value The RMEP is enabled to receive SLM frames 3 Perform the following configuration on the MEP that sends SLM frames to initiate on demand SLM on the AC side Run loss measure single ended synthetic send test id test id interval interval sending...

Page 808: ...MA view is displayed f Run map vsi vsi name The MA is bound to a VSI g Configure a MEP according to Table 8 66 Table 8 66 MEP configuration Operation Command Configure an interface based MEP mep mep id mep id interface interface type interface number interface type interface number subnumber pe vid pe vid ce vid ce vid vlan vlan id Configure a PW based MEP mep mep id mep id peer ip peer ip vc id v...

Page 809: ...r single ended SLM HUAWEI display y1731 statistic type single synthetic loss test id 2 Index L send R send L recv Unack L loss R loss L loss ratio R loss ratio 667 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 668 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 669 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 670 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 671 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 672 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 673 10...

Page 810: ... 722 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 723 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 724 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 725 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 726 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 Average Local loss 0 Average Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Maximum Local loss 0 Maximum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Local loss 0 Minimum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Average Remote loss 0 Average Remote loss Rat...

Page 811: ... is bound to a VSI 5 Run ais enable AIS is enabled for the current MA By default AIS is disabled from an MA 6 Optional Run ais link status AIS is configured to monitor interfaces in the current MA By default AIS does not monitor any interface 7 Optional Run ais interval interval value The interval at which AIS packets are sent is set By default AIS packets are sent at an interval of 1s HUAWEI NetE...

Page 812: ...bound to the current VLAN 5 Run ais enable AIS is enabled for the current MA By default AIS is disabled from an MA 6 Run ais suppress alarm Alarm suppression is enabled for the current MA By default alarm suppression is disabled from a MEP In an MD nesting scenario if alarm suppression is enabled for the MD of a high level a MEP in this MD does not send alarms that a MEP in an MD of a low level ha...

Page 813: ...tring Level 6 MIP Create type none SenderID TLV type Defer MA Name ma2 MA Name Format string Interval 10000 Piority 4 Vlan ID 7 VSI Name L2VC ID 100 tagged MEP Number 21 RMEP Number 22 Suppressing Alarms Yes Sending Ais Packet No Interface TLV disabled RDI Track action Configuring Multicast MAC Ping Multicast MAC ping is used to discover all remote MEPs of a MEP in an MA Context Multicast MAC ping...

Page 814: ... error rate Context In Figure 8 57 MEP1 is configured on an AC interface of PE1 and MEP2 is configured on an AC interface of PE2 MEP1 initiates an ETH test and sends test packets with a specified size and code type at a specified rate and interval Then check the number of packets MEP1 sends and the number of packets MEP2 receives If MEP1 sends more packets than MEP2 receives some packets have been...

Page 815: ...specified VSI 6 Run mep mep id A MEP is configured 7 Run eth test enable The ETH test function is enabled By default the ETH test function is disabled 8 Run eth test start mep mep id mac mac address remote mep mep id interval interval value timeout timeout value pattern zero no crc zero crc 8021p 8021p value packet size packet size value The MEP is enabled to send test packets 9 Optional Run eth t...

Page 816: ...enario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the data required for the configuration Applicable Environment As shown in Figure 8 58 Y 1731 is used to implement fast fault detection and performance monitoring for end to end services When a user considers that the quality of purchased Ethernet tunnel services deteriorates or when an operator needs to conduct regular Service level agreement...

Page 817: ...ork All Y 1731 functions can collect performance statistics for a point to point link in VLAN networking In addition SLM one way frame delay measurement and two way frame delay measurement can collect performance statistics for point to multipoint links such as the links between CE1 and CE2 and between CE1 and CE3 The type of an interface supported in VLAN networking is as follows l Common interfa...

Page 818: ...larm to the NMS After a certain period a MEP in level 6 MD1 also detects the fault and sends the same alarm to the NMS Therefore the AIS function needs to be configured on the PEs to prohibit the MEP in the MD of a higher level from sending alarms to the NMS NOTE Millisecond level CC cannot be performed for the link between the CEs configured with alarm suppression Figure 8 60 Networking diagram o...

Page 819: ...If the range of VLANs to which AIS packets are to be sent is set setting the interval at which AIS packets are sent to 60s is recommended 8 Run ais level level value The level of AIS packets to be sent is set 9 Run ais vlan pe vid pe vid ce vid low ce vid to hig ce vid 1 10 vid low vid to high vid 1 10 mep mep id The range of VLANs to which AIS packets are to be sent is set Step 2 Perform the foll...

Page 820: ...d output shows when the device receives the right AIS packets then the Sending Ais Packet field is displayed as Yes PE display cfm ma md md1 ma ma1 The total number of MAs is 1 MD Name md1 MD Name Format string Level 3 MIP Create type none SenderID TLV type Defer MA Name ma1 MA Name Format string Interval 1000 Priority 4 Vlan ID VSI Name L2VC ID 100 tagged MEP Number 1 RMEP Number 2 Suppressing Al...

Page 821: ...nd delay Before running the remote mep command to configure a remote MEP in the current MA you are recommended to run the ping mac multicast command to configure multicast MAC ping Perform the following steps on each edge device in an MA Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed Step 3 Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed St...

Page 822: ...nt is performed continuously to permit proactive reporting of frame loss or performance results To implement singular or periodic single ended frame loss measurement configure on demand single end frame loss measurement in VLAN networking To implement continual single ended frame loss measurement configure proactive single ended frame loss measurement in VLAN networking Procedure l Configure on de...

Page 823: ...nd to configure a test instance for a specific RMEP 2 Run the loss measure single ended receive test id test id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs 3 On the device that initiates single ended frame loss measurement run Table 8 68 Configurations for enabling a MEP to send LMMs Usage Scenario Step P2P scenario Run the loss measure single ended send mep mep id mac mac address remote mep mep id...

Page 824: ...ailed mode for recording Y 1731 proactive statistics is enabled c Optional Run y1731 pm mode enable Performance management PM to manage Y 1731 proactive performance statistics is enabled PM saves the statistics to generated statistics files and then sends the files to the NMS By default PM is disabled from managing Y 1731 proactive performance statistics d Optional Run y1731 record upload A device...

Page 825: ...ased statistics Run the loss measure single ended receive mep mep id 8021p 8021p value 1 3 command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs If the 8021p 8021p value parameter is specified the device that is to receive LMMs computes the frame loss ratio based on the specified 802 1p priority If this parameter is not specified the device that is to receive LMMs computes the frame loss ratio for all packet...

Page 826: ...ID or a MAC address If the local MEP has not learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the MAC address of the remote MEP must be specified to implement single ended frame loss measurement If the local MEP has learned the MAC address of the remote MEP the ID of the remote MEP can be used to implement single ended frame loss measurement End Checking the Configurations Table 8 71 Checking the configu...

Page 827: ... id 1 Latest single ended loss statistics of 802 1p 1 Index Local loss Local loss ratio Remote loss Remote loss ratio 1 0 0 0000 0 0 0000 Average Local loss 0 Average Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Maximum Local loss 0 Maximum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Local loss 0 Minimum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Average Remote loss 0 Average Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Maximum Remote loss 0 Maximum Remote loss Ratio ...

Page 828: ... h Run remote mep ccm receive mep id mep id enable The RMEP is enabled to receive CCMs i Run test id test id value mep mep id remote mep mep id description description A test instance is created 2 Perform the following configuration on the RMEP that receives SLM frames Run loss measure single ended synthetic receive test id test id time out timeout value The RMEP is enabled to receive SLM frames 3...

Page 829: ...tive performance statistics files to a server The y1731 pm mode enable and y1731 record upload commands are mutually exclusive d Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed e Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed f Run map vlan vlan id The MA is bound to a VLAN g Run mep mep id A MEP is configured h Run remote mep mep id mep id An RMEP is specified i Run mep ccm send enable The MEP is enabled to...

Page 830: ...est id count count command on the MEP that has been enabled to send SLM frames Run the display y1731 statistic type command The command output shows statistics for single ended SLM HUAWEI display y1731 statistic type single synthetic loss test id 2 Index L send R send L recv Unack L loss R loss L loss ratio R loss ratio 667 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 668 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 ...

Page 831: ...00 0 0000 720 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 721 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 722 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 723 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 724 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 725 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 726 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 Average Local loss 0 Average Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Maximum Local loss 0 Maximum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Loc...

Page 832: ...p 1 Perform the following steps on PEs 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run cfm enable CFM is enabled globally By default CFM is disabled globally 3 Run cfm md md name The MD view is displayed 4 Run ma ma name The MA view is displayed 5 Run map vlan vlan id The MA is associated with a VLAN 6 Run mep mep id A MEP is configured 7 Run eth test enable The ETH test function is enabled B...

Page 833: ...oint to point one way frame delay measurement Run the reset y1731 statistic type oneway delay md md name ma ma name peer ip peer ip vc id vc id 8021p 8021p value 1 3 command in the user view l Clear statistics about point to point two way frame delay measurement Run the reset y1731 statistic type twoway delay md md name ma ma name peer ip peer ip vc id vc id 8021p 8021p value 1 3 command in the us...

Page 834: ...that initiates an ETH test instance l Run the reset y1731 eth test md md name ma ma name mep mep id command in the user view Step 2 Delete Y 1731 ETH test statistics on the MEP that receives ETH test packets l Run the reset y1731 statistic type eth test md md name ma ma name mep mep id command in the user view End 8 4 7 Configuration Examples This section provides several examples showing how to c...

Page 835: ... GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure on demand single ended frame loss measurement for the PW between the PEs to periodically collect frame loss statistics 2 Configure proactive single ended frame loss measurement for the PW between the PEs to periodically collect frame loss statistics Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the...

Page 836: ... 12 seconds up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds last change time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds VC last up time 2010 10 13 15 02 23 VC total up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds CKey 4 NKey 3 AdminPw interface AdminPw link state 2 Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions and specify the MEP type as inward Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions on each PE Specify the Ethernet CFM ...

Page 837: ...oss Remote loss ratio 1 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 2 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 3 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 4 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 5 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 6 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 7 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 8 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 9 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 10 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 11 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 12 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 13 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 14 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 Average Local loss 20 Average Local l...

Page 838: ...1 ma ma1 Latest single ended loss statistics Index Local loss Local loss ratio Remote loss Remote loss ratio 1 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 2 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 3 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 4 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 5 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 6 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 Average Local loss 20 Average Local loss Ratio 50 0000 Maximum Local loss 20 Maximum Local loss Ratio 50 0000 Minimum Local loss 20 Minimum Local l...

Page 839: ... ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable loss measure single ended continual send mep 1 remote mep 2 interval 30000 ma ma2 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0...

Page 840: ...the increasing popularization and wide application of the Internet various value added services such as IPTV video conferencing and VoIP services are widely deployed Link connectivity and network performance determine the Quality of Services QoS on bearer networks Therefore performance monitoring is especially important for service transmission channels As shown in Figure 8 63 CFM is configured be...

Page 841: ...t which LM messages are sent and the number of times when LM messages are sent Procedure Step 1 Configure on demand single ended frame loss measurement for the PW between the PEs 1 Configure a VPLS connection Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2 The detailed configurations are not provided here For details see the chapter VPLS Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configur...

Page 842: ...ary or secondary primary ignore standby state no VC Label 1025 Peer Type dynamic Session up Tunnel ID 0x800003 Broadcast Tunnel ID 0x800003 Broad BackupTunnel ID 0x0 CKey 2 NKey 1 StpEnable 0 PwIndex 0 Interface Name GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 State up Last Up Time 2010 10 12 14 18 39 Total Up Time 0 days 1 hours 2 minutes 44 seconds PW HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 ...

Page 843: ...e an MD named md1 and an MA named ma1 and bind the MA to the VSI Configure PE1 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE1 PE1 cfm enable PE1 cfm version standard PE1 cfm md md1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 map vsi ldp1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 mep mep id 1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 inward PE1 md md1 ma ma1 mep ccm send mep id 1 enable PE1 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 2 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 remot...

Page 844: ... y1731 statistic type single loss md md1 ma ma1 peer ip 2 2 2 2 Latest single ended loss statistics Index Local loss Local loss ratio Remote loss Remote loss ratio 1 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 2 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 3 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 4 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 5 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 6 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 7 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 8 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 9 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 10 20 50 0000 30 75 ...

Page 845: ...2 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 1 l2 binding vsi ldp1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md ma ma1 map vsi ldp1 mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep i...

Page 846: ... interface LoopBack0 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map vsi ldp1 mep mep id 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable loss measure single ended receive mep 2 peer ip 1 1 1 1 return Example for Configuring Dual ended Frame...

Page 847: ...nfiguring Y 1731 function on a VLL networking User Network User Network VLL CE1 PE1 PE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 2 GE1 0 2 CE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure on demand dual ended frame loss measurement for the PW between the PEs to periodically collect frame loss statistics Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following...

Page 848: ... 0 minutes 42 seconds last change time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds VC last up time 2010 10 13 15 02 23 VC total up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds CKey 4 NKey 3 AdminPw interface AdminPw link state 2 Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions and specify the MEP type as inward Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions on each PE Specify the Ethernet CFM protocol in the version of IEEE St...

Page 849: ...ocal loss Local loss ratio Remote loss Remote loss ratio 1 0 0 0000 0 0 0000 2 0 0 0000 0 0 0000 3 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 4 0 0 0000 0 0 0000 5 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 6 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 7 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 8 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 9 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 10 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 11 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 12 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 13 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 14 10 50 0000 5 50 0000 15 5 50 0000 10 50 0000 1...

Page 850: ... 2 2 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 e...

Page 851: ...255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable loss measure dual ended continual mep 2 remote mep 1 return HUAWEI Net...

Page 852: ... and measure frame loss on the links Figure 8 65 Networking diagram for configuring Y 1731 functions in VPLS networking User Network User Network VPLS CE1 PE1 PE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 2 GE1 0 2 CE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure dual ended frame loss measurement for the PW between the PEs to continually collect frame loss statistics Data ...

Page 853: ...name ldp1 verbose VSI Name ldp1 Administrator VSI no Isolate Spoken disable VSI Index 0 PW Signaling ldp Member Discovery Style static PW MAC Learn Style unqualify Encapsulation Type vlan MTU 1500 Diffserv Mode uniform Service Class Color DomainId 255 Domain Name Ignore AcState disable Create Time 0 days 3 hours 29 minutes 53 seconds VSI State up Resource Status Valid VSI ID 1 Peer Router ID 2 2 2...

Page 854: ...l Type LSP OutInterface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 Backup OutInterface Stp Enable 0 PW Last Up Time 2010 10 12 14 19 55 PW Total Up Time 0 days 1 hours 1 minutes 28 seconds 2 Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions and specify the MEP type as inward Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions on each PE Specify the Ethernet CFM protocol in the version of IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 Create an MD named md1 and a...

Page 855: ...ntinual mep 1 remote mep 2 peer ip 2 2 2 2 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE1 md md1 quit Configure PE2 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 loss measure dual ended continual mep 2 remote mep 1 peer ip 1 1 1 1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE2 md md1 quit 4 Verify the configuration Run the display y1731 statistic type command on PE1 to view dual ended frame loss statistics PE1 display y1731 statistic type dual loss md md1 ma ma1 p...

Page 856: ...ma ma2 map vlan 2 mep mep id 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 3 enable remote mep mep id 4 remote mep ccm receive mep id 4 enable loss measure dual ended continual mep 3 remote mep 4 return l Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 1 peer 2 2 2 2 mpls ldp interface Giga...

Page 857: ...enable loss measure dual ended continual mep 4 remote mep 3 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 1 peer 1 1 1 1 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 2 l2 binding vsi ldp1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp i...

Page 858: ...CFM is configured between each CE and PE and between PEs To provide high quality video services providers hope to monitor the unidirectional delay over mobile bearer links in real time while monitoring link connectivity Monitoring the unidirectional delay over mobile bearer links allows the providers to respond quickly to video service quality deterioration NOTE Before configuring a unidirectional...

Page 859: ...ation in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN or configuration files in this configuration example After completing the configuration run the display mpls l2vc command on each PE to view information about the VC and AC PE1 display mpls l2vc total LDP VC 1 1 up 0 down client interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 Administrator PW no session state up AC status up VC state up Label st...

Page 860: ...p id 2 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 inward PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep ccm send mep id 2 enable PE2 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable 3 Configure the 1DM reception function on PE2 Configure PE2 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 delay measure one way receive mep 2 4 Enable on demand one way frame delay measurement on the PW on a VLL network Configure PE1 PE1 m...

Page 861: ... md md1 ma ma1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 delay measure one way continual send mep 1 remote mep 2 interval 1000 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE1 md md1 quit 3 Verify the configuration Run the display y1731 statistic type command on PE2 to view the statistics about the delay in unidirectional frame transmission PE2 display y1731 statistic type oneway delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest one way delay statistics Index Delay...

Page 862: ...ce GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 2 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 2 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 ena...

Page 863: ...1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 2 enable remote mep mep id 1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable delay measure one way rece...

Page 864: ...onization configuration see the chapter 1588v2 Configuration in Configuration Guide System Management Figure 8 67 Networking diagram for configuring Y 1731 functions in VPLS networking User Network User Network VPLS CE1 PE1 PE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 2 GE1 0 2 CE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure on demand one way frame delay measurement for ...

Page 865: ... name ldp1 verbose VSI Name ldp1 Administrator VSI no Isolate Spoken disable VSI Index 0 PW Signaling ldp Member Discovery Style static PW MAC Learn Style unqualify Encapsulation Type vlan MTU 1500 Diffserv Mode uniform Service Class Color DomainId 255 Domain Name Ignore AcState disable Create Time 0 days 3 hours 29 minutes 53 seconds VSI State up Resource Status Valid VSI ID 1 Peer Router ID 2 2 ...

Page 866: ...l Type LSP OutInterface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 Backup OutInterface Stp Enable 0 PW Last Up Time 2010 10 12 14 19 55 PW Total Up Time 0 days 1 hours 1 minutes 28 seconds 2 Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions and specify the MEP type as inward Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions on each PE Specify the Ethernet CFM protocol in the version of IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 Create an MD named md1 and a...

Page 867: ...1DM reception function on PE2 Configure PE2 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 delay measure one way receive mep 2 peer ip 1 1 1 1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE2 md md1 quit 4 Enable on demand one way frame delay measurement for the PW on the VPLS network Configure PE1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 delay measure one way send mep 1 remote mep 2 interval 1000 count 20 peer ip 2 2 2 2 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE1 md md1 quit 5 Verify ...

Page 868: ...rface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 3 enable remote mep mep id 4 remote mep ccm receive mep id 4 enable return l Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 2 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 2 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpl...

Page 869: ...sr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 1 peer 1 1 1 1 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 2 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map ...

Page 870: ...wants to implement one way frame delay measurement as a response to video service quality deterioration Figure 8 68 Networking diagram for configuring Y 1731 function on a VLAN networking User Network User Network VLAN CE1 PE1 PE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 2 GE1 0 2 CE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure on demand one way frame delay measurement f...

Page 871: ...net1 0 1 CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port link type trunk CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port trunk allow pass 2 CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit CE2 cfm enable CE2 cfm version standard CE2 cfm md md3 CE2 md md3 ma ma3 CE2 md md3 ma ma3 map vlan 2 CE2 md md3 ma ma3 mep mep id 4 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 outward CE2 md md3 ma ma3 mep ccm send mep id 4 enable CE2 md md3 ...

Page 872: ...within a specified VLAN allows you to collect link measurement statistics continuously over a long term 1 Enable CE2 to receive 1DM messages Configure CE2 CE2 cfm md md3 CE2 md md3 ma ma3 CE2 md md3 ma ma3 delay measure one way continual receive mep 4 CE2 md md3 ma ma3 quit CE2 md md3 quit 2 Enable proactive one way frame delay measurement Configure CE1 CE1 cfm md md3 CE1 md md3 ma ma3 CE1 md md3 ...

Page 873: ...10 14 1797832 12 15 1797854 22 16 1797830 24 17 1797844 14 18 1803127 5283 19 1797832 5295 20 1797824 8 21 1802946 5122 22 1797833 5113 23 1797829 4 24 1797825 4 25 1797818 7 26 1797820 2 27 1797820 0 28 1797815 5 29 1797796 19 30 1797828 32 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright ...

Page 874: ... 50 1797779 4 51 1753516 44263 52 1797770 44254 53 1797770 0 54 1797771 1 55 1797715 56 56 1797773 58 57 1797763 10 58 1797787 24 59 1797761 26 60 1797761 0 Average delay usec 1796758 Average delay variation usec 2805 Maximum delay usec 1753516 Maximum delay variation usec HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprie...

Page 875: ...n 2 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch undo shutdown port trunk allow pass vlan 2 cfm md md3 ma ma3 map vlan 2 mep mep id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 4 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable delay measure one way receive mep 4 delay measure one way continual receive mep 4 return Example for Configuri...

Page 876: ...twork User Network VLL CE1 PE1 PE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 2 GE1 0 2 CE2 GE1 0 1 GE1 0 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure on demand two way frame delay measurement for the PW between the PEs to periodically collect statistics about the delay in frame transmission 2 Configure proactive two way frame delay measurement for the PW between the PEs to periodically ...

Page 877: ... name primary or secondary primary create time 0 days 0 hours 1 minutes 12 seconds up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds last change time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds VC last up time 2010 10 13 15 02 23 VC total up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 42 seconds CKey 4 NKey 3 AdminPw interface AdminPw link state 2 Configure basic Ethernet CFM functions and specify the MEP type as inward Conf...

Page 878: ...onfiguration Run the display y1731 statistic type command on PE1 to view the statistics about the delay in bidirectional frame transmission PE1 display y1731 statistic type twoway delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest two way delay statistics Index Delay usec Delay variation usec 1 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 0 0 10 0 0 Average delay usec 0 Average delay variation usec 0 Maximum delay usec ...

Page 879: ...Average delay variation usec 0 Maximum delay usec 0 Maximum delay variation usec 0 Minimum delay usec 0 Minimum delay variation usec 0 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 vlan batch 2 cfm version standard cfm enable cfm md md1 ma ma2 map vlan 2 mep mep id 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 3 enable remote mep mep id 4 remote mep ccm receive mep...

Page 880: ...al 30000 ma ma2 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 4 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable delay measure two way receive mep 4 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 1 peer 1 1 1 1 mpls ldp interfac...

Page 881: ... connectivity and network performance determine the Quality of Services QoS on bearer networks Therefore performance monitoring is especially important for service transmission channels As shown in Figure 8 70 CFM is configured between each CE and PE and between PEs To provide high quality video services providers hope to monitor the bidirectional delay over mobile bearer links in real time while ...

Page 882: ...etween PEs 1 Configure a VPLS connection Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2 The detailed configurations are not provided here For details see the chapter VPLS Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN or configuration files in this example After completing the configuration run the display vsi name vsi name verbose command on each PE to view informati...

Page 883: ...Index 0 Interface Name GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 State up Last Up Time 2010 10 12 14 18 39 Total Up Time 0 days 1 hours 2 minutes 44 seconds PW Information Peer Ip Address 2 2 2 2 PW State up Local VC Label 1025 Remote VC Label 1025 PW Type label Tunnel ID 0x800003 Broadcast Tunnel ID 0x800003 Broad BackupTunnel ID 0x0 Ckey 0x2 Nkey 0x1 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8...

Page 884: ...enable PE1 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE1 md md1 quit Configure PE2 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE2 PE2 cfm enable PE2 cfm version standard PE2 cfm md md1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 map vsi ldp1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep mep id 2 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 inward PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep ccm send mep id 2 enable PE2 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep ccm receive m...

Page 885: ...usec 0 Minimum delay variation usec 0 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 vlan batch 2 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch undo shutdown port default vlan 2 cfm md md1 ma ma2 map vlan 2 mep mep id 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 3 enable remote mep mep id 4 remote mep ccm receive mep id 4 enable return l...

Page 886: ...able ma ma2 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 4 enable remote mep mep id 3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 3 enable delay measure two way receive mep 4 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi id 1 peer 1 1 1 1 mpls ldp interface Gi...

Page 887: ...various value added services such as IPTV video conferencing and voice over IP VoIP are becoming increasingly popular The performance monitoring function can be used to check the performance of links that transmit services On the network shown in Figure 8 71 CFM is configured to monitor the connectivity of links between customer edges CEs Because more users are demanding video services the carrier...

Page 888: ...ow pass vlan 2 CE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit CE1 cfm md md3 CE1 md md3 ma ma3 CE1 md md3 ma ma3 map vlan 2 CE1 md md3 ma ma3 mep mep id 3 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 outward CE1 md md3 ma ma3 mep ccm send mep id 3 enable CE1 md md3 ma ma3 remote mep mep id 4 CE1 md md3 ma ma3 remote mep ccm receive mep id 4 enable Configure CE2 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname CE2 CE2 vlan 2 CE2 interface giga...

Page 889: ...delay variation usec 0 Minimum delay usec 0 Minimum delay variation usec 0 Step 2 Configure proactive two way frame delay measurement for links between CEs NOTE Proactive two way frame delay measurement within a specified VLAN allows you to collect link measurement statistics continuously over a long term 1 Enable proactive two way frame delay measurement Configure CE1 CE1 cfm md md3 CE1 md md3 ma...

Page 890: ...p id 3 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward mep ccm send mep id 3 enable remote mep mep id 4 remote mep ccm receive mep id 4 enable delay measure two way continual send mep 3 remote mep 4 interval 30000 return l Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 vlan 2 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch undo shutdown port trunk allow pass vlan 2 cfm md md3 ma ma3 map vl...

Page 891: ...ccurate performance statistics about LM on the link between PE1 and PE3 To monitor network performance in real time the carrier can configure single ended SLM on the VLL network This configuration allows the carrier to immediately adjust the network in case of voice quality deterioration Figure 8 72 Single ended SLM in VLL networking CE1 PE1 User Network User Network GE1 0 2 User Network PE2 PE3 C...

Page 892: ...terface Eth Trunk2 1 is up Administrator PW no session state up AC status up VC state up Label state 0 Token state 0 VC ID 10001 VC type VLAN destination 10 1 1 25 local VC label 16 remote VC label 16 control word disable remote control word disable forwarding entry exist local group ID 0 remote group ID 0 local AC OAM State up local PSN OAM State up local forwarding state forwarding local status ...

Page 893: ...nel token info 1 tunnels tokens NO 0 TNL type lsp TNL ID 0x203 Backup TNL type lsp TNL ID 0x0 create time 2 days 21 hours 33 minutes 37 seconds up time 0 days 4 hours 20 minutes 19 seconds last change time 0 days 4 hours 20 minutes 19 seconds VC last up time 2013 04 15 10 04 26 VC total up time 2 days 21 hours 25 minutes 20 seconds CKey 6 NKey 3 PW redundancy mode frr AdminPw interface AdminPw lin...

Page 894: ... PE2 cfm md md1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep mep id 2 interface Eth Trunk2 1 inward PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep ccm send mep id 2 enable PE2 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 1 enable PE2 md md1 ma ma1 test id 1 mep 2 remote mep 1 3 Enable PE2 to receive SLM frames Configure PE2 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 loss mea...

Page 895: ...ive SLM frames Configure PE2 PE2 cfm md md1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 PE2 md md ma ma1 loss measure single ended synthetic receive test id 1 time out 300 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE2 md md1 quit 2 Enable PE1 to send SLM frames Configure PE1 PE1 cfm md md1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 loss measure single ended synthetic continual send test id 1 interval 1000 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE1 md md1 quit 3 Ve...

Page 896: ...s 0 Maximum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Remote loss 0 Minimum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 End Configuration Files l PE1 configuration file sysname PE1 FTP server enable y1731 pm mode enable cfm enable mpls lsr id 10 1 1 24 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls ldp interface Eth Trunk2 interface Eth Trunk2 1 vlan type dot1q 1 mpls l2vc 10 1 1 25 10001 interface Ethernet0 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 137 131 24...

Page 897: ... 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 1 interface Eth Trunk2 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable test id 1 mep 1 remote mep 2 loss measure single ended synthetic continual send test id 1 interval 1000 return l PE2 configuration file sysname PE2 HUAWE...

Page 898: ...hernet1 0 1 undo shutdown eth trunk 2 undo dcn interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 192 168 1 4 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp dcn interface NULL0 interface LoopBack0 ip address 10 1 1 25 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 opaque capability enable area HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confiden...

Page 899: ... IPTV video conferencing and voice over Internet Protocol VoIP are more widely used than ever before Any link connectivity fault or network performance deterioration directly affects service quality on a live network making performance monitoring on the pipes that transmit these services absolutely essential On the point to multipoint network shown in Figure 8 73 a carrier wants to collect accurat...

Page 900: ...onfiguration in HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN or Configuration Files in this section After the preceding configuration is complete run the display vsi command on each PE to view VC and attachment circuit AC information The following example uses the command output on PE1 PE1 display vsi name ethoam verbose VSI Name ethoam Administrator VSI no Isolate Spoken disable VSI Ind...

Page 901: ... 0 PwIndex 0 Interface Name Eth Trunk2 1 State up Access Port false Last Up Time 2013 04 15 17 37 09 Total Up Time 0 days 0 hours 1 minutes 37 seconds PW Information Peer Ip Address 10 1 1 24 PW State up Local VC Label 527 Remote VC Label 527 PW Type label Tunnel ID 0x25f Broadcast Tunnel ID 0x25f Broad BackupTunnel ID 0x0 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet O...

Page 902: ...p mep id 2 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable PE1 md md1 ma ma1 test id 1 mep 1 remote mep 2 Configure PE2 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE2 PE2 cfm enable PE2 cfm version standard PE2 cfm md md1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 map vsi ethoam PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep mep id 2 interface Eth Trunk2 1 inward PE2 md md1 ma ma1 mep ccm send mep id 2 enable PE2 md md1 ma ma1 r...

Page 903: ...aximum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Remote loss 0 Minimum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Step 2 Configure single ended proactive SLM on a PW between PEs 1 Enable PE2 to receive SLM frames Configure PE2 PE2 cfm md md1 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 PE2 md md ma ma1 loss measure single ended synthetic receive test id 1 time out 300 PE2 md md1 ma ma1 quit PE2 md md1 quit 2 Enable PE1 to send SLM frames Configure PE...

Page 904: ...cal loss Ratio 0 0000 Average Remote loss 0 Average Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Maximum Remote loss 0 Maximum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Remote loss 0 Minimum Remote loss Ratio 0 0000 End Configuration Files l PE1 configuration file sysname PE1 FTP server enable y1731 pm mode enable cfm enable mpls lsr id 10 1 1 24 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls ldp interface Eth Trunk2 interface Eth Trunk2 1 vlan type d...

Page 905: ...network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 136 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map vsi ethoam mep mep id 1 interface Eth Trunk2 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable test id 1 mep 1 remote mep 2 loss measure single ended synthetic continual send test id 1 inter...

Page 906: ...131 25 255 255 254 0 interface GigabitEthernet0 1 0 undo shutdown eth trunk 2 undo dcn interface GigabitEthernet0 2 2 undo shutdown ip address 192 168 1 4 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp dcn interface NULL0 interface LoopBack0 ip address 10 1 1 25 255 255 255 255 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confi...

Page 907: ...us value added services such as Internet Protocol television IPTV video conferencing and voice over Internet Protocol VoIP are more widely used than ever before Any link connectivity fault or network performance deterioration directly affects service quality on a live network making performance monitoring on the pipes that transmit these services absolutely essential On the point to multipoint net...

Page 908: ...net CFM functions on each CE Specify the Ethernet CFM protocol as IEEE Standard 802 1ag 2007 Create an MD named md3 and an MA named ma3 and bind the MA to the VLAN Configure CE1 CE1 vlan 2 CE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 CE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 portswitch CE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port link type trunk CE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port trunk allow pass vlan 2 CE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit CE1 cfm md...

Page 909: ...ic send test id 1 interval 1000 sending count 10 time out 2 PE1 md md3 ma ma3 quit PE1 md md3 quit 4 Verify the configuration Run the display y1731 statistic type command on CE1 to view statistics about single ended on demand SLM CE1 display y1731 statistic type single synthetic loss test id 1 Index L send R send L recv Unack L loss R loss L loss ratio R loss ratio 1016 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0000 0 000...

Page 910: ...ndex L send R send L recv Unack L loss R loss L loss ratio R loss ratio 1016 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 1017 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 1018 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 1019 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 1020 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 1021 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 Average Local loss 0 Average Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Maximum Local loss 0 Maximum Local loss Ratio 0 0000 Minimum Local loss...

Page 911: ...hetic receive test id 1 time out 300 return Example for Configuring an ETH Test Function Y 1731 ETH test functions can be used in VLL VPLS and VLAN scenarios This section provides an example for configuring the ETH test function for a VLL network Networking Requirements In Figure 8 75 MEP1 is configured on an AC interface of PE1 and MEP2 is configured on an AC interface of PE2 MEP1 initiates an ET...

Page 912: ...d You can successfully configure the raw parameter in the map mpls l2vc command to bind the MA to the L2VC only after you configure the raw parameter in the mpls l2vc command to create a dynamic VLL connection NOTE l When VLAN networking is used configure a VLAN between PE1 and PE2 For configuration details see the section VLAN Configuration in HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide LA...

Page 913: ...AN associate the MA with the VLAN PE2 md md1 ma ma1 map vlan 2 l On the VPLS network associate the MA with the VSI PE2 md md1 ma ma1 map vsi ldp1 PE2 md md2 ma ma2 mep mep id 2 interface gigabitEthernet 2 0 1 1 inward Step 3 Configure the ETH test function Configure PE1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 eth test enable mep 1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 eth test start mep 1 remote mep 2 interval 10 Configure PE2 PE2 md md1 ...

Page 914: ...emote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable eth test enable mep 1 l PE2 configuration file sysname PE2 cfm enable mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls ldp cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 201 tagged mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidenti...

Page 915: ...e scenarios of MD nesting if a MEP in a low level MD detects a fault the MEP sends an alarm to the NMS After a certain period a MEP in the MD of a higher level also detects the fault and sends the same alarm to the NMS In this case the MEP in the MD of a higher level must be prohibited from sending the same alarm to the NMS NOTE The VLL between the PEs is used as an example Figure 8 76 Networking ...

Page 916: ...on in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide LAN Access and MAN Access or configuration files in this configuration example l In the case of VPLS networking configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2 The configuration details are not provided here For details see the chapter VPLS Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN or configuration files...

Page 917: ... 1 quit CE1 cfm version standard CE1 cfm enable CE1 cfm md md2 level 6 CE1 md md1 ma ma2 CE1 md md1 ma ma1 map vlan 10 CE1 md md1 ma ma1 quit CE1 md md1 quit Configure CE2 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname CE2 CE2 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 1 CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port trunk allow pass vlan 10 CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit CE2 cfm version standard CE2 c...

Page 918: ...ach CE Configure CE1 CE1 cfm md md2 CE1 md md2 ma ma2 CE1 md md2 ma ma2 mep mep id 61 interface gigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward CE1 md md2 ma ma2 ccm interval 10000 CE1 md md2 ma ma2 mep ccm send enable CE1 md md2 ma ma2 remote mep mep id 62 CE1 md md2 ma ma2 remote mep ccm receive enable CE1 md md2 ma ma2 quit CE1 md md2 quit Configure CE2 CE2 cfm md md2 CE2 md md2 ma ma2 CE2 md md2 ma ma2 mep mep i...

Page 919: ... md md1 ma ma1 command on PE1 The value of the Sending Ais Packet field is displayed as Yes in the command output Run the display cfm ma md md2 ma ma2 command on CE1 The value of the Suppressing Alarms field is displayed as Yes in the command output PE1 display cfm ma md md1 ma ma1 The total number of MAs is 1 MD Name md1 MD Name Format string Level 3 MIP Create type none SenderID TLV type Defer M...

Page 920: ...type dot1q 10 mpls l2vc 3 3 3 3 100 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 252 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 3 cfm md md1 level 3 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 100 tagged mep mep id 31 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send enable remote mep mep id 32...

Page 921: ... 0 0 3 network 10 2 1 0 0 0 0 3 return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls l2vpn default martini mpls ldp mpls ldp remote peer 1 1 1 1 remote ip 1 1 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 10 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 100 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip add...

Page 922: ...0 1 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 10 cfm md md2 level 6 ma ma2 map mpls vlan 10 mep mep id 61 interface gigabitEthernet1 0 1 outward ccm interval 10000 mep ccm send enable remote mep mep id 62 remote mep ccm receive enable ais enable ais suppress alarm return l Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown p...

Page 923: ...etwork shown in Figure 8 77 priority mappings based on simple traffic classification help a PE to map a traffic priority on one type of network to that on another type of network This enables traffic to be transmitted on another type of network based on the previous priority or the priority configured by users After receiving packets a PE maps external priorities to internal priorities The interna...

Page 924: ...or information on configurations see the configuration files NOTE Apply a traffic policy to the sub interfaces connected to AC links on PE1 and PE2 An interface can be bound to a DS domain but cannot perform 802 1p based simple traffic classification The interface bound to the DS domain only maps IP DSCP values to QoS CoS values and colors Table 8 72 lists mappings from 802 1p priority values to C...

Page 925: ...olors For the configuration procedure see Configuring Priority Mapping for MPLS Packets in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide QoS For information about configurations see the configuration files NOTE Bind the PW side interface to a DS domain and enable simple traffic classification on PE1 and PE2 Table 8 74 lists mappings from EXP field values to CoS values in MPLS packets sent...

Page 926: ...Step 3 Configure a VLL connection Configure a VLL connection between PE1 and PE2 The configuration details are not provided here For details see the chapter VLL Configuration in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN or configuration files in this configuration example After completing the configuration run the display mpls l2vc command on each PE to view information about the ...

Page 927: ...D named md1 and an MA named ma1 and bind the MA to the VLL Configure PE1 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE1 PE1 cfm enable PE1 cfm version standard PE1 cfm md md1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged PE1 md md1 ma ma1 mep mep id 1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 1 inward PE1 md md1 ma ma1 remote mep mep id 2 PE1 md md1 ma ma1 mep ccm send mep id 1 enable PE1 md md1 ma ma1 r...

Page 928: ...0 0000 30 75 0000 7 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 8 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 9 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 10 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 11 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 12 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 13 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 14 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 15 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 16 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 17 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 18 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 19 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 20 20 50 0000 30 75 0000 End Configuration Files l Configura...

Page 929: ...0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp trust upstream PW interface LoopBack0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 inward mep ccm send mep id 1 enable remote mep mep id 2 remote mep ccm receive mep id 2 enable loss mea...

Page 930: ...en map 6 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 1 vlan type dot1q 2 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 2 trust upstream AC trust 8021p interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp trust upstream PW interface LoopBack0 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 net...

Page 931: ...k of a section on an LSP 9 3 Configuring MPLS TP OAM for an LSP MPLS TP OAM configured on the NE80E 40E can monitor bidirectional LSPs 9 4 Configuring MPLS TP OAM for a PW MPLS TP OAM configured on the NE80E 40E can check a PW built over a bidirectional LSP 9 5 Configuring MPLS TP OAM on an L2 L3 Network The NE80E 40E can use MPLS TP OAM to monitor an L2 L3 IP network 9 6 Maintaining MPLS TP OAM T...

Page 932: ...nts because its functions can be used on both traditional transport networks and next generation transport networks that are capable to process packets Since traditional transport networks for example SDH or OTN networks set high benchmarks for reliability and maintenance MPLS TP needs to provide powerful OAM capabilities MPLS TP OAM provides the following functions l Fault management l Performanc...

Page 933: ...ss LER LSP Maintenance End Point Maintenance Intermediate Point On a bidirectional LSP only LERs can serve as MEPs In Figure 9 1 the ingress LER and egress LER are MEPs On an MPLS TP PW only UPEs can serve as MEPs MEPs trigger and control MPLS TP OAM operations OAM packets can be generated or terminated on MEPs 9 1 2 MPLS TP OAM Features Supported by the NE80E 40E MPLS TP OAM provides the performa...

Page 934: ...nk of a section on an LSP 9 2 1 Before You Start MPLS TP OAM can be used to monitor the link of a section on an LSP Before configuring the MPLS TP OAM monitoring function familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the data required for the configuration Applicable Environment MPLS TP has been widely used on transport networks Since traditional tran...

Page 935: ...l be directly displayed on a terminal CV checks whether CC CV configurations on the two ends of a section are consistent and will report alarms if any inconsistency is detected Delay and delay jitter measurement DM detects delay and delay jitters about a section Pre configuration Tasks Before configuring MPLS TP OAM for a section complete the following task l Setting up the sections on an LSP Data...

Page 936: ...for the section must be bound to the section before MPLS TP OAM is configured Perform the following steps on the MEP and RMEP Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run mpls tp mode standard private Specifies an MPLS TP OAM detection mode The default mode is standard OAM detection Step 3 Run mpls tp meg meg name A MEG is created and the MEG view is displayed Step 4 Ru...

Page 937: ...ror Transport networks have strict requirements on data forwarding correctness In addition MPLS TP requires that the data plane be able to work without IP support which means that packet forwarding is based on label switching only Therefore the correctness of label based forwarding must be guaranteed In real world situations CC and CV are usually used together Therefore these two functions are int...

Page 938: ...P 3 On the MEP run cc receive enable Receiving CC CV packets is enabled on the MEP 4 On the RMEP run cc receive enable Receiving CC CV packets is enabled on the RMEP End 9 2 4 Optional Configuring LB for Sections on an LSP LB is the most common tool used to detect connectivity of MPLS TP links Context LB is used to monitor the connectivity between a MEP and its RMEP Unlike CC or CV that is perform...

Page 939: ... to point ME a MEP sends Delay Measurement Messages DMMs to its RMEP and receives Delay Measurement Replies DMRs from the RMEP to perform two way frame DM The differences between one way and two way frame DM functions are listed in Table 9 4 Differences between one way and two way frame DM functions Item One way Frame DM Two way Frame DM Statistic s display Running the display mpls tp oam meg meg ...

Page 940: ...from the RMEP to the MEP Run the delay measure one way proactive interval interval value exp exp value command on the MEP to enable one way proactive frame DM Run the delay measure one way proactive receive enable command on the RMEP to enable the RMEP to receive DM packets from the MEP Run either of the following commands to view statistics about one way proactive frame DM as needed If the delay ...

Page 941: ...rk management system NMS run the undo rdi disable command on an MEP to enable RDI Perform the following steps on an MEP Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run mpls tp meg meg name A maintenance entity group MEG is created and the MEG view is displayed Step 3 Optional Run undo rdi disable RDI is enabled By default RDI is enabled To disable the MEP from reporting an...

Page 942: ...1 24 17 31 15 320 test YES Run the display mpls tp oam me command to view ME information about the MEG HUAWEI display mpls tp oam me brief ME Index MEG Name Type Mep Id R mep Id State 0 2 ass lsp 3 INIT 1 2 ass lsp 4 INIT 2 co te 1 2 INIT Total MEG number 3 Total ME number 3 State Statistics 3 init 0 up 0 down Run the display mpls tp oam meg command to view MEG information on the device HUAWEI dis...

Page 943: ... delay variation 0 The delay average 4294842296 The delay variation average 7368 The total number of the record is 20 Run the display mpls tp oam meg meg name statistic type command to view dual ended packet loss statistics obtained using MPLS TP OAM HUAWEI display mpls tp oam meg test statistic type lost measure dual ended Dual end loss measurement statistics Index Near end lost frames Loss ratio...

Page 944: ...transit LERs are MIPs MPLS TP OAM runs on the MEPs and MIPs and provide the functions listed in Table 9 5 Figure 9 4 Networking diagram for a bidirectional LSP Ingress LER Transit LER Transit LER Egress LER LSP Maintenance End Point Maintenance Intermediate Point Table 9 5 MPLS TP OAM functions supported by the NE80E 40E Function Application Scenario Configuration Procedure Fault management Connec...

Page 945: ...atistics function on the LSP interfaces Data Preparation To configure MPLS TP OAM for an LSP you need the following data No Data 1 MEG name 2 Name of the tunnel interface bound to the ME 3 Optional Interval of Continuity Check Message CCM transmissions and priority of CCMs 4 Optional Interval and number of loss measurement message LMM transmissions and priority of LMMs 4 Optional Interval and numb...

Page 946: ...es two MEPs at the ingress and egress nodes of the LSP l Static bidirectional associated LSP composed of two static unidirectional CR LSPs that are configured between the source and destination ends On the source and destination ends the first node of one tunnel is bound to the end node of the other tunnel forming a dynamic bidirectional associated LSP The dynamic bidirectional associated LSP can ...

Page 947: ...eives unexpected packets For example if a CV enabled device receives a packet from an LSP and finds that this packet is mistakenly transmitted by the LSP the device will report an alarm indicating a forwarding error Transport networks have strict requirements on data forwarding correctness In addition MPLS TP requires that the data plane be able to work without IP support which means that packet f...

Page 948: ...nt MEPs from generating alarms mistakenly during enabling process 1 On the MEP run cc send enable Sending CC CV packets is enabled on the MEP 2 On the RMEP run cc send enable Sending CC CV packets is enabled on the RMEP 3 On the MEP run cc receive enable Receiving CC CV packets is enabled on the MEP 4 On the RMEP run cc receive enable Receiving CC CV packets is enabled on the RMEP End 9 3 4 Option...

Page 949: ...s indicates the number and percentage of dropped packets that are sent from a MEP to an RMEP The NE80E 40E supports two LM functions namely single ended LM dual ended LM The differences between them are listed in Table 9 6 Differences between single ended LM and dual ended LM Item Single Ended LM Dual Ended LM Statistic s display Statistics can be displayed by running either of the following comma...

Page 950: ...d2 value sd2 continuous period period length sd2 period period value sd2 count sd2 count value command to set an alarm threshold for single ended frame LM When the number of dropped frames reaches or exceeds the alarm threshold an alarm is generated and an automatic protection switching APS switchover is triggered Optional Run the lost measure single ended loss ratio revertive period revertive per...

Page 951: ...sure dual ended enable command to enable dual ended frame LM End 9 3 6 Optional Configuring DM for an LSP This section describes how to configure one way and two way delay and delay jitter measurement DM to collect reliability statistics of a bidirectional LSP Context DM is another performance monitoring function provided by MPLS TP Based on delay information delay variation jitter can be known At...

Page 952: ...cified Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run mpls tp meg meg name The MEG view is displayed Step 3 Select one of the following sub procedures as needed l Configure one way frame DM Run any of the following commands Run the delay measure one way interval interval value count count value exp exp value command to enable one way on demand frame DM Run either of the f...

Page 953: ...ther two way on demand or proactive frame DM as follows Run the delay measure two way interval interval value count count value exp exp value two time stamp command to enable two way on demand frame DM Run the delay measure two way proactive interval interval value exp exp value two time stamp command to enable two way proactive frame DM End 9 3 7 Checking the Configurations After configuring MPLS...

Page 954: ...eive enable cc interval 1000 cc exp 7 ais enable ais interval 60000 ais exp 0 lm single end receive disable lm dual end enable lm dual end SD1 threshold 1 lm dual end SD2 threshold 10 ME 1 index 0 direction dual mep id 8191 remote mep id 8191 status board 1 service type te cr static lsp tunnel name Tunnel1 0 0 lsp name state UP alarm indicate SD1 NEAR SD1 FAR SD2 NEAR SD2 FAR Run the display mpls ...

Page 955: ...50 Average far end lost frames 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 9 4 Configuring MPLS TP OAM for a PW MPLS TP OAM configured on the NE80E 40E can check a PW built over a bidirectional LSP 9 4 1 Before You Start MPLS TP OAM can be configured to monitor PWs Before you configure MPLS TP OAM PWs to be monitored must be set up Before configuring the MPLS TP OAM monitoring function familiarize yourself with the...

Page 956: ...ults will be displayed on a terminal Connectivity Verification CV checks whether CC configurations on the ingress LER and egress LER of a PW are consistent and will report alarms if any inconsistency is detected Performance statistics Packet loss statistics Loss Measurement LM checks statistics about packets dropped between the ingress LER and egress LER of a PW built over a bidirectional LSP Dela...

Page 957: ... a PW This section describes how to create an ME and bind it to a single segment or multi segment PWE3 PW Context If a transport path is a PW built over a bidirectional LSP an ME created for the path must be bound to the PW before MPLS TP OAM is configured Perform the following steps on the MEP and RMEP Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run mpls tp mode standard ...

Page 958: ... an ME bind the ME to the same PWE3 MS PW and specify the peer IP address of the RMEP on the MS PW Run the me mip switch l2vc peer ip vc id between switch peer ip switch vc id vc type vc type command on the MIP to create an ME and bind the ME to the switch node on the MS PW The procedure for binding an ME to a multi segment PW by specifying ttl is as follows Run the me l2vc peer ip peer ip vc id v...

Page 959: ...warding correctness In addition MPLS TP requires that the data plane be able to work without IP support which means that packet forwarding is based on label switching only Therefore the correctness of label based forwarding must be guaranteed Perform the following steps on the MEP and RMEP Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run mpls tp meg meg name The MEG view is...

Page 960: ...s is enabled on the MEP 4 On the RMEP run cc receive enable Receiving CC CV packets is enabled on the RMEP End 9 4 4 Optional Configuring LB to Be Performed at a Specified Time for a PW LB is the most common tool used to detect connectivity of MPLS TP links Context LB can monitor the connectivity between two MEPs or between a MEP and a MIP Unlike CC or CV that is performed periodically LB is perfo...

Page 961: ...ercentage of dropped frames that are sent from a MEP to an RMEP The NE80E 40E supports both single ended and dual ended frame LM functions The differences between them are listed in Table 9 9 Differences between single ended and dual ended frame LM functions Item Single ended Frame LM Dual ended Frame LM Statistic s display Statistics can be displayed by running either of the following commands on...

Page 962: ...m threshold for single ended frame LM When the number of dropped frames reaches or exceeds the alarm threshold an alarm is generated and an automatic protection switching APS switchover is triggered 4 Optional Run the lost measure single ended loss ratio revertive period revertive period value command to set a threshold for an APS switchback When the number of times that the number of dropped fram...

Page 963: ...nt DM to collect reliability statistics of a pseudo wire PW built over a bidirectional label switched path LSP Context Frame DM is a performance monitoring function provided by multiprotocol label switching transport profile MPLS TP Delay variation jitter can be calculated based on delay information Two DM modes are supported l One way frame DM In a point to point maintenance entity ME a maintenan...

Page 964: ...ocedure for configuring one way and two way frame DM is as follows NOTE All the steps must be performed on both the MEP and RMEP unless otherwise specified Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run mpls tp meg meg name The maintenance entity group MEG view is displayed Step 3 Select one of the following sub procedures as needed l Configure one way frame DM Configure ...

Page 965: ... to view statistics about one way proactive frame DM in the direction from the RMEP to the MEP l Configure two way frame DM Configure either two way on demand or proactive frame DM as follows Run the delay measure two way interval interval value count count value exp exp value two time stamp command to enable two way on demand frame DM Run the delay measure two way proactive interval interval valu...

Page 966: ...mand to check MEG information on the device l Run the display mpls tp oam meg meg name statistic type command to check MPLS TP OAM performance statistics End Example Run the display mpls tp oam current alarm command to view alarm information about a MEG HUAWEI display mpls tp oam current alarm meg test Alarm Name ab Start Time Meg Name Sended SD1 near end SD1 NEAR 2011 01 24 10 24 41 410 test YES ...

Page 967: ...rd 1 Service Type vll pw Peer IP 3 3 3 3 Remote Peer IP VC ID 80004 VC Type VLAN TTL 1 State UP local state far end available near end available Alarm Indicate no alarm Run the display mpls tp oam meg meg name statistic type command to view one way delay statistics obtained using MPLS TP OAM HUAWEI display mpls tp oam meg test statistic type delay measure one way One way delay measure statistics I...

Page 968: ...mes 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 Max far end lost frames 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 Min far end lost frames 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 Average far end lost frames 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 9 5 Configuring MPLS TP OAM on an L2 L3 Network The NE80E 40E can use MPLS TP OAM to monitor an L2 L3 IP network 9 5 1 Before You Start MPLS TP OAM can be configured to monitor L2 L3 networks Usage Scenario MPLS TP O...

Page 969: ...nformation about each node on a path between a MEP and a MIP or between MEPs The information obtained can be used to locate node or link faults LT monitors the path along which packets are forwarded on the L2 L3 network between UPE1 and PE1 or help locate link faults if any In the reply mode monitoring results will be displayed on the device while no replay mode on an NMS Pre configuration Tasks B...

Page 970: ...ce has been configured Procedure l Configure an ME instance on the L2VPN side MEP 1 Run system view The system view is displayed 2 Run mpls tp meg meg name A MEG is created and the MEG view is displayed 3 Run me ip mep id mepid value interface interface type interface number l2uni source ip source ip netgate mac netgate mac value An ME instance is configured l Configure an ME instance on the L3VPN...

Page 971: ...nfiguring LT on an L2 L3 Network LT helps locate node or link faults on L2 L3 networks Context An LT test obtains information about each node on a path between a MEP and a MIP or between MEPs The information obtained can be used to locate node or link faults Procedure l Run the following command on the L2VPN L3VPN side MEP tracert ip meg meg name peer ip peer ip exp exp velue mode no reply reply p...

Page 972: ...play mpls tp oam meg test MEG test MEG Name test MEG Level 7 ME Count 1 CC Send disable CC Receive disable CC Interval 1000 CC Exp 7 RDI enable AIS disable AIS Interval 1000 AIS Exp 7 Lock disable Lock Interval 1000 Lock Exp 7 CSF disable CSF Interval 1000 CSF Exp 7 LM Single end Receive disable LM Single end Proactive disable LM Single end SD1 999999 LM Single end SD2 1000000 LM Ring SD1 Threshol...

Page 973: ...taining MPLS TP OAM This section describes how to clear MPLS TP OAM statistics and detect the MPLS TP OAM status by maintaining MPLS TP OAM 9 6 1 Clearing MPLS TP OAM Statistics Deleting preceding MPLS TP OAM statistics before you enable MPLS TP OAM is recommended Context NOTICE MPLS TP OAM statistics cannot be restored after being deleted Exercise caution when using the command Procedure l Run th...

Page 974: ...le l Run the display mpls tp oam current alarm meg meg name command in any view to check alarms about a MEG l Run the ddisplay mpls tp oam default parameter command in any view to check default MPLS TP OAM parameters End 9 7 Configuration Examples This section describes the typical application scenarios of MPLS TP OAM networking requirements configuration roadmap and data preparation and provides ...

Page 975: ...irements on data forwarding correctness In addition MPLS TP requires that the data plane be able to work without IP support which means that packet forwarding is based on label switching only Therefore the correctness of label based forwarding must be guaranteed Figure 9 7 Networking diagram for a bidirectional LSP LSRA LSRB LSRC Loopback1 1 1 1 1 32 Loopback1 2 2 2 2 32 Loopback1 3 3 3 3 32 POS1 ...

Page 976: ...ission interval to 100 ms and the priority of CCMs to 6 on LSRA LSRA mpls tp meg test cc interval 100 LSRA mpls tp meg test cc exp 6 Set the CCM transmission interval to 100 ms and the priority of CCMs to 6 on LSRC LSRC mpls tp meg test cc interval 100 LSRC mpls tp meg test cc exp 6 Step 4 Enable CC and CV Enable CC and CV on LSRA LSRA mpls tp meg test cc send enable LSRA mpls tp meg test cc recei...

Page 977: ...e bandwidth bc0 100000 interface LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 3 3 3 3 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te bidirectional mpls te commit ip route static 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 ip route static 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 mpls tp meg test me te in...

Page 978: ... 1 2 return l Configuration file of LSRC sysname LSRC mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te bidirectional static cr lsp egress lsp1 forward in label 40 lsrid 1 1 1 1 tunnel id 100 backward nexthop 3 2 1 1 out label 16 bandwidth ct0 10000 interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 3 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 interface...

Page 979: ...he following items l Reachability of the REMP l Round trip delay in communication between the MEP and RMEP l Loss of ping packets between the MEP and RMEP NOTE LB counts only the ping packets that are lost after being sent out providing a rough packet loss ratio of the link between MEPs The LM function can be used to obtain the accurate packet loss ratio of the link between MEPs Figure 9 8 Network...

Page 980: ...e LSRC LSRC mpls tp meg test LSRC mpls tp meg test me te interface tunnel 2 0 0 mep id 2 remote mep id 1 Step 3 Enable LB NOTE LB can be used to detect the connectivity between a MEP and its RMEP or a MIP In this example LB is used to detect the connectivity between LSRA and LSRC Enable LB on LSRA LSRA ping meg test PING test 9 data bytes press CTRL_C to break Reply from test bytes 9 Sequence 1 ti...

Page 981: ... Configuration file of LSRB sysname LSRB mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls te bidirectional static cr lsp transit lsp1 forward in label 20 nexthop 3 2 1 2 out label 40 bandwidth ct0 10000 backward in label 16 nexthop 2 1 1 1 out label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000 interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 2 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth...

Page 982: ...tional LSP LM needs to be configured to monitor packet loss ratios between LSRs and provide performance statistics about the MPLS TP network Networking Requirements As a connection oriented packet switching technology MPLS TP is designed to convert a transport network from circuit switching to packet switching The conversion aims to increase the transmission rate on the transport network Link reli...

Page 983: ...OS1 0 0 2 1 1 1 24 POS1 0 0 2 1 1 2 24 POS2 0 0 3 2 1 1 24 POS1 0 0 3 2 1 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Create an ME and bind it to a bidirectional LSP 2 Enable CC on the MEP and RMEP 3 Configure an alarm threshold for packet loss measurement 4 Enable dual ended LM Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l MEG name l Name of...

Page 984: ...measure dual ended loss ratio threshold1 50 Step 5 Enable dual ended LM Enable dual ended LM on LSRA LSRA mpls tp meg test lost measure dual ended enable LSRA mpls tp meg test return Enable dual ended LM on LSRC LSRC mpls tp meg test lost measure dual ended enable LSRC mpls tp meg test return Step 6 Verify the configuration Run the display mpls tp oam command on LSRA to view statistics about packe...

Page 985: ...2 mpls tp meg test me te interface Tunnel1 0 0 mep id 1 remote mep id 2 cc send enable cc receive enable return l Configuration file of LSRB sysname LSRB mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls te bidirectional static cr lsp transit lsp1 forward in label 20 nexthop 3 2 1 2 out label 40 bandwidth ct0 10000 backward in label 16 nexthop 2 1 1 1 out label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000 interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown ...

Page 986: ...s te binding bidirectional static cr lsp egress lsp1 mpls te commit ip route static 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 3 2 1 1 ip route static 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 3 2 1 1 mpls tp meg test me te interface Tunnel2 0 0 mep id 2 remote mep id 1 cc send enable cc receive enable return 9 7 4 Example for Configuring DM for an LSP LSRs are connected using a bidirectional LSP DM including delay and delay jitter m...

Page 987: ... one way DM is the same as that of two way DM except the configuration for querying packet loss statistics As shown in Figure 9 10 LSRA LSRB and LSRC are connected using a bidirectional LSP Deploy the following items to guarantee the connectivity between LSRA and LSRC l LSRA and LSRC serve as MEPs l LSRB serves as a MIP Figure 9 10 Networking diagram for a bidirectional LSP LSRA LSRB LSRC Loopback...

Page 988: ...est cc receive enable Enable CC on LSRC LSRC mpls tp meg test cc send enable LSRC mpls tp meg test cc receive enable Step 4 Enable two way DM LSRA mpls tp meg test delay measure two way Two way delay measure statistics delay us delay variation us 182 182 0 182 0 183 1 182 1 The Max delay 183 The Max delay variation 1 The Min delay 182 The Min delay variation 0 The delay average 182 The delay varia...

Page 989: ...ackward in label 16 nexthop 2 1 1 1 out label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000 interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 2 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 interface Pos2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 3 2 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 interface LoopB...

Page 990: ...sing a PW built over a bidirectional LSP The following deployment is performed to guarantee the connectivity and correct packet forwarding between PE1 and PE3 l PE1 and PE3 serve as MEPs l PE2 serves as a MIP Configure CC and CV on the MEPs l CC is a pro active OAM operation It detects connectivity between the two MEPs of a bidirectional LSP in a MEG A MEP sends CCMs to its RMEP at intervals If th...

Page 991: ...d the following data l MEG name l ID of the VC bound to the ME l Interval between CCM transmissions and priority of CCMs Procedure Step 1 Set up a PW over a bidirectional LSP For details about how to set up a PW between LSRs based on a bidirectional LSP see see Configuring a PW in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configur...

Page 992: ...t meg level 7 me count 1 cc send enable cc receive enable cc interval 1000 cc exp 7 ais disable ais interval 1000 ais exp 7 lock disable lock interval 1000 lock exp 7 csf disable csf interval 1000 csf exp 7 lm single end receive disable lm single end pro active enable lm single end SD1 threshold 1 lm single end SD2 threshold 10 lm dual end disable ME 1 index 0 direction dual mep id 1 remote mep id...

Page 993: ... address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 2 2 2 2 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te bidirectional mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit ip route static 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 ip route static 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 tunnel policy tpatoc tunnel binding desti...

Page 994: ...5 255 255 255 3 2 1 2 return l Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te mpls l2vpn bidirectional static cr lsp egress lsp1 forward in label 40 lsrid 1 1 1 1 tunnel id 100 backward nexthop 3 2 1 1 out label 16 bandwidth ct0 10000 pw template tpctoa peer address 1 1 1 1 control word tnl policy tpctoa interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 3 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls...

Page 995: ...9 12 PE1 PE2 and PE3 are connected using a PW over a bidirectional LSP The following deployment is performed to guarantee the connectivity and correct packet forwarding between PE1 and PE3 l PE1 and PE3 serve as MEPs l PE2 serves as a MIP LB can be used to check the following items l Reachability of the REMP l Round trip delay in communication between the MEP and RMEP l Loss of ping packets betwee...

Page 996: ...med test on PE3 and bind the ME to the PW HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE3 PE3 mpls tp meg test PE3 mpls tp meg test me l2vc peer ip 1 1 1 1 vc id 30000 vc type vlan mep id 2 remote mep id 1 Step 3 Enable LB NOTE LB can be used to detect the connectivity between a MEP and its RMEP or a MIP In this example LB is used to detect the connectivity between PE1 and PE2 Enable LB on PE1 PE1 ping meg ...

Page 997: ... LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 2 2 2 2 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te bidirectional mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit ip route static 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 ip route static 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 tunnel policy tpatoc tunnel ...

Page 998: ...guration file of PE3 sysname PE3 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te mpls l2vpn bidirectional static cr lsp egress lsp1 forward in label 40 lsrid 1 1 1 1 tunnel id 100 backward nexthop 3 2 1 1 out label 16 bandwidth ct0 10000 pw template tpctoa peer address 1 1 1 1 control word tnl policy tpctoa interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 3 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reser...

Page 999: ...smission rate on the transport network Link reliability must be guaranteed when MPLS TP is used to increase bandwidth usage For example users will not sense change in voice quality if the packet loss ratio on voice links is lower than 10 If the packet loss ratio is higher than 20 voice quality will deteriorate obviously LM can be used to collect packet loss statistics and evaluate link performance...

Page 1000: ...n LSRs based on a bidirectional LSP see see Configuring a PW in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example Step 2 Create an ME and bind it to a PW Create an ME named test on PE1 and bind the ME to the PW HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE1 PE1 mpls tp meg test PE1 mpls tp meg test me l2vc peer ip 3 3 3 3 vc ...

Page 1001: ...et loss ratios PE1 display mpls tp oam meg test statistic type lost measure dual ended Dual end loss measurement statistics Index Near end lost frames Loss ratio Far end lost frames Loss ratio 1 10 12 50 10 12 50 Max near end lost frames 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 Min near end lost frames 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 Average near end lost frames 10 frame loss ratio 12 50 Max far end lost frames 10 fra...

Page 1002: ... te Tunnel1 0 0 mpls tp meg test me l2vc peer ip 3 3 3 3 vc id 30000 vc type vlan mep id 1 remote mep id 2 cc send enable cc receive enable lost measure dual ended enable return l Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls te bidirectional static cr lsp transit lsp1 forward in label 20 nexthop 3 2 1 2 out label 40 bandwidth ct0 10000 backward in label 16 nexthop 2 1 1 1 ou...

Page 1003: ... 101 receive vpn label 101 mpls l2vpn pw traffic statistics enable interface LoopBack1 ip address 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel2 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 1 1 1 1 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 200 mpls te passive tunnel mpls te binding bidirectional static cr lsp egress lsp1 mpls te reserved for binding mpls t...

Page 1004: ...unavailable In addition if the delay jitter is longer than the transmission of a voice packet voice quality will drop greatly DM can be used to collect packet loss statistics and evaluate link performance DM is a performance monitoring function provided by MPLS TP including one way DM and two way DM NOTE The configuration of two way DM is used as an example in this section The configuration of one...

Page 1005: ...an ME named test on PE3 and bind the ME to the PW HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname PE3 PE3 mpls tp meg test PE3 mpls tp meg test me l2vc peer ip 1 1 1 1 vc id 30000 vc type vlan mep id 2 remote mep id 1 Step 3 Enable CC on the MEP and RMEP Enable CC on PE1 PE1 mpls tp meg test cc send enable PE1 mpls tp meg test cc receive enable Enable CC on LSRC PE3 mpls tp meg test cc send enable PE3 mpls tp m...

Page 1006: ... LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 2 2 2 2 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te bidirectional mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit ip route static 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 ip route static 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 2 1 1 2 tunnel policy tpatoc tunnel ...

Page 1007: ...guration file of PE3 sysname PE3 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te mpls l2vpn bidirectional static cr lsp egress lsp1 forward in label 40 lsrid 1 1 1 1 tunnel id 100 backward nexthop 3 2 1 1 out label 16 bandwidth ct0 10000 pw template tpctoa peer address 1 1 1 1 control word tnl policy tpctoa interface Pos1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 3 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reser...

Page 1008: ...teristics l Services between UPE1 and NPE1 are transmitted through static PWs on an L2VPN l Services between NPE1 and PE1 are transmitted through an L3VPN l A VE Group is created on NPE1 to terminate the L2VPN and access the L3VPN l UPE1 and PE1 are MEPs l NPE1 is a MIP Figure 9 15 L2 L3 networking UPE1 NPE1 PE1 Loopback1 1 1 1 1 32 Loopback1 2 2 2 2 32 Loopback1 3 3 3 3 32 GE1 0 1 10 1 1 1 24 GE2...

Page 1009: ...o L3VPN Configuration in the NE80E 40E Configuration Guide VPN or Configuration Files in this section Step 2 Configure an ME instance on the two MEPs Configure ME instance test on UPE1 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname UPE1 UPE1 mpls tp meg test UPE1 mpls tp meg test me ip mep id 3 interface gigabitEthernet1 0 2 2 l2uni source ip 10 1 3 1 netgate mac 4c1f cc4a 08d5 Configure ME instance test on PE...

Page 1010: ... 2 2 vlan type dot1q 2 mpls static l2vc pw template 1 2 transmit vpn label 101 receive vpn label 201 interface LoopBack1 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 isis enable 200 interface Tunnel1 0 1 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 2 2 2 2 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 1001 mpls te bidirectional mpls te reserved for binding mpls te comm...

Page 1011: ...is 200 graceful restart is level level 2 cost style wide compatible network entity 01 0000 0000 0000 0006 00 traffic eng level 2 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 isis enable 200 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls ldp undo dcn interface GigabitEthernet2 0 3 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 1 255 255 255 0 isis enable 200 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls ldp un...

Page 1012: ...ce Tunnel2 0 2 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 3 3 3 3 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 1002 mpls te bidirectional mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit arp static 10 1 3 1 fc48 ef2b dee8 vid 1 interface Virtual Ethernet2 0 2 1 ip route static vpn instance vpn 30 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 static vpn peer 3 3 3 3 preference 1 tunnel p...

Page 1013: ...erface Tunnel3 0 2 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 2 2 2 2 mpls te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 1002 mpls te passive tunnel mpls te binding bidirectional static cr lsp egress Tunnel3 0 2 mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit ip route static vpn instance vpn 40 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 static vpn peer 2 2 2 2 preference 1 ip route static...

Page 1014: ...rror triggered section switching 10 6 Configuring Bit Error Triggered RSVP TE Tunnel Switching This section describes how to configure bit error triggered Resource Reservation Protocol Traffic Engineering RSVP TE tunnel switching 10 7 Configuring Bit Error Triggered Switching for PW Redundancy This section describes how to configure bit error triggered switching for pseudo wire PW Redundancy 10 8 ...

Page 1015: ... consists of the networking requirements configuration roadmap configuration procedures and configuration files HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Switching Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 998 ...

Page 1016: ...ncreasingly widely used When IP RANs carry broadband services they have higher reliability requirements than traditional bearer networks Traditional fault detection mechanisms cannot trigger protection switching based on random bit errors As a result in extreme cases bit errors may degrade or even interrupt services on an IP RAN To solve this problem configure bit error triggered protection switch...

Page 1017: ...BER which helps prevent packet loss This function is independen tly deployed Associati on between bit errors and static routes An association between bit errors and static routes can be configured in a native IP L3VPN scenario to prevent service interruptions on native IP links This function sets a static route for a link with bit errors to inactive so that traffic switches to a bit error free sta...

Page 1018: ...outes familiarize yourself with the usage scenario complete the pre configuration tasks and obtain the data required for the configuration Usage Scenario To minimize the impact of LDP LSP bit errors on services a device can be configured to set an interface to Down when bit errors occur so as to trigger route convergence and a primary backup LDP LSP switchover However if bit errors occur on both t...

Page 1019: ... the deviation between a bit that is sent and the bit that is received The bit error rate BER refers to the number of bit errors divided by the total number of bits transferred during a studied time interval During data transmission a high BER will degrade or even interrupt services in extreme cases To prevent this problem configure IS IS interfaces to automatically adjust link costs based on link...

Page 1020: ...wide compatible l If the link quality changes from low to good the orginal link cost applies End 10 2 3 Configuring an OSPF Interface to Automatically Adjust the Link Cost Configuring an OSPF interface to automatically adjust the link cost based on link quality facilitates route selection control and improves network reliability Context A bit error refers to the deviation between a bit that is sen...

Page 1021: ...Checking the Configurations After configuring the association between bit errors and IGP routes check the link quality information of the current interface or check the link quality information of all IS IS or OSPF interfaces and whether the link costs have been adjusted based on link quality Prerequisites The association between bit errors and IGP routes has been configured Procedure l Run the di...

Page 1022: ...ection switching The switching type can be Trigger section applies to the scenarios where Label Distribution Protocol LDP label switched paths LSPs are used Because each LDP LSP carries multiple services you cannot implement refined control over the services by switching a specified LDP LSP To deploy bit error triggered LDP LSP switching configure bit error detection on the interfaces along the de...

Page 1023: ...POS interface a high speed Ethernet interface an Ethernet sub interface or a common VLAN sub interface the interface cannot be a low speed interface such as an E1 T1 interface an E3 T3 interface a serial interface or an ATM interface 3 Run trap threshold crc error packet error ratio alarm threshold coefficient value power value resume threshold coefficient value power value trigger lsp trigger sec...

Page 1024: ... number of member interfaces in the Up state falls below the configured lower threshold Pre configuration Tasks Before configuring bit error triggered trunk update complete the following tasks l Enabling Interface based Bit Error Detection l Enable Bidirectional Forwarding Detection BFD globally Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run either of the following comman...

Page 1025: ...igabitEthernet1 0 0 DOWN 1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 UP 1 The Number of Ports in Trunk 2 The Number of UP Ports in Trunk 1 HUAWEI display interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 current state UP ifindex 6 Line protocol current state DOWN bit error detection down Description Route Port The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 IP Sending Frames Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 38c9 2111...

Page 1026: ... status to Down and triggers route convergence which in turn triggers LDP LSP switching Pre configuration Tasks Before configuring bit error triggered section switching complete the following tasks l Enable Bidirectional Forwarding Detection BFD globally l Enabling Interface based Bit Error Detection Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface interface type ...

Page 1027: ...t is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 38c9 2111 0014 Loopback none LAN full duplex mode Pause Flowcontrol Receive Enable and Send Enable Last physical up time 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Last physical down time 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Current system time 2013 01 26 11 42 36 Statistics last cleared 2013 01 16 10 21 54 Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits se...

Page 1028: ...nfiguring bit error triggered RSVP TE tunnel switching complete the following tasks l Configure two unidirectional RSVP TE tunnels in opposite directions NOTICE The label advertise non null command must be configured to enable each egress to allocate a label to the penultimate hop l Configure a TE hot standby CR LSP for each RSVP TE tunnel for details see Configuring CR LSP Backup l Enable Bidirec...

Page 1029: ...eter specifies the revertive switching coefficient and the resume pow parameter specifies the revertive switching power The formula for calculating the threshold for bit error triggered revertive switching is similar to the formula for calculating the threshold for bit error triggered protection switching NOTE The threshold for bit error triggered revertive switching must be lower than or equal to...

Page 1030: ...dress 127 0 0 1 Destination Port 3784 TOS EXP 7 PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 LSP Information Ingress LSR ID 1 1 1 1 Tunnel ID 100 LSP ID 32770 Tunnel Interface Tunnel1 0 0 In Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Out Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 LSP token 0x800802 LSP Type Backup Total Session Number 2 Run the display mpls te tunnel bit error detection command The command output shows the bit err...

Page 1031: ...carrying the secondary PW is in the normalized BER state traffic switches to the secondary PW l If the RSVP TE tunnel carrying the primary PW enters the normalized BER state traffic switches back to the primary PW l If the RSVP TE tunnels carrying the primary and secondary PWs are both in the excessive BER state traffic travels along the primary PW NOTE The bit error status of the RSVP TE tunnel c...

Page 1032: ...w is displayed b Run mpls switch l2vc ip address vc id between ip address vc id encapsulation encapsulation type bit error detection Bit error triggered protection switching is enabled on the SPE End Checking the Configurations After configuring bit error triggered switching for PW redundancy run the following commands to check the configurations l Run the display bfd bit error detection session a...

Page 1033: ...Address 1 1 1 1 Destination IP Address 127 0 0 1 Destination Port 3784 TOS EXP 7 PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 LSP Information Ingress LSR ID 1 1 1 1 Tunnel ID 200 LSP ID 2 Tunnel Interface Tunnel1 0 2 In Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Out Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 LSP token 0x80080a LSP Type Primary Total Session Number 2 l If a bit error event occurs and bit error triggered RSVP TE tun...

Page 1034: ...lue 1 link state up local VC MTU 1500 remote VC MTU 1500 local VCCV cw alert ttl lsp ping bfd remote VCCV cw alert ttl lsp ping bfd tunnel policy name policy1 PW template name primary or secondary primary load balance type flow Access port false Switchover Flag false VC tunnel token info 1 tunnels tokens NO 0 TNL type cr lsp TNL ID 0x800803 Backup TNL type lsp TNL ID 0x0 create time 4 days 0 hours...

Page 1035: ...al VC MTU 1500 remote VC MTU 1500 local VCCV cw alert ttl lsp ping bfd remote VCCV cw alert ttl lsp ping bfd tunnel policy name policy1 PW template name primary or secondary secondary load balance type flow Access port false VC tunnel token info 1 tunnels tokens NO 0 TNL type cr lsp TNL ID 0x800805 Backup TNL type lsp TNL ID 0x0 create time 4 days 0 hours 55 minutes 12 seconds up time 0 days 1 hou...

Page 1036: ...tection carries Layer 3 virtual private network L3VPN services VPN FRR is configured on the user end provider edge UPE If the primary and backup CR LSPs of the RSVP TE tunnel are both in the excessive BER state or the TE hot standby CR LSP fails bit error triggered RSVP TE tunnel switching cannot protect traffic against bit errors To resolve this problem configure bit error triggered VPN route swi...

Page 1037: ...pnv4 The BGP VPNv4 address family view is displayed 4 Run nexthop recursive lookup bit error detection med med adjust value local preference localpref adjust value route policy route policy name The function is configured to adjust local preference or MED values of the VPN routes to be advertised when a bit error event occurs End Checking the Configurations After configuring bit error triggered VP...

Page 1038: ...Session MIndex 257 Session Type PE FSM Board Id 1 Fault Type Min Tx Interval ms 1000 Max Tx Interval ms 30000 Actual Tx Interval ms 30000 Detect Multi 3 Source IP Address 1 1 1 1 Destination IP Address 127 0 0 1 Destination Port 3784 TOS EXP 7 PDT Index FSM 0 RCV 0 IF 0 TOKEN 0 LSP Information Ingress LSR ID 1 1 1 1 Tunnel ID 100 LSP ID 32770 Tunnel Interface Tunnel1 0 0 In Interface GigabitEthern...

Page 1039: ... 1 1 AS path Nil origin incomplete MED 0 localpref 100 pref val 0 valid internal backup pre 255 not preferred for nexthop bit error Originator 4 4 4 4 Cluster list 2 2 2 2 Not advertised to any peer yet l If a bit error event occurs on the link between UPE and SPE1 and bit error triggered RSVP TE tunnel switching cannot protect services against bit errors run the display bgp vpnv4 routing table co...

Page 1040: ...error packets exceeds a specified alarm generation threshold the system sends an alarm to the NMS When the number of CRC error packets falls below a specified alarm clearing threshold the system sends a clear alarm to the NMS In this task you can configure thresholds for CRC bit error alarms to be sent to the NMS triggering the alarm function based on CRC link quality on an Ethernet interface in s...

Page 1041: ...ion files 10 10 1 Example for Configuring an Association Between Bit Errors and a Static Route for the Active Link This section provides an example for configuring an association between bit errors and the static route for the active link on a network with static native IP and L3VPN services configured Networking Requirements To improve reliability of a network on which static native IP and L3VPN ...

Page 1042: ...PN backbone PE4 GE1 0 1 10 1 4 1 24 GE1 0 1 10 1 4 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure a static route between PE1 and PE2 and another one between PE3 and PE4 on the VPN backbone network to implement connectivity 2 Configure a bidirectional static LSP between PE1 and PE2 and another one between PE3 and PE4 3 Configure a VPN instance on PE1 PE2 PE3 and PE4 ...

Page 1043: ...uting policy frr_policy that implements FRR for static IP routes and VPN routes configured on PE1 and PE3 Procedure 1 Assign an IP address to each interface Assign an IP address and mask to each interface including a loopback interface on each node according to Figure 10 2 For configuration details see Configuration Files in this section 2 Configure static routes on the VPN backbone network to imp...

Page 1044: ... 10 1 4 1 out label 22 PE3 static lsp egress PE4toPE3 incoming interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 in label 23 Configure PE4 PE4 static lsp ingress PE4toPE3 destination 3 3 3 3 32 nexthop 10 1 4 2 out label 23 PE4 static lsp egress PE3toPE4 incoming interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 in label 22 5 Configure a VPN instance and a label allocation mode to assign static VPN labels to the VPN instance on each P...

Page 1045: ...gure PE3 PE3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 link quality low bit error threshold error ratio 3 4 resume ratio 2 5 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit 8 Configure private network static routes On PE1 configure a private network static route destined for PE3 and associate the static route with bit errors PE1 ip route static vpn instance vpn1 3 3 3 3 32 gigabitethernet1 0 0 10 1 1...

Page 1046: ...l current state UP Last line protocol up time 2013 12 23 17 58 07 UTC 08 00 Link quality grade LOW Description HUAWEI GigabitEthernet1 0 0 Interface Route Port The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Internet Address is 10 1 1 1 24 IP Sending Frames Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 00e0 6e55 8100 Last physical up time 2013 12 23 17 58 07 UTC 08 00 Last physical down time 2013 12 23 17 57 27 ...

Page 1047: ...nk becomes Invalid and that for the standby link becomes Active PE3 display ip routing table vpn instance vpn1 1 1 1 1 verbose Route Flags R relay D download to fib Routing Table vpn1 Summary Count 2 Destination 1 1 1 1 32 Protocol Static Process ID 0 Preference 60 Cost 0 NextHop 10 1 1 1 Neighbour 0 0 0 0 State Invalid Adv Age 00h16m57s Tag 0 Priority medium Label NULL QoSInfo 0x0 IndirectID 0x0 ...

Page 1048: ... 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 1 1 2 bit error detection ip route static vpn instance vpn1 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 static vpn peer 2 2 2 2 preference 70 static lsp ingress PE1toPE2 destination 2 2 2 2 32 nexthop 10 1 2 2 out label 20 static lsp egress PE2toPE1 incoming interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 in label 21 return l PE2 configuration file sysname PE2 ip vpn instance vpn1 vpn ty...

Page 1049: ...hutdown ip address 10 1 4 2 255 255 255 0 mpls interface LoopBack0 ip address 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 route policy frr_policy permit node 10 apply backup nexthop 4 4 4 4 ip route static 4 4 4 4 255 255 255 255 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 10 1 4 1 ip route static vpn instance vpn1 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 1 1 1 bit error detection ip route static vpn instance vpn1 1 1 1 1 255 255 25...

Page 1050: ...bel switched path LSP two commonly used detection mechanisms can quickly trigger a link switchover after detecting a link fault These two mechanisms however cannot detect random packet loss caused by optical fiber aging or optical signal jitter As a result bit errors resulting from optical fiber aging or optical signal jitter may degrade or interrupt services To solve the preceding problem you can...

Page 1051: ... 1 2 24 GE1 0 2 RNC GE1 0 3 RSG2 172 1 3 1 24 Loopback0 2 2 2 2 32 RSG2 GE1 0 1 RNC GE1 0 2 CSG 172 1 2 2 24 GE1 0 3 RSG1 172 1 3 2 24 Loopback0 3 3 3 3 32 RNC GE1 0 1 RSG2 GE1 0 2 RSG1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Switching Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Prop...

Page 1052: ...col IGP type process ID and area ID l Label switching router LSR IDs of the CSG and RSGs l Tunnel interface names tunnel IDs tunnel interface addresses loopback interface addresses and tunnel policy names l Virtual circuit VC IDs of PWs l BFD session names and local and remote BFD discriminators Procedure 1 Configure IP addresses for each PE interface Configure IP addresses for the interfaces acco...

Page 1053: ...ls rsvp te hello RSG1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit RSG1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 3 RSG1 GigabitEthernet1 0 3 mpls RSG1 GigabitEthernet1 0 3 mpls ldp RSG1 GigabitEthernet1 0 3 quit RSG1 ospf 100 RSG1 ospf 100 opaque capability enable RSG1 ospf 100 graceful restart RSG1 ospf 100 area 0 RSG1 ospf 100 area 0 0 0 0 mpls te enable RSG1 ospf 100 area 0 0 0 0 quit RSG1 ospf 100 quit Configure RSG2 RSG2 ...

Page 1054: ...te reserved for binding CSG Tunnel1 0 1 mpls te commit CSG Tunnel1 0 1 quit CSG interface tunnel 1 0 2 CSG Tunnel1 0 2 ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0 CSG Tunnel1 0 2 tunnel protocol mpls te CSG Tunnel1 0 2 destination 3 3 3 3 CSG Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te tunnel id 200 CSG Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te signal protocol rsvp te CSG Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te reserved for binding CSG Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te commit ...

Page 1055: ...le MPLS LDP on the CSG and RSGs and establish remote MPLS LDP sessions between them The RSGs communicate over an LDP LSP and do not require an additional remote LDP session to transmit VC labels Configure the CSG CSG mpls ldp CSG mpls ldp quit CSG mpls ldp remote peer 2 2 2 2 CSG mpls ldp remote 2 2 2 2 remote ip 2 2 2 2 CSG mpls ldp remote 2 2 2 2 quit CSG mpls ldp remote peer 3 3 3 3 CSG mpls ld...

Page 1056: ... Eth Trunk10 1 vlan type dot1q 10 RSG2 Eth Trunk10 1 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 2 tunnel policy policy1 control word RSG2 Eth Trunk10 1 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 2 3 bypass control word RSG2 Eth Trunk10 1 quit 5 Configure primary secondary status negotiation for PWs a Configure Eth Trunk interfaces Configure RSG1 RSG1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 RSG1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown RSG1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 q...

Page 1057: ...ty 100 RSG2 e trunk 10 RSG2 e trunk 10 priority 20 RSG2 e trunk 10 peer address 2 2 2 2 source address 3 3 3 3 RSG2 e trunk 10 quit RSG2 interface eth trunk 10 RSG2 Eth Trunk10 e trunk 10 RSG2 Eth Trunk10 quit Verify the configuration Run the display mpls l2vc command to check the status of the primary and secondary PWs The following example uses the command output on the CSG and RSG1 CSG display ...

Page 1058: ...inutes 54 seconds last change time 0 days 0 hours 44 minutes 54 seconds VC last up time 2012 09 17 02 54 04 VC total up time 0 days 0 hours 44 minutes 54 seconds CKey 7 NKey 1 AdminPw interface AdminPw link state Diffserv Mode uniform Service Class Color DomainId Domain Name client interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 is up Administrator PW no session state up HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configura...

Page 1059: ...y name policy1 PW template name primary or secondary secondary load balance type flow Access port false create time 0 days 0 hours 52 minutes 20 seconds up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds last change time 0 days 0 hours 52 minutes 20 seconds VC last up time 0000 00 00 00 00 00 VC total up time 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds CKey 8 NKey 3 AdminPw interface HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router...

Page 1060: ...n 1 1 1 1 local VC label 1029 remote VC label 1031 control word enable forwarding entry exist local group ID 0 manual fault not set active state active OAM Protocol OAM Status OAM Fault Type PW APS ID 0 PW APS Status TTL Value 1 link state up local VC MTU 1500 remote VC MTU 1500 tunnel policy name HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Swit...

Page 1061: ...state Diffserv Mode uniform Service Class Color DomainId Domain Name client interface Eth Trunk10 1 is up Administrator PW no session state up AC status up Integrative AC status up VC state up Label state 0 Token state 0 VC ID 3 VC type VLAN destination 3 3 3 3 local VC label 1030 remote VC label 1030 control word enable forwarding entry exist local group ID HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configur...

Page 1062: ...7 02 58 26 VC total up time 0 days 0 hours 41 minutes 29 seconds CKey 8 NKey 7 AdminPw interface AdminPw link state Diffserv Mode uniform Service Class Color DomainId Domain Name c Bind the E Trunk to a BFD session Configure RSG1 RSG1 bfd RSG1 bfd quit RSG1 bfd hello bind peer ip 3 3 3 3 source ip 2 2 2 2 RSG1 bfd session hello discriminator local 1005 RSG1 bfd session hello discriminator remote 1...

Page 1063: ...criminator remote 1004 CSG bfd lsp session sessionB commit CSG bfd lsp session sessionB quit Configure RSG1 RSG1 bfd sessionA bind pw interface eth trunk10 1 remote peer 1 1 1 1 pw ttl auto calculate RSG1 bfd lsp session sessionA discriminator local 1002 RSG1 bfd lsp session sessionA discriminator remote 1001 RSG1 bfd lsp session sessionA commit RSG1 bfd lsp session pe2 quit Configure RSG2 RSG2 bf...

Page 1064: ...switching Configure bit error triggered PW switching on the AC interface of the CSG CSG interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 10 CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 2 10 mpls l2vpn pw bit error detection CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 2 10 quit Configure bit error detection to trigger PW switchovers on the AC interface of RSG1 RSG1 interface eth trunk 10 1 RSG1 Eth Trunk10 1 mpls l2vpn pw bit error detection Configure bit e...

Page 1065: ...TOKEN 0 LSP Information Ingress LSR ID 1 1 1 1 Tunnel ID 100 LSP ID 1 Tunnel Interface Tunnel1 0 1 In Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Out Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 LSP token 0x800002 LSP Type Primary BFD Bit Error Information Session MIndex 513 Session Type PE FSM Board Id 1 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Switching Configuration...

Page 1066: ...itEthernet1 0 2 LSP token 0x800004 LSP Type Primary Total Session Number 2 Run the display bfd bit error detection session all command on RSG1 to view BFD bit error information RSG1 display bfd bit error detection session all BFD Bit Error Information Session MIndex 512 Session Type PE FSM Board Id 1 Fault Type Min Tx Interval ms 1000 Max Tx Interval ms HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration...

Page 1067: ...rnet1 0 1 Out Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 LSP token 0x800006 LSP Type Primary Total Session Number 1 Configuration Files l CSG configuration file sysname CSG bfd mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls te label advertise non null mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello mpls te cspf mpls HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Switching Configuration Issue ...

Page 1068: ...etection mpls l2vpn redundancy independent mpls l2vpn stream dual receiving interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 2 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello interface HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 1...

Page 1069: ...200 mpls te bit error detection mpls te reverse lsp protocol rsvp te ingress lsr id 3 3 3 3 tunnel id 200 mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit ospf 100 opaque capability enable graceful restart area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 mpls te enable tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 2 2 2 2 te Tunnel1 0 1 tunnel binding dest...

Page 1070: ...runk system id 00e0 fc00 0000 lacp e trunk priority 100 bfd mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls te label advertise non null mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello mpls te cspf mpls l2vpn mpls ldp mpls ldp remote peer 1 1 1 1 remote ip 1 1 1 1 e trunk 10 priority 10 peer address 3 3 3 3 source address 2 2 2 2 e trunk track bfd session session name hello interface Eth HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration...

Page 1071: ...t1 0 2 undo shutdown eth trunk 10 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 3 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 1 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 1 1 1 1 mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te bit error detection HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliabil...

Page 1072: ...e tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 1 1 1 1 te Tunnel1 0 1 bfd sessionA bind pw interface Eth Trunk10 1 remote peer 1 1 1 1 pw ttl aut calculate discriminator local 1002 discriminator remote 1001 commit return l RSG2 configuration file sysname RSG2 lacp e trunk system id 00e0 fc00 0000 lacp e trunk priority 100 bfd mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Conf...

Page 1073: ...n type dot1q 10 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 2 tunnel policy policy1 control word mpls l2vc 2 2 2 2 3 bypass control word mpls l2vpn pw bit error detection interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown eth trunk 10 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 2 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Prote...

Page 1074: ...id 200 mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit bfd hello bind peer ip 2 2 2 2 source ip 3 3 3 3 discriminator local 1006 discriminator remote 1005 commit ospf 100 opaque capability enable graceful restart area 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 mpls te enable tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 1 1 1 1 te HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E...

Page 1075: ...RSVP TE tunnel switching Networking Requirements In a scenario in which a bidirectional RSVP TE tunnel consisting of a pair of unidirectional tunnels with traffic engineering TE hot standby protection is deployed between two nodes you can configure bit error triggered RSVP TE tunnel switching to protect services against bit errors On the network shown in Figure 10 4 a bidirectional RSVP TE tunnel ...

Page 1076: ...rimary backup CR LSP switchover if the backup CR LSP is in the normalized BER state If the primary and backup CR LSPs are both in the excessive BER state traffic still travels along the primary CR LSP In actual situations configure the thresholds for bit error triggered protection switching and revertive switching based on the sensitivity of services to bit errors Figure 10 4 Networking diagram fo...

Page 1077: ...el of the current unidirectional tunnel NOTICE Before establishing a unidirectional RSVP TE tunnel you must run the label advertise non null command to enable the egress of the unidirectional tunnel to allocate a non null label to the penultimate hop Otherwise bit error triggered RSVP TE tunnel switching cannot take effect Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data ...

Page 1078: ... label advertise non null UPE mpls quit Configure the SPE egress for the unidirectional RSVP TE tunnel from the UPE to the SPE SPE mpls SPE mpls label advertise non null SPE mpls quit 6 Configure explicit paths Configure the UPE UPE explicit path main path UPE explicit path main path next hop 172 1 1 2 UPE explicit path main path next hop 172 1 3 2 UPE explicit path main path quit UPE explicit pat...

Page 1079: ...gered RSVP TE tunnel switching and set the thresholds for bit error triggered protection switching and revertive switching Configure the UPE UPE interface Tunnel1 0 0 UPE Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te bit error detection UPE Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te bit error detection threshold switch 3 4 resume 2 5 Configure the SPE SPE interface Tunnel1 0 0 SPE Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te bit error detection SPE Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te b...

Page 1080: ...e R L Tunnel Name 4 4 4 4 100 1 Primary Start 9e 1 0 Tunnel1 0 0 1 1 1 1 100 1 Primary 9e 1 0 Tunnel1 0 0 1 1 1 1 100 32770 Hot Standby 0 0 Tunnel1 0 0 4 4 4 4 100 32770 Hot Standby Stop 0 0 Tunnel1 0 0 Run the display mpls te hot standby state all command on the UPE and SPE The command output shows the primary backup CR LSP switchover result UPE display mpls te hot standby state all No tunnel nam...

Page 1081: ...r id 4 4 4 4 tunnel id 100 mpls te bfd enable mpls te record route mpls te path explicit path main path mpls te path explicit path hsb path secondary mpls te backup hot standby mpls te commit ospf 100 opaque capability enable area 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 mpls te enable return l Configuration file of P1 sysname P1 bfd mpls lsr id 2 2 2...

Page 1082: ... 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 4 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te interface LoopBack0 ip address 3 3 3 3 255 255 255 255 ospf 100 opaque capability enable area 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 4 0 0 0 0 255 mpls te enable return l Configuration file of the SPE sysname SPE bfd mpls ...

Page 1083: ...reshold switch 3 4 resume 2 5 mpls te reverse lsp protocol rsvp te ingress lsr id 1 1 1 1 tunnel id 100 mpls te bfd enable mpls te record route mpls te path explicit path main path mpls te path explicit path hsb path secondary mpls te backup hot standby mpls te commit ospf 100 opaque capability enable area 0 0 0 0 network 4 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 4 0 0 0 0 255 mpls...

Page 1084: ... In Figure 10 5 the NodeB and radio network controller RNC use bidirectional TE tunnels to carry VPN services The PWs between the cell site gateway CSG and radio network controller site gateways RSGs work in PW redundancy mode A bypass PW is established between RSG1 and RSG2 The combined use of PW redundancy and bypass PW isolates PW side failures from attachment circuit AC side failures BFD for P...

Page 1085: ...d PW switching you must configure a bidirectional RSVP TE tunnel between the CSG and each RSG 3 Configure PWs l Configure a PW between the CSG and each RSG l Configure primary secondary status negotiation for PWs 4 Configure BFD for PW 5 Configure bit error triggered protection switching l Configure bit error triggered RSVP TE tunnel switching l Configure bit error triggered PW switching Data Prep...

Page 1086: ...ls rsvp te hello CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit CSG interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 2 mpls CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 2 mpls te CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 2 mpls rsvp te CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 2 mpls rsvp te hello CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 2 quit CSG ospf 100 CSG ospf 100 opaque capability enable CSG ospf 100 graceful restart CSG ospf 100 area 0 CSG ospf 100 area 0 0 0 0 mpls te enable ...

Page 1087: ...G2 ospf 100 area 0 0 0 0 mpls te enable RSG2 ospf 100 area 0 0 0 0 quit RSG2 ospf 100 quit l Enable the egress of each unidirectional tunnel to assign a label to the penultimate hop NOTE When establishing a unidirectional RSVP TE tunnel enable the egress to assign a label to the penultimate hop Otherwise you cannot configure bit error triggered protection switching Configure the CSG CSG mpls CSG m...

Page 1088: ...or binding RSG2 Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te commit RSG2 Tunnel1 0 2 quit l Configure tunnel policies Configure the CSG CSG tunnel policy policy1 CSG tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 2 2 2 2 te tunnel 1 0 1 CSG tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 3 3 3 3 te tunnel 1 0 2 CSG tunnel policy policy1 quit Configure RSG1 RSG1 tunnel policy policy1 RSG1 tunnel policy policy1 tunnel bi...

Page 1089: ...n type dot1q 10 CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 mpls l2vc 2 2 2 2 1 tunnel policy policy1 control word CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 mpls l2vc 3 3 3 3 2 secondary tunnel policy policy1 control word CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 mpls l2vpn redundancy independent CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 mpls l2vpn stream dual receiving CSG GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 quit Configure RSG1 RSG1 mpls l2vpn RSG1 l2vpn quit RSG1 ...

Page 1090: ...k allow pass vlan 10 RNC Eth Trunk10 trunkport gigabitethernet 1 0 1 to 1 0 2 RNC Eth Trunk10 quit RNC vlan 10 RNC vlan10 quit b Configure an E Trunk and add the preceding Eth Trunks to the E Trunk Configure RSG1 RSG1 lacp e trunk system id 00e0 fc00 0000 RSG1 lacp e trunk priority 100 RSG1 e trunk 10 RSG1 e trunk 10 priority 10 RSG1 e trunk 10 peer address 3 3 3 3 source address 2 2 2 2 RSG1 e tr...

Page 1091: ...AM Status OAM Fault Type PW APS ID 0 PW APS Status TTL Value 1 link state up local VC MTU 1500 remote VC MTU 1500 tunnel policy name policy1 PW template name primary or secondary primary load balance type flow Access port false create time 0 days 0 hours 52 minutes 36 seconds up time 0 days 0 hours 44 minutes 54 seconds last change time 0 days 0 hours 44 minutes 54 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router C...

Page 1092: ...e down Label state 0 Token state 0 VC ID 2 VC type VLAN destination 3 3 3 3 local VC label 1032 remote VC label 1029 control word enable forwarding entry not exist local group ID 0 manual fault not set active state inactive OAM Protocol OAM Status OAM Fault Type PW APS ID 0 PW APS Status TTL Value HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Swit...

Page 1093: ... 3 3 3 3 source ip 2 2 2 2 RSG1 bfd session hello discriminator local 1005 RSG1 bfd session hello discriminator remote 1006 RSG1 bfd session hello commit RSG1 bfd session hello quit RSG1 e trunk 10 RSG1 e trunk 10 e trunk track bfd session session name hello RSG1 e trunk 10 quit Configure RSG2 RSG2 bfd RSG2 bfd quit RSG2 bfd hello bind peer ip 2 2 2 2 source ip 3 3 3 3 RSG2 bfd session hello discr...

Page 1094: ...uto calculate RSG2 bfd lsp session sessionB discriminator local 1004 RSG2 bfd lsp session sessionB discriminator remote 1003 RSG2 bfd lsp session sessionB commit RSG2 bfd lsp session pe2 quit Verify the configuration Run the display bfd session all command on the CSG to view the BFD session status The following example uses the command output on the CSG CSG display bfd session all Local Remote Pee...

Page 1095: ...ce eth trunk 10 1 RSG1 Eth Trunk10 1 mpls l2vpn pw bit error detection Configure bit error detection to trigger PW switchovers on the AC interface of RSG2 RSG2 interface eth trunk 10 1 RSG2 Eth Trunk10 1 mpls l2vpn pw bit error detection NOTE This example shows how to configure bit error triggered single segment SS PW switching To configure bit error triggered multi segment MS PW switching you als...

Page 1096: ...et1 0 1 LSP token 0x800002 LSP Type Primary BFD Bit Error Information Session MIndex 513 Session Type PE FSM Board Id 1 Fault Type Min Tx Interval ms 1000 Max Tx Interval ms 30000 Actual Tx Interval ms 30000 Detect Multi 3 Source IP Address 1 1 1 1 Destination IP Address 127 0 0 1 Destination Port 3784 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection...

Page 1097: ...te up Label state 0 Token state 0 VC ID 1 VC type VLAN destination 2 2 2 2 local VC label 900001 remote VC label 900002 control word enable remote control word enable forwarding entry exist local group ID 0 remote group ID 0 local AC OAM State up local PSN OAM State down local forwarding state forwarding local status code 0x38 remote AC OAM state up remote PSN OAM state up remote forwarding state ...

Page 1098: ...tate Diffserv Mode uniform Service Class Color DomainId Domain Name client interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 is up Administrator PW no session state up AC status up VC state up Label state 0 Token state 0 VC ID 2 VC type VLAN destination 3 3 3 3 local VC label 900002 remote VC label 1024 control word enable remote control word enable forwarding entry exist local group ID 0 remote group ID 0 local ...

Page 1099: ...urs 19 minutes 42 seconds VC last up time 2014 01 07 16 03 08 VC total up time 0 days 2 hours 13 minutes 13 seconds CKey 4 NKey 3 PW redundancy mode independent AdminPw interface AdminPw link state Diffserv Mode uniform Service Class Color DomainId Domain Name Configuration Files l CSG configuration file sysname CSG bfd mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls te label advertise non null mpls rsvp te mpls rs...

Page 1100: ... 1 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 2 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello interface LoopBack0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 1 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 tunnel protocol mpls te destination HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E...

Page 1101: ...ea 0 0 0 0 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 mpls te enable tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 2 2 2 2 te Tunnel1 0 1 tunnel binding destination 3 3 3 3 te Tunnel1 0 2 bfd sessionA bind pw interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 10 remote peer 2 2 2 2 pw ttl aut calculate discriminator local 1001 discriminator remote 1002 commit bfd sessionB bind ...

Page 1102: ...ote peer 1 1 1 1 remote ip 1 1 1 1 e trunk 10 priority 10 peer address 3 3 3 3 source address 2 2 2 2 e trunk track bfd session session name hello interface Eth Trunk10 mode lacp static e trunk 10 interface Eth Trunk10 1 vlan type dot1q 10 mpls l2vc 1 1 1 1 1 tunnel policy policy1 control HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Switching Con...

Page 1103: ...2 2 2 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 1 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 1 1 1 1 mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te bit error detection mpls te reverse lsp protocol rsvp te ingress lsr id 1 1 1 1 tunnel id 100 mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit bfd hello bind peer ip 3 3 3 3 source ip 2 2 2 2 discriminator local 1005 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Rout...

Page 1104: ... 1 pw ttl aut calculate discriminator local 1002 discriminator remote 1001 commit return l RSG2 configuration file sysname RSG2 lacp e trunk system id 00e0 fc00 0000 lacp e trunk priority 100 bfd mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te label advertise non null mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello mpls te cspf mpls l2vpn HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Prot...

Page 1105: ...ypass control word mpls l2vpn pw bit error detection interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown eth trunk 10 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 2 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls rsvp te hello interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 3 2 255 255 255 0 mpls HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Tri...

Page 1106: ...iminator remote 1005 commit ospf 100 opaque capability enable graceful restart area 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 mpls te enable tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 1 1 1 1 te Tunnel1 0 2 bfd sessionB bind pw interface Eth Trunk10 1 remote peer 1 1 1 1 pw ttl aut calculate discriminator local 1004 discriminator remote 1003 comm...

Page 1107: ...hanisms cannot trigger protection switching based on random bit errors caused by optical fiber aging or optical signal jitter Random bit errors may degrade on an IP RAN or even interrupt services in extreme cases To resolve this problem configure bit error triggered VPN route switching On the network shown in Figure 10 6 the VPN traffic sent from the NodeB to the radio network controller RNC needs...

Page 1108: ... 1 24 GE1 0 1 SPE1 172 1 1 1 24 GE1 0 2 SPE2 172 1 2 1 24 SPE1 Loopback1 2 2 2 2 32 GE1 0 1 UPE 172 1 1 2 24 GE1 0 2 NPE 172 1 4 1 24 GE1 0 3 SPE2 172 1 3 1 24 SPE2 Loopback1 3 3 3 3 32 GE1 0 1 NPE 172 1 5 1 24 GE1 0 2 UPE 172 1 2 2 24 GE1 0 3 SPE1 172 1 3 2 24 NPE Loopback1 4 4 4 4 32 GE1 0 1 SPE2 172 1 5 2 24 GE1 0 2 SEP1 172 1 4 2 24 GE1 0 3 NPE 100 2 1 1 24 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Confi...

Page 1109: ...protocol type process ID and area ID l Label switching router LSR IDs of the UPE and SPEs l Tunnel interface names tunnel IDs and tunnel interface addresses loopback interface addresses for the bidirectional tunnels between the UPE and SPEs l Tunnel policy names for the bidirectional tunnels between the UPE and SPEs and tunnel selector names on the SPEs l Names route distinguishers RDs and VPN tar...

Page 1110: ...1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 3 SPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 3 mpls SPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 3 mpls ldp SPE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 3 quit SPE1 ospf 1 SPE1 ospf 1 opaque capability enable SPE1 ospf 1 area 0 SPE1 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 mpls te enable SPE1 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 quit SPE1 ospf 1 quit Configure SPE2 SPE2 mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 SPE2 mpls SPE2 mpls mpls te SPE2 mpls mpls rsvp te SPE2 mpls mpls te cspf ...

Page 1111: ...address unnumbered interface loopback 1 UPE Tunnel1 0 2 tunnel protocol mpls te UPE Tunnel1 0 2 destination 3 3 3 3 UPE Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te tunnel id 200 UPE Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te signal protocol rsvp te UPE Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te reserved for binding UPE Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te commit UPE Tunnel1 0 2 quit Configure SPE1 SPE1 interface tunnel 1 0 1 SPE1 Tunnel1 0 1 ip address unnumbered interface loopback ...

Page 1112: ...uit UPE interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 UPE GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ip binding vpn instance vpna UPE GigabitEthernet1 0 0 ip address 100 1 1 1 24 UPE GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit UPE bgp 100 UPE bgp ipv4 family vpn instance vpna UPE bgp vpna import route direct UPE bgp vpna quit UPE bgp quit Configure the NPE NPE system view NPE ip vpn instance vpna NPE vpn instance vpna ipv4 family NPE vpn instance vpn...

Page 1113: ...gp peer 2 2 2 2 connect interface loopback 1 NPE bgp peer 3 3 3 3 as number 100 NPE bgp peer 3 3 3 3 connect interface loopback 1 NPE bgp ipv4 family vpnv4 NPE bgp af vpnv4 peer 2 2 2 2 enable NPE bgp af vpnv4 peer 3 3 3 3 enable NPE bgp af vpnv4 quit NPE bgp quit 6 Configure the SPEs as RRs and specify the UPE and NPE as RR clients Configure SPE1 SPE1 bgp 100 SPE1 bgp ipv4 family vpnv4 SPE1 bgp a...

Page 1114: ...e the UPE UPE bfd UPE bfd quit UPE interface tunnel 1 0 1 UPE Tunnel1 0 1 mpls te bit error detection UPE Tunnel1 0 1 mpls te reverse lsp protocol rsvp te ingress lsr id 2 2 2 2 tunnel id 100 UPE Tunnel1 0 1 mpls te commit UPE Tunnel1 0 1 quit UPE interface tunnel 1 0 2 UPE Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te bit error detection UPE Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te reverse lsp protocol rsvp te ingress lsr id 3 3 3 3 tunnel id...

Page 1115: ...isplay bgp vpnv4 vpn instance vpna routing table BGP Local router ID is 1 1 1 1 Status codes valid best d damped h history i internal s suppressed S Stale Origin i IGP e EGP incomplete VPN Instance vpna Router ID 1 1 1 1 Total Number of Routes 4 Network NextHop MED LocPrf PrefVal Path Ogn 100 1 1 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 1 1 1 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 100 2 1 0 24 2 2 2 2 0 100 0 i 3 3 3 3 0 100 0 NPE display...

Page 1116: ...peer yet Run the display bgp vpnv4 all routing table ipv4 address command on SPE1 The command output shows that the local preference of routes advertised by SPE1 to the NPE has changed SPE1 display bgp vpnv4 all routing table 100 1 1 0 BGP local router ID 2 2 2 2 Local AS number 100 Total routes of Route Distinguisher 100 1 2 BGP routing table entry information of 100 1 1 0 24 RR client route Labe...

Page 1117: ...exthop 3 3 3 3 Qos information 0x0 Ext Community RT 1 1 AS path Nil origin incomplete MED 0 localpref 100 pref val 0 valid internal best select active pre 255 IGP cost 1 Originator 1 1 1 1 Cluster list 3 3 3 3 Not advertised to any peer yet BGP routing table entry information of 100 1 1 0 24 Label information Received Applied 1029 NULL From 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Route Duration 00h11m29s Relay Tunnel Out...

Page 1118: ...s te reserved for binding mpls te commit interface Tunnel1 0 2 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 3 3 3 3 mpls te tunnel id 200 mpls te bit error detection mpls te reverse lsp protocol rsvp te ingress lsr id 3 3 3 3 tunnel id 200 mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit bgp 100 router id 1 1 1 1 peer 2 2 2 2 as number 100 peer 2 2 2 2 connect interface...

Page 1119: ... 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 4 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 3 undo shutdown ip address 172 1 3 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 interface Tunnel1 0 1 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 1 1 1 1 mpls...

Page 1120: ... ospf 1 opaque capability enable area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 172 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 network 172 1 4 0 0 0 0 255 mpls te enable tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 1 1 1 1 te Tunnel1 0 1 return l Configuration file of SPE2 sysname SPE2 tunnel selector bindTE permit node 10 apply tunnel policy policy1 bfd mpls lsr id 3 3 3 3 mpls mpls te label a...

Page 1121: ...terface LoopBack1 ipv4 family unicast undo synchronization peer 1 1 1 1 enable peer 2 2 2 2 enable peer 4 4 4 4 enable ipv4 family vpnv4 undo policy vpn target tunnel selector bindTE peer 1 1 1 1 enable peer 1 1 1 1 reflect client peer 1 1 1 1 next hop local peer 2 2 2 2 enable peer 4 4 4 4 enable peer 4 4 4 4 reflect client peer 4 4 4 4 next hop local ospf 1 opaque capability enable area 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1122: ...55 255 bgp 100 router id 4 4 4 4 peer 2 2 2 2 as number 100 peer 2 2 2 2 connect interface LoopBack1 peer 3 3 3 3 as number 100 peer 3 3 3 3 connect interface LoopBack1 ipv4 family unicast undo synchronization peer 2 2 2 2 enable peer 3 3 3 3 enable ipv4 family vpnv4 policy vpn target peer 2 2 2 2 enable peer 3 3 3 3 enable ipv4 family vpn instance vpna import route direct auto frr ospf 1 area 0 0...

Page 1123: ...three PEs reside in the same IGP area Figure 10 7 Associating MAC layer SD alarms with E PW APS switching CE2 CE1 PE1 PE2 PE3 GE1 0 0 1 10 1 1 1 24 GE1 0 0 GE1 0 2 10 1 3 1 24 GE1 0 1 10 1 2 1 24 GE1 0 0 10 1 2 2 24 GE1 0 0 10 1 3 2 24 GE1 0 2 GE1 0 1 10 1 4 1 24 GE1 0 1 10 1 4 2 24 GE1 0 2 GE1 0 0 GE1 0 1 Loopback0 2 2 2 2 32 Loopback0 3 3 3 3 32 Loopback0 1 1 1 1 32 Configuration Roadmap The con...

Page 1124: ...nnectivity verification CV functions for PWs 7 Configure MPLS TP OAM to monitor the LSP status which involves the following procedures l Configure an ME instance and bind the instance to TE tunnels l Enable CC and CV functions for PWs 8 Enable the MAC layer SD alarm function configure alarm generation and clearing thresholds and associate bit error alarms with E PW APS switching which involves the...

Page 1125: ...nterface gigabitethernet 1 0 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 mpls PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 mpls te PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 quit PE1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 mpls PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 mpls te PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 mpls te bandwidth max r...

Page 1126: ...Tunnel1 0 1 mpls te commit PE3 Tunnel1 0 1 quit PE3 interface tunnel1 0 2 PE3 Tunnel1 0 2 ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0 PE3 Tunnel1 0 2 tunnel protocol mpls te PE3 Tunnel1 0 2 destination 2 2 2 2 PE3 Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te tunnel id 300 PE3 Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te signal protocol cr static PE3 Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te commit PE3 Tunnel1 0 2 quit 3 Configure the ingress and egress for a static bid...

Page 1127: ...ngress Tunnel1 0 2 backward nexthop 10 1 4 1 out label 70 bandwidth ct0 10000 PE3 bi static ingress Tunnel1 0 2 quit 4 Bind tunnel interfaces on PE2 and PE3 to a static bidirectional co routed LSP Configure PE2 PE2 interface tunnel1 0 0 PE2 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te passive tunnel PE2 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te binding bidirectional static cr lsp egress tunnel1 0 0 PE2 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te commit PE2 Tunnel1 0 ...

Page 1128: ...tatic PE2 Eth Trunk10 trunkport gigabitethernet 1 0 2 PE2 Eth Trunk10 quit Configure PE3 PE3 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 2 PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown PE3 GigabitEthernet1 0 2 quit PE3 interface eth trunk 10 PE3 Eth Trunk10 mode lacp static PE3 Eth Trunk10 trunkport gigabitethernet 1 0 2 PE3 Eth Trunk10 quit Configure CE2 CE2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 CE2 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 un...

Page 1129: ...l policy policy1 PE1 tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 2 2 2 2 te tunnel1 0 0 PE1 tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 3 3 3 3 te tunnel1 0 1 PE1 tunnel policy policy1 quit Configure PE2 PE2 interface tunnel1 0 0 PE2 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te reserved for binding PE2 Tunnel1 0 0 mpls te commit PE2 Tunnel1 0 0 quit PE2 interface tunnel1 0 2 PE2 Tunnel1 0 2 mpls te reserved for ...

Page 1130: ...quit PE2 interface eth trunk 10 1 PE2 Eth Trunk10 1 vlan type dot1q 10 PE2 Eth Trunk10 1 mpls static l2vc destination 1 1 1 1 1 transmit vpn label 200 receive vpn label 100 tunnel policy policy1 control word PE2 Eth Trunk10 1 mpls static l2vc destination 3 3 3 3 3 transmit vpn label 500 receive vpn label 600 tunnel policy policy1 control word bypass PE2 Eth Trunk10 1 quit Configure a primary PW an...

Page 1131: ...unk10 1 mpls l2vpn pw aps 3 admin PE3 Eth Trunk10 1 quit Run the display mpls l2vpn pw aps verbose command on PE1 PE2 and PE3 and you can view information about PW APS and PWs Use the display on PE1 and PE2 as an example Check the configuration on PE1 PE1 display mpls l2vpn pw aps verbose APS Information Description Local Id 1 Status NR Far End Status NR Request Result Work Wtr Interval s 300 Hold...

Page 1132: ...n Type Revertive Role Slave Remote Id 3 Alarm Info None Total VPN Number 1 PW Information Number 1 Client Interface Eth Trunk10 1 Bind Type admin Primary PW VC ID 1 VC Type VLAN Destination 1 1 1 1 VC State up Secondary PW VC ID 3 VC Type VLAN Destination 3 3 3 3 VC State up PE3 display mpls l2vpn pw aps verbose APS Information Description Local Id 1 Status NR Far End Status NR Request Result Work...

Page 1133: ...vc peer ip 3 3 3 3 vc id 2 vc type vlan mep id 3 remote mep id 4 PE1 mpls tp meg secondary cc send enable PE1 mpls tp meg secondary cc receive enable PE1 mpls tp meg secondary quit Configure PE2 PE2 mpls tp meg primary PE2 mpls tp meg primary me l2vc peer ip 1 1 1 1 vc id 1 vc type vlan mep id 2 remote mep id 1 PE2 mpls tp meg primary cc send enable PE2 mpls tp meg primary cc receive enable PE2 mp...

Page 1134: ...ttl 1 state UP alarm indicate no alarm MEG secondary meg name secondary meg level 7 me count 1 cc send enable cc receive enable cc interval 1000 cc exp 7 ais disable ais interval 1000 ais exp 7 lock disable lock interval 1000 lock exp 7 csf disable csf interval 1000 csf exp 7 lm single end receive disable lm dual end disable lm dual end SD1 threshold 1 lm dual end SD2 threshold 10 ME 1 index 1 dir...

Page 1135: ...ls tp meg 2 quit Configure PE2 PE2 mpls tp meg 1 PE2 mpls tp meg 1 me te interface Tunnel 1 0 0 mep id 2 remote mep id 1 PE2 mpls tp meg 1 cc send enable PE2 mpls tp meg 1 cc receive enable PE2 mpls tp meg 1 quit Configure PE3 PE3 mpls tp meg 2 PE3 mpls tp meg 2 me te interface Tunnel 1 0 1 mep id 4 remote mep id 3 PE3 mpls tp meg 2 cc send enable PE3 mpls tp meg 2y cc receive enable PE3 mpls tp m...

Page 1136: ...0 ais exp 7 lock disable lock interval 1000 lock exp 7 csf disable csf interval 1000 csf exp 7 lm single end receive disable lm dual end disable lm dual end SD1 threshold 1 lm dual end SD2 threshold 10 ME 1 index 1 direction dual mep id 3 remote mep id 4 status board 1 service type te cr static lsp tunnel name Tunnel1 0 1 lsp name state UP alarm indicate no alarm Total MEG number 2 Total ME number...

Page 1137: ...ror mac fcs sd alarm threshold 3 7 resume threshold 5 5 trigger lsp Step 9 Verify the configuration Run the display port error info command in the view of PE1 s GE 1 0 1 The command output shows that alarm status is YES PE1 interface gigabitethernet1 0 1 PE1 GigabitEthernet1 0 1 display this interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 port error information input error output error trap enable Yes trap enable ...

Page 1138: ...Interval 1000 Lock Exp 7 CSF disable CSF Interval 1000 CSF Exp 7 LM Single end Receive disable LM Single end Proactive disable LM Single end SD1 999999 LM Single end SD2 1000000 LM Ring SD1 Threshold 0 LM Ring SD2 Threshold 0 LM Dual end disable LM Dual end SD1 Threshold 1 LM Dual end SD2 Threshold 10 Near SD1 K Cause No Near SD1 MN Cause No Near SD2 K Cause No Near SD2 MN Cause No Far SD1 K Cause...

Page 1139: ...2vpn pw aps Total APSNumber 1 Local Id Remote Id Status Request Result Role Total VPN Number 1 SF Protect 2 End Configuration Files l CE1 configuration file sysname CE1 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 10 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 return l PE1 configuration file sysname PE1 mpls tp ais enable mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls te mpls...

Page 1140: ...ord secondary mpls l2vpn pw aps 1 admin interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 trap threshold crc error mac fcs sd alarm threshold 3 7 resume threshold 5 5 trigger lsp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 3 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te ...

Page 1141: ...te reserved for binding mpls te commit ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 2 2 2 2 te Tunnel1 0 0 tunnel binding destination 3 3 3 3 te Tunnel1 0 1 mpls tp meg primary me l2vc peer ip 2 2 2 2 vc id 1 vc type vlan mep id 1 remote mep id 2 cc send enable cc receive enable mpls tp meg second...

Page 1142: ... 0000 lacp e trunk priority 100 mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls te mpls l2vpn interface GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown eth trunk 10 trap threshold crc error mac fcs sd alarm threshold 3 7 resume threshold 5 5 trigger lsp pw aps 2 role slave remote aps 3 bidirectional static cr lsp ingress Tunnel1 0 2 forward nexthop 10 1 4 2 out label 60 bandwidth ct0 10000 backward in label 70 HUAWEI NetEngine8...

Page 1143: ...mit vpn label 500 receive vpn label 600 tunnel policy policy1 control word bypass mpls l2vpn pw aps 2 admin interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 2 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 4 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reserva...

Page 1144: ...te signal protocol cr static mpls te tunnel id 300 mpls te bidirectional mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 4 0 0 0 0 255 network 10 1 2 0 0 0 0 255 tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 1 1 1 1 te Tunnel1 0 0 tunnel binding destination 3 3 3 3 te Tunnel1 0 2 mpls tp meg primary me l2vc peer ip 1 1 1 1 vc id 1 vc type vla...

Page 1145: ... GigabitEthernet1 0 2 undo shutdown eth trunk 10 pw aps 3 role master remote aps 2 bidirectional static cr lsp egress tunnel1 0 1 forward in label 40 lsrid 1 1 1 1 tunnel id 200 backward nexthop 10 1 3 1 out label 50 bandwidth ct0 10000 bidirectional static cr lsp egress tunnel1 0 2 forward in label 60 lsrid 2 2 2 2 tunnel id 300 backward nexthop 10 1 4 1 out label 70 bandwidth ct0 10000 HUAWEI Ne...

Page 1146: ...thernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 3 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 trap threshold crc error mac fcs sd alarm threshold 3 7 resume threshold 5 5 trigger lsp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 4 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max reservable bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidt...

Page 1147: ... te tunnel id 300 mpls te passive tunnel mpls te binding bidirectional static cr lsp egress tunnel1 0 2 mpls te reserved for binding mpls te commit ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 network 10 1 4 0 0 0 0 255 static cr lsp egress 1to2 incoming interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 in label 20 tunnel policy policy1 tunnel binding destination 1 1 1 1 te Tunnel1 0 1 tunn...

Page 1148: ...n file sysname CE2 interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 undo shutdown eth trunk 10 interface Eth Trunk10 portswitch port trunk allow pass vlan 10 mode lacp static interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown eth trunk 10 return HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 10 Bit Error Triggered Protection Switching Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C...

Page 1149: ...ocations after a master slave switchover 11 5 Configuring Multi Device Backup for IPv6 BRAS User Information After multi device backup of BRAS user information is enabled on IPv6 networks users do not need to re dial up QoS scheduling remains unchanged accounting information is not lost and users can go online through new locations after a master slave switchover 11 6 Configuring Multicast Two nod...

Page 1150: ...configuration 11 10 Configuration Examples This section provides configuration examples of multi device backup Each configuration example consists of the networking requirements configuration precautions configuration roadmap configuration procedures and configuration files HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei ...

Page 1151: ...lowing information is backed up Basic user information including the user MAC address session ID IP address user name authentication information and Option 60 Accounting information including the accounting ID traffic information and duration QoS information including the user priority and QoS profiles Location information including the inner and outer VLAN IDs and Option 82 The backup information...

Page 1152: ...ter receiving the backup information the slave router processes the information in hot backup or warm backup mode l Hot backup After receiving the backup information from the master router the slave router immediately generates user information and forwarding entries When a fault occurs the service terminal can be switched fast l Warm backup The slave router does not generate user information and ...

Page 1153: ... no MAC address entry mapped to any user IP address and cannot forward network traffic to users Therefore a large number of ARP Miss messages are generated The new master device can forward network traffic to users only after the new master device has learned all users MAC addresses The new master device however is slow in learning MAC addresses due to its own processing capability and how fast us...

Page 1154: ...ng batch backup and real time backup After a TCP connection is set up the system performs data transmission of batch backup and real time backup through the backup protocol Meanwhile the RBP offers user interfaces for configuring multi device backup of the same style to users The applications of multi device backup are all based on RBP Pre configuration Tasks Before establishing the multi device b...

Page 1155: ...an any other command has been configured Step 3 Run vrrp vrid virtual router ID virtual ip virtual address A backup group is created and a virtual IP address is assigned to the backup group Step 4 Run admin vrrp vrid virtual router ID ignore if down The VRRP backup group is configured as the Management VRRP mVRRP backup group NOTE The type of the VRRP backup group must be the mVRRP backup group Th...

Page 1156: ... peer device the local ip address parameter specifies the IP address of the local device The IP address of the peer device must have been set on a main interface sub interface or logical interface such as a loopback interface of the peer device Similarly the IP address of the local device must have been set on a main interface sub interface or logical interface such as a loopback interface of the ...

Page 1157: ...med the slave device forwards the network side traffic back to the master device for processing after receiving the traffic from the master device In this case the master device is congested with traffic because the master backup switchover is not performed at the same time as the master backup VRRP switchover When you run the switchover uplink command to configure a master backup switchover to be...

Page 1158: ...ckets that carry the source IP address the same as the NAS IP address End 11 2 4 Configuring a Remote Backup Profile A remote backup profile on devices that back up each other must be configured with the same backup ID Context When you configure a remote backup profile specify a Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP backup group ID an interface to be tracked and a backup ID to associate a remote...

Page 1159: ... MAC address type l Before modifying the setting of odd mac or even mac run the undo vrrp id vrid command to delete the configuration Then run the vrrp id vrid command to reconfigure the setting Step 5 Run backup id backup id remote backup service name The remote backup profile is associated with the remote backup service backup id specifies the remote backup ID The NE80E 40E can find the remote b...

Page 1160: ...igabitEthernet1 0 0 3 Access Control Even Mac State Slave Peer State Master Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 Backup mode hot Slot Number 1 Card Number 0 Port Number 0 Traffic interval 10 minutes Run the display remote backup service command to view information about the remote backup service including the server index number server name Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection status remote IP...

Page 1161: ...up status remote IP address local IP address TCP port number tunnel name and IP address pool name HUAWEI display remote backup service rui Service Index 1 Service Name rui TCP State Connected Peer ip 10 0 0 3 Source ip 10 0 0 4 TCP Port 55535 Track BFD Uplink state 2 1 DOWN 2 UP Track monitor group if1 switchover percent 60 TotalWeight 0 DownWeight 0 Track route monitor group rt1 switchover percen...

Page 1162: ...sers if a master backup VRRP switchover occurs Pre configuration Tasks Before configuring dual device ARP hot backup complete the following tasks l Establish the multi device backup platform l Configure VRRP Priorities on Interfaces in a VRRP Backup Group Data Preparation None 11 3 2 Configuring an RBP for ARP Service Backup To enable dual device ARP hot backup specify a service type for backup Co...

Page 1163: ...set using the qinq termination pe vid pe vid ce vid low ce vid to high ce vid vlan group group id command NOTE When dual system ARP hot backup is used note the following issues l Running the vrrp vrid virtual router id preempt mode timer delay delay value command in the view of the interface in the master state to set the switchback delay to 2 minutes l If the undo vrrp vrid virtual router id comm...

Page 1164: ...ng the Configurations After the configuration succeeds you can view the configuration of the remote backup policy RBP and remote backup service RBS Context Run the following commands to check the previous configurations Procedure l Run the display remote backup profile profile name command to view information about the RBP l Run the display remote backup service service name verbose command to vie...

Page 1165: ... ipv6 pool 1234 metric 10 iana_yyz metric 10 iapd_yyz metric 10 lo metric 10 loc_vpn metric 10 nd metric 10 pd metric 10 remote_del_yyz metric 10 remotev6_yyz metric 10 Failure ratio 100 Failure duration 0 min 11 4 Configuring Multi Device Backup of BRAS User Information After multi device backup of BRAS user information is enabled users do not need to re dial up QoS scheduling remains unchanged a...

Page 1166: ...the following tasks l Establish the multi device backup platform l Configure an IP address pool The IP address pools on the devices that back up each other must be the same Data Preparation To configure multi device backup of BRAS user information you need the following data No Data 1 IP address pool name 2 Logical IP address logical interface and logical host name 3 Tunnel policy name or VPN name...

Page 1167: ... and backup servers send the same information to the remote server Context To enable users to log in through the slave device without twice authentication do as follows on the devices that back up each other Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run remote backup profile profile name The remote backup profile view is displayed Step 3 Run service type bras The RBS of ...

Page 1168: ...e traffic threshold is set End 11 4 5 Configuring User Information Backup in Exclusive IP Address Pool Mode Configuring the exclusive address pool mode is easy and needs no additional links but wastes IP addresses and does not support load balancing Context If the exclusive IP address pool mode is adopted you need to plan an address pool for each physical interface and bind address pools to the RB...

Page 1169: ...s need to advertise the address pool segment route and be configured with route policy In this manner the address pool segment route advertised by the master device has a higher priority load balancing is not performed on the router of the network side l A protection tunnel for example an LSP needs to be set up between the master and slave devices When the uplink of the user fails the downstream t...

Page 1170: ...ote backup service service name The remote backup service view is displayed 3 Run protect tnl policy policy name peer ip ip address interface interface type interface number The protection path is configured to be the label switched path LSP Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS Traffic Engineering TE tunnel or Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE tunnel for public users The tunnel type is specified by ...

Page 1171: ...on tunnel is automatically created and a VPN protection tunnel is triggered by user login without needing to configure a protection tunnel for each VPN This function simplifies tunnel configuration To configure a specific public protection tunnel run the protect tnl policy policy name peer ip ip address interface interface type interface number command to configure a specific VPN protection tunnel...

Page 1172: ...ddress pool must be set before the address segment is set 4 Run section section num start ip address end ip address The address range is configured for an address pool The primary and secondary address pools must use different address ranges on the master and slave devices The master device s primary address pool and the slave device s secondary address pool share an address range The master devic...

Page 1173: ...ddresses and if its address resources are exhausted the local address pool is used to allocate addresses This requires the secondary address pool on the slave device to have a higher priority than the primary address pool Assume that the local address pool is used to allocate addresses and if its address resources are exhausted the remote DHCP server is used to allocate addresses This requires the...

Page 1174: ...t of the secondary address pool on the same BRAS allowing the primary address pool to be preferentially used The cost values can be set in a routing policy which allows the UNR of the primary address pool to have higher route precedence than that of the secondary address pool For information about how to configure a routing policy see Configuring a Routing Policy in HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router ...

Page 1175: ...complete you can view details about the remote server and the remote backup service type which is BRAS Context Run the following commands to check the previous configuration Procedure l Run the display remote backup profile profile name command to check information about the remote backup profile l Run the display remote backup service service name verbose command to check information about the re...

Page 1176: ...iew information about the remote backup service including the server index number server name Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection status remote IP address local IP address TCP port number tunnel name and IP address pool name HUAWEI display remote backup service rui Service Index 0 Service Name rui TCP State Connected Peer ip 10 0 0 1 Source ip 10 0 0 2 TCP Port 11111 Track BFD Track inter...

Page 1177: ...I display access user interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 2 1 UserID Username Interface IP address MAC Vlan IPv6 address Access type 1 user1 huawei GE1 0 2 1 192 168 7 199 0016 ecb7 a879 PPPoE Normal users 0 RUI Local users 1 RUI Remote users 0 Total users 1 11 5 Configuring Multi Device Backup for IPv6 BRAS User Information After multi device backup of BRAS user information is enabled on IPv6 networks ...

Page 1178: ...ot support IPv6 static user backup l For ND IPv6 hot backup the deployment solution provides only the unshared prefix assignment mode l The devices support ND DHCPv6 ND PD IPv6 hot backup for PPPoE Layer 2 subscribers and support PPPoE dual stack hot backup l IPv6 hot backup users and non hot backup users can share an address pool That is IPv6 also supports virtual backup l IPv6 services protectio...

Page 1179: ...at get online from a specified domain as needed Context RUI backup is enabled by default for users that get online through an AAA domain To disable this function run the undo peer backup enable command If RUI backup is disabled for users that get online through the AAA domain but two node hot backup is enabled on the interface from which these users get online user information will not be backed u...

Page 1180: ...Step 3 Run service type bras The RBS of the BRAS user information is enabled Step 4 Run nas logic ip ip address logic port interface name logic sysname host name The logic IP address logic interface and logic host name are configured Ensure that the devices that back up each other send the same information about NAS IP Address NAS Port and Option 82 contained in the packets to the RADIUS and DHCP ...

Page 1181: ...ised by the active device has a higher priority load balancing is not performed on the router of the network side l A protection tunnel for example an LSP needs to be set up between the active and standby devices When the uplink of the user fails the downstream traffic of the user is introduced to the protection tunnel l The address pool is bound to the RBS that is the ip pool pool name metric met...

Page 1182: ...layed 3 Run protect tnl policy policy name peer ip ip address interface interface type interface number The protection path is configured to be the label switched path LSP Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS Traffic Engineering TE tunnel or Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE tunnel for public users The tunnel type is specified by the tunnel policy and the outbound interface is optional 4 Run either ...

Page 1183: ... primary address pool to the RBS for IPv4 users run the ip pool pool name metric metric num command To bind the primary address pool to the RBS for IPv6 users run the ipv6 pool pool name metric metric value command NOTE The protect lsp tunnel for all instance peer ip command configures a protection tunnel template for both the public network and VPNs After the command is run a public protection tu...

Page 1184: ... router to which authorization packets are sent based on the user s bill This IP address can be a NAS IP adress or the address that the router uses to exchange accounting start packets with the RADIUS server To ensure that the RADIUS authorization server sends authorization packets to the exact router run the radius authorization source command to specify a source IP address to each pair of master...

Page 1185: ... Run remote backup service service name The remote backup service view is displayed 6 Run radius authorization source same as nas logic ip Or radius authorization source vpn instance vpn instance name source ip address The source IP address of the master and slave devices is configured as the NAS IP address of the RADIUS authorization server NOTE If a NAS IP address has been specified in the RADIU...

Page 1186: ...on is complete you can view details about the remote server and the remote backup service type which is BRAS Context Run the following commands to check the previous configuration Procedure l Run the display remote backup profile profile name command to check information about the remote backup profile l Run the display remote backup service service name verbose command to check information about ...

Page 1187: ... 1 Backup mode hot Slot Number 1 Card Number 0 Port Number 0 Traffic interval 10 minutes Run the display remote backup service command to view information about the remote backup service including the server index number server name Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection status remote IP address local IP address TCP port number tunnel name and IP address pool name HUAWEI display remote backu...

Page 1188: ...iew information about the access users on a specified interface HUAWEI display access user interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 2 1 UserID Username Interface IP address MAC Vlan IPv6 address Access type 1 user1 huawei GE1 0 2 1 192 168 7 199 0016 ecb7 a879 PPPoE Normal users 0 RUI Local users 1 RUI Remote users 0 Total users 1 11 6 Configuring Multicast Two node Hot Backup Configuring multicast two node ...

Page 1189: ... and BFD A designated router DR and a backup designated router BDR are elected between the routers The DR sends copies of a program to terminals If the DR fails the BDR becomes the DR and sends copies of multicast traffic downstream BFD rapidly detects faults and allows the BDR to rapidly take over multicast traffic Existing IPTV terminals support DHCP and PPPoE access to routers If IPTV terminals...

Page 1190: ...information Data Preparation None 11 6 2 Enabling a Multicast RBS An RBS can be enabled to back up multicast services Context Perform the following steps on each of routers that back up each other Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run remote backup profile profile name HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configurati...

Page 1191: ...ulty link causing packet loss The dhcp stb igmp copy command can be used to enable IGMP message duplication so that IGMP messages can reach the slave router If a DHCP STB is dual homed to the master and slave routers both routers can receive the IGMP messages which means that IGMP message duplication is not required The undo dhcp stb igmp copy command can be used to disable IGMP message duplicatio...

Page 1192: ...mmand If the following information is displayed the preceding configurations are successful l The value of the Service field is bras multicast l The value of the DHCP user IGMP copy field is enable or disable HUAWEI display remote backup profile profile1 Profile Index 0x800 Profile Name profile1 Service bras multicast Remote backup service service1 Backup ID 10 track protocol VRRP VRRP ID 1 VRRP I...

Page 1193: ...nario where an L2TP tunnel is used to transmit access services of enterprise users a remote terminal sends a dialup request to a local operator gateway and the gateway relays the request to the enterprise network along an L2TP tunnel The operator can provide two LAC gateways One LAC is the master and the other is the backup If the master LAC fails the backup LAC takes over access services for a te...

Page 1194: ... configuration roadmap as L2TP 1 1 hot backup An L2TP 2 1 hot backup scenario can be considered to be a physical overlapping of two L2TP 1 1 hot backup scenarios Figure 11 3 L2TP two node hot backup LAC2 LNS LAC1 VRRP Internet Loopback Loopback User Network L2TP Tunnel L2TP Tunnel Backup channel Protection tunnel HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup C...

Page 1195: ...o node hot backup complete the following tasks l Establish a multi node backup platform l Configure multi node backup for BRAS user information excluding the address pool configuration Data Preparation To configure L2TP two node hot backup you need the following data No Data 1 Base value for L2TP tunnel IDs HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configu...

Page 1196: ...iew The system view is displayed Step 2 Run set l2tp tunnel base id base id A base value for L2TP tunnel IDs is set NOTE l If a tunnel ID carried in backup information is the same as a local tunnel ID the router deletes the existing local tunnel information and accepts the backup tunnel information l The set l2tp tunnel base id base id command cannot be used on the router that has established L2TP...

Page 1197: ...wo LACs are configured with hot backup and work in load balancing mode The master LAC advertises the cost value of the route to the loopback IP address is smaller than that the slave LAC advertises allowing the route to the loopback address on the master LAC to be preferentially used The cost values can be set in a routing policy which allows the route to the loopback IP address of the master LAC ...

Page 1198: ...ct inherit cost command in the IS IS view l If OSPF imports direct routes run the following commands in the OSPF view 1 default cost inherit metric 2 import route direct l If the network command is used to import routes into the OSPF routing table run the ospf cost inherit command in the view of a loopback interface view l If BGP imports direct routes run the import route direct command in the BGP...

Page 1199: ...switching does not affect customer services Therefore you do not need to run the l2tp protect tunnel disable command to disable the L2TP traffic protection mechanism Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run remote backup profile profile name The RBP view is displayed Step 3 Run l2tp protect tunnel disable The L2TP traffic protection mechanism is disabled End 11 7 8 ...

Page 1200: ...ed 2 Run remote backup service service name The RBS view is displayed 3 Run domain map list domain map list name A domain mapping list is bound to the RBS End 11 7 9 Checking the Configurations After successfully configuring L2TP two node hot backup you can view L2TP two node hot backup configurations and statistics Context Run the following commands to check the previous configuration Procedure l...

Page 1201: ... remote backup profile command If the following information is displayed the preceding configurations are successful l The value of the Service field is bras l2tp HUAWEI display remote backup profile profile1 Profile Index 0x800 Profile Name profile1 Service bras l2tp Remote backup service s1 Backup ID 10 track protocol VRRP VRRP ID 1 VRRP Interface Eth Trunk1 2 Interface Eth Trunk1 1 State Master...

Page 1202: ...cal assigned tunnel ID RTID Remote assigned tunnel ID LTSD local assigned session ID RTSD Remote assigned session ID RG Register L local R remote FWS Fowarding state L local interface P protect path LSID RSID LTID RTID UserID UserName RG state MAC 27823 248 2 4 7958 user5 hz L active 0011 1111 2222 35523 2769 40000 5 13818 user9 hz R inactive 0011 3333 2222 Total 2 2 printed Run the display access...

Page 1203: ...that the device can interwork properly with the RADIUS server Data Preparation To configure dual system backup for distributed NAT services you need the following data No Data 1 Name of a NAT instance and slot ID of the board to which the NAT instance is bound 2 Name start IP address and end IP address of a public NAT address pool 3 Name gateway address and address range of a private address pool ...

Page 1204: ...the NAT instance to a user group in the AAA domain l Configure a NAT traffic distribution policy including Define a traffic classification rule traffic classifier traffic behavior and traffic policy Apply the traffic policy l Configure a NAT conversion policy You need to configure the system to directly perform a NAT operation for packets and not to match packets with an ACL rule NOTE For details ...

Page 1205: ...ult when a tracked interface goes Down the priorities of routers in the tracking backup group decrease by 10 Step 8 Run vrrp vrid virtual router id track nat instance nat instance name reduced value reduced mVRRP is configured to track a NAT instance to implement a VRRP master slave switchover NOTE After the configuration mVRRP can detect the Down event of the NAT instance in time and then adjust ...

Page 1206: ...en set on a main interface sub interface or logical interface such as a loopback interface of the local device In addition the two IP addresses can be pinged successfully port id specifies the number of the interface that is listened to by the server The numbers of the interfaces for the TCP connection must be the same on the two devices that back up each other NOTE The port with the number 6000 i...

Page 1207: ...tep 2 Run remote backup profile profile name The remote backup profile view is displayed Step 3 Run vrrp id vrid interface interface type interface number odd mac even mac A VRRP backup group ID is bound to the remote backup profile RBP The vrid parameter specifies the ID of a VRRP backup group The value of the vrid parameter must be the same as the VRRP backup group ID configured on the interface...

Page 1208: ...ofile can be bound to up to sub interfaces of the same main interface Step 11 Run bas A BAS interface is created and the BAS interface view is displayed Step 12 Run access type layer2 subscriber default domain authentication force replace dname pre authentication predname The access type is set to Layer 2 subscriber access and the attributes of this access type are configured End 11 8 6 Checking t...

Page 1209: ...ast up time 2012 05 16 18 42 04 ip pool poolv4_yyz metric 10 r3 metric 10 r4 metric 20 remotev4 metric 10 ipv6 pool 1234 metric 10 iana_yyz metric 10 iapd_yyz metric 10 lo metric 10 loc_vpn metric 10 nd metric 10 pd metric 10 remote_del_yyz metric 10 remotev6_yyz metric 10 Failure ratio 100 Failure duration 0 min NAT instance nat1 Rbs ID 3 Protect type ip redirect Next hop 3 3 3 3 Vlanid 0 Peer ip...

Page 1210: ...User ID 0 VPN Instance Address Group g3 NAT Instance test Public IP 113 1 1 1 Start Port 33792 Port Range 4096 Port Total 4096 Total TCP UDP ICMP Session Limit 65535 10240 10240 512 Total TCP UDP ICMP Session Current 1 0 1 0 Total TCP UDP ICMP Rev Session Limit 20992 10240 50 512 Total TCP UDP ICMP Rev Session Current 0 0 0 0 Total TCP UDP ICMP Port Limit 20992 10240 10240 512 Total TCP UDP ICMP P...

Page 1211: ...nnel id tunnel name remote name bas interface interface name interface type interface number remote backup profile profile name remote backup service service name command to check L2TP tunnel backup information Step 5 In the user view run the display l2tp session rui session item session id source ip source ip address destination ip destination ip address bas interface interface name interface typ...

Page 1212: ...l id tunnel name tunnel name session session id command to disconnect a specified L2TP tunnel and all L2TP sessions established over the tunnel The session session id parameter specifies a session to be torn down After the test l2tp tunnel command is used to test tunnels and sessions the reset l2tp tunnel command can be used to tear down the tunnels and sessions End 11 10 Configuration Examples Th...

Page 1213: ...raffic and sends it to users without learning MAC addresses of users This prevents packet loss if the new master device fails to obtain MAC addresses of users in time Figure 11 5 Networking diagram for dual device ARP hot backup RouterA RouterB User 1 User 2 User 3 Internet VRRP Dual Device ARP Hot Backup GE1 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 24 GE1 0 0 1 10 0 1 2 24 GE2 0 0 10 0 2 2 24 GE2 0 0 10 0 2 1 24 Device In...

Page 1214: ...erA bfd session bfd discriminator remote 2 RouterA bfd session bfd commit RouterA bfd session bfd quit Bind GE 1 0 0 1 to the VRRP backup group Configure VRRP to monitor the BFD session status and network side interface status RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA Gigabit...

Page 1215: ...rface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 remote backup profile profile1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 quit Step 3 Verify the configuration After configuring the RBP view RBP information The command output shows that the backup service type is arp the RBP profile1 is bound to GE 1 0 0 1 and the status of Router A is Master RouterA display remote backup profile profile1 Profile ...

Page 1216: ...ernet 2 0 0 remote backup profile profile1 service type arp backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 remote backup profile profile1 interface LoopBack1 ip address 22 22 22 22 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 0 2 0 0 0 0 255 network 22 22 22 22 0 0 0 0 return l Configuration file of Router...

Page 1217: ...es Networking Requirements NOTE The X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E do not support the RUI protocol and therefore do not back up BRAS user information As shown in Figure 11 6 users are connected to Router A and Router B through the LAN switch LSW The two NE80E 40Es are master and slave NE80E 40Es through VRRP The basic user access functions are configured on Router A and Router B so that users c...

Page 1218: ...nfigure basic BRAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Configure a routing protocol to achieve intercommunication between devices For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Ip Routing 3 Establish the mul...

Page 1219: ...kup group The sub interface GE 1 0 0 2 is used here Configure VRRP to monitor the BFD session status and network side interface status RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 admin vrrp ...

Page 1220: ...RouterA rm backup prf profile1 traffic backup interval 10 Step 3 Bind the IP address pool to the RBP Take Router A as an example The configuration ofRouter B is similar to the configuration of Router A RouterA remote backup profile profile1 RouterA rm backup prf profile1 ip pool pool1 NOTE The bound IP address pool pool1 must have been configured through the ip pool command in the AAA domain view ...

Page 1221: ...p user Remote backup service service1 Total Users Numer 10 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 The information about logged in users on a specific interface can be displayed HUAWEI display access user interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 UserID Username Interface IP address MAC IPv6 address 100 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 10 0002 0101 0101 101 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 9 0002 0101 0102 102 user lsh G...

Page 1222: ...ckup service service1 peer 88 88 88 88 source 22 22 22 22 port 2046 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 nas logic ip 1 2 3 4 nas logic port gigabitethernet1 0 0 nas logic sysname huawei traffic backup interval 10 ip pool pool1 interface gigabite...

Page 1223: ...8 88 port 2046 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 nas logic ip 1 2 3 4 nas logic port gigabitethernet1 0 0 nas logic sysname huawei traffic backup interval 10 ip pool pool2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 user vlan 50 remote backup profile pr...

Page 1224: ...vertised after the BRAS recovers The default route cost can be used to control route preference If dual system hot backup is configured on BRASs a routing protocol imports UNRs and trusts UNR preference values This allows the network segment route of the primary address pool to have higher route precedence than that of the secondary address pool To improve link usage allow a VRRP backup group to t...

Page 1225: ...ble a routing protocol to trust UNR cost values Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l VRRP ID l IP address of each interface on routers that back up each other l Backup ID which works together with an RBS to identify an RBP to which users belong Procedure Step 1 Configure a multi system backup platform The configuration on Router A is used in this example and...

Page 1226: ...00 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 admin vrrp vrid 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 vrrp vrid 2 priority 100 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 vrrp vrid 2 preempt mode timer delay 600 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 vrrp vrid 2 track bfd session 3 peer RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 vrrp vrid 2 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 reduced 50 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 3 quit NOTE Set VRRP priority v...

Page 1227: ...rv service1 ip pool pool1 RouterA rm backup srv service1 protect redirect ip nexthop 10 1 1 7 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 Step 4 Bind the RBP to GE 1 0 0 1 from which users attempt to get online The configuration on Router A is used in this example and is similar to that on Router B RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 remote backup profile profile1 RouterA ...

Page 1228: ... the Connected state RouterA display remote backup service service1 Service Index 0 Service Name service1 TCP State Connected Peer ip 88 88 88 88 Source ip 22 22 22 22 TCP Port 2046 Track BFD Track interface0 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 Track interface1 ip pool poolv4_yyz metric 10 r3 metric 10 r4 metric 20 remotev4 metric 10 ipv6 pool 1234 metric 10 iana_yyz metric 10 iapd_yyz metric 10 lo metric 10 loc...

Page 1229: ...1 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 9 0002 0101 0102 102 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 8 0002 0101 0103 103 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 7 0002 0101 0104 104 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 6 0002 0101 0105 105 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 5 0002 0101 0106 106 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 4 0002 0101 0107 107 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 3 0002 0101 0108 108 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 2 0002 0101 0109 109 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 11 00...

Page 1230: ...peer 88 88 88 88 source 22 22 22 22 port 2046 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 ip pool pool1 protect redirect ip nexthop 10 1 1 7 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 even mac vrrp id 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 3 odd mac nas logic ip 1 2 3 ...

Page 1231: ... peer vrrp vrid 1 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 reduced 50 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 3 vlan type dot1q 201 ip address 101 0 0 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 2 virtual ip 101 0 0 100 admin vrrp vrid 2 vrrp vrid 2 priority 120 vrrp vrid 2 track bfd session 4 peer vrrp vrid 2 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 reduced 50 remote backup service service1 peer 22 22 22 22 source 88 88 88 88 p...

Page 1232: ...asic user access functions are configured on Router A and Router B so that users can log in through the master device The directly connected link is deployed between Router A and Router B When the user side link or interface fails you can deploy IP redirection to ensure that the network side traffic is sent back normally That is the network side traffic is forwarded through the link from Router A ...

Page 1233: ...RouterC GE2 0 0 10 0 0 2 24 GE2 0 1 10 0 2 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure basic BRAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Establish the multi device backup platform 3 Configure the protecti...

Page 1234: ...abitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 admin vrrp vrid 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 priority 120 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 600 RouterA GigabitEthern...

Page 1235: ...way 1 1 1 1 24 RouterB ip pool hsi bak section 0 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 254 RouterB ip pool hsi bak dhcp server group gm1 Configure the RBP on Router A and Router B RouterA remote backup profile profile1 RouterA rm backup prf profile1 peer backup hot RouterA rm backup prf profile1 vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA rm backup prf profile1 backup id 10 remote backup service service1 RouterA ...

Page 1236: ...nterface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 State Master Peer state Slave Backup mode hot Slot Number 1 Card Number 0 Port Number 0 IP Pool hsi Traffic threshold 50 MB Traffic interval 10 minutes RouterB display remote backup profile profile1 Profile Index 0x803 Profile Name profile1 Service bras Remote backup service service1 Backup ID 10 track protocol VRRP VRRP ID 1 VRRP In...

Page 1237: ...erface GigabitEthernet3 0 0 User number 0 After users go online the information about backup users can be displayed HUAWEI display backup user Remote backup service service1 Total Users Numer 10 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 The information about logged in users on a specific interface can be displayed HUAWEI display access user interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 UserID Username Interface...

Page 1238: ... 2 2 3 2 2 2 254 aaa domain userdomain1 authentication scheme default0 accounting scheme default0 ip pool hsi ip pool hsi bak bfd bfd bind peer ip 10 0 1 2 discriminator local 1 discriminator remote 2 commit interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 admin vrrp vrid 1 vrrp vrid 1 priority 120 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode ti...

Page 1239: ...ction 0 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 253 REMOTE dhcp server group gm1 aaa domain userdomain1 authentication scheme default0 accounting scheme default0 bfd bfd bind peer ip 10 0 1 1 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 commit interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 ip address 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 admin vrrp vrid 1 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 2 peer vrrp ...

Page 1240: ...ave NE80E 40Es through VRRP The basic user access functions are configured on Router A and Router B so that users can log in through the master device The directly connected link is deployed between Router A and Router B When the user side link or interface fails you can deploy IP redirection to ensure that the network side traffic is sent back normally That is the network side traffic is forwarde...

Page 1241: ...32 RouterC GE2 0 0 10 0 0 2 24 GE2 0 1 10 0 2 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure basic BRAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Establish the multi device backup platform 3 Configure the prote...

Page 1242: ...abitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 admin vrrp vrid 1 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 priority 120 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 600 RouterA GigabitEthern...

Page 1243: ... prf profile1 backup id 10 remote backup service service1 RouterA rm backup prf profile1 service type bras RouterA rm backup prf profile1 quit RouterB remote backup profile profile1 RouterB rm backup prf profile1 peer backup hot RouterB rm backup prf profile1 vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterB rm backup prf profile1 backup id 10 remote backup service service1 RouterB rm backup prf...

Page 1244: ...rval 10 minutes RouterB display remote backup profile profile1 Profile Index 0x803 Profile Name profile1 Service bras Remote backup service service1 Backup ID 10 track protocol VRRP VRRP ID 1 VRRP Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 Interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 1 State Slave Peer state Master Backup mode hot Slot Number 1 Card Number 0 Port Number 0 IP Pool hsi Traffic threshold 50 MB Traffic inter...

Page 1245: ...layed HUAWEI display backup user Remote backup service service1 Total Users Numer 10 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 The information about logged in users on a specific interface can be displayed HUAWEI display access user interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 1 UserID Username Interface IP address MAC Vlan IPv6 address Access type 120 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 10 0002 0101 0101 50 IPoE 101 user ...

Page 1246: ...fd bfd bind peer ip 10 0 1 2 discriminator local 1 discriminator remote 2 commit interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 admin vrrp vrid 1 vrrp vrid 1 priority 120 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 600 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 1 peer vrrp vrid 1 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 reduced 50 remote backup s...

Page 1247: ... gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 ip address 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 admin vrrp vrid 1 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 2 peer vrrp vrid 1 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 reduced 50 remote backup service service1 peer 22 22 22 22 source 88 88 88 88 port 2046 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 ip pool hsi main ip pool hsi bak protect redirect ip nex...

Page 1248: ...master and slave NE80E 40Es through VRRP The basic user access functions are configured on Router A and Router B so that users can log in through the master device The RBPs on Router A and Router B do not need to be bound to the IP address pool You can set different cost values on Router A and Router B through the routing policy or set routing protocol metrics on interfaces to ensure that the netw...

Page 1249: ...7 24 Loopback0 2 2 2 2 32 Loopback1 88 88 88 88 32 RouterC GE2 0 0 10 0 0 2 24 GE2 0 1 10 0 2 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure basic BRAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Establish the mu...

Page 1250: ... the interface to the VRRP backup group The sub interface GE 1 0 0 2 is used here Configure VRRP to monitor the BFD session status and network side interface status RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 RouterA Giga...

Page 1251: ...ol pool1 configured in the domain to the RBS In addition configure the protection path for the network side traffic to return on Router A The configuration of Router B is similar to the configuration of Router A RouterA remote backup service service1 RouterA rm backup srv service1 ip pool pool1 RouterA rm backup srv service1 protect redirect ip nexthop 10 1 1 7 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 Step...

Page 1252: ...oc_vpn metric 10 nd metric 10 pd metric 10 remote_del_yyz metric 10 remotev6_yyz metric 10 Failure ratio 100 Failure duration 0 min NAT instance nat1 Rbs ID 0 Protect type ip redirect Next hop 10 1 1 7 Vlanid 0 Peer ip 10 1 1 7 Vrfid 0 Tunnel index 0x0 Tunnel state UP Tunnel OperFlag NORMAL Spec interface GigabitEthernet3 0 0 Out interface GigabitEthernet3 0 0 User number 0 After users go online t...

Page 1253: ...l1 bas local gateway 16 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 section 0 16 0 0 2 16 0 0 100 aaa domain userdomain1 authentication scheme default0 accounting scheme default0 ip pool pool1 bfd bfd bind peer ip 10 0 1 2 discriminator local 1 discriminator remote 2 commit interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 admin vrrp vrid 1 vrrp vrid...

Page 1254: ...d peer ip 10 0 1 1 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 commit interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 ip address 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 admin vrrp vrid 1 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 2 peer vrrp vrid 1 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 reduced 50 remote backup service service1 peer 22 22 22 22 source 88 88 88 88 port 2046 track interfac...

Page 1255: ...two NE80E 40Es are master and slave NE80E 40Es through VRRP The basic user access functions are configured on Router A and Router B so that users can log in through the master device When the master device fails services can be switched to the slave device quickly The RBPs on Router A and Router B do not need to be bound to the IP address pool You can set different cost values on Router A and Rout...

Page 1256: ...p The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure basic BRAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Configure the tunnel between Router A and Router B and ensure that the tunnel is Up 3 Establish the multi device backup platform 4 Set ...

Page 1257: ...RRP backup group The sub interface GE 1 0 0 2 is used here Configure VRRP to monitor the BFD session status and network side interface status RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 0 1 100 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 admi...

Page 1258: ...f profile1 quit Step 3 Bind the address pool pool1 configured in the domain to the RBS Configure the protection path for the network side traffic to return on Router A The configuration of Router B is similar to the configuration of Router A Configure the tunnel policy RouterA tunnel policy policy1 RouterA tunnel policy policy1 tunnel select seq cr lsp load balance number 1 RouterA tunnel policy p...

Page 1259: ...Source ip 22 22 22 22 TCP Port 2046 Track BFD Track interface0 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 Track interface1 ip pool poolv4_yyz metric 10 r3 metric 10 r4 metric 20 remotev4 metric 10 ipv6 pool 1234 metric 10 iana_yyz metric 10 iapd_yyz metric 10 lo metric 10 loc_vpn metric 10 nd metric 10 pd metric 10 remote_del_yyz metric 10 remotev6_yyz metric 10 Failure ratio 100 Failure duration 0 min NAT instance nat...

Page 1260: ...0 0 1 2 2 2 6 0002 0101 0105 105 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 5 0002 0101 0106 106 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 4 0002 0101 0107 107 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 3 0002 0101 0108 108 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 2 0002 0101 0109 109 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 11 0002 0101 0110 Total users 10 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of RouterA sysname RouterA ip pool pool1 bas local gateway 16 0 0 1 255 255 255 ...

Page 1261: ...remote backup service service1 peer 88 88 88 88 source 22 22 22 22 port 2046 track interface GigabitEthernet 2 0 0 ip pool pool1 protect tnl policy policy1 peer ip 2 2 2 2 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 2 nas logic ip 1 2 3 4 nas logic port GigabitEthernet1 0 0 nas logic sysname ...

Page 1262: ...rrp vrid 1 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 2 peer vrrp vrid 1 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 reduced 50 interface Tunnel1 0 0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 tunnel protocol mpls te destination 1 1 1 1 mpls te tunnel id 100 mpls te commit tunnel policy policy1 tunnel select seq cr lsp load balance number 1 quit remote backup service service1 peer 22 22 22 22 source 88 88 88 88 port ...

Page 1263: ...0 if match ip prefix p1 apply cost 10 return l Configuration file of Router C sysname RouterC mpls lsr id 3 3 3 9 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te mpls te cspf interface GigabitEthernet 2 0 0 ip address 10 0 0 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te interface GigabitEthernet 2 0 1 ip address 10 0 2 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp te interface LoopBack1 ip address 3 3 3 9 255 255 255 255 ospf 1 o...

Page 1264: ...ers can log in through the master device When the master device fails services can be switched to the slave device quickly The RBPs on Router A and Router B do not need to be bound to the IP address pool You can set different cost values on Router A and Router B through the routing policy or set routing protocol metrics on interfaces to ensure that the network side traffic is sent back When the us...

Page 1265: ...back0 2 2 2 2 32 Loopback1 88 88 88 88 32 RouterC GE2 0 0 10 0 0 2 24 GE2 0 1 10 0 2 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure basic BAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Configure the tunnel betwe...

Page 1266: ...tor remote 2 RouterA bfd session bfd commit RouterA bfd session bfd quit Bind the interface to the VRRP backup group The sub interface GE 1 0 0 2 is used here Configure VRRP to monitor the BFD session status and network side interface status RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 ...

Page 1267: ...ackup prf profile1 traffic backup interval 10 RouterA rm backup prf profile1 quit Step 3 Bind the address pool pool1 configured in the domain to the RBS Configure the protection path for the network side traffic to return on Router A The configuration of Router B is similar to the configuration of Router A Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP on the directly connected link For details see the HUAWEI NetEngine...

Page 1268: ...essfully you can view that the TCP connection status is Connected RouterA display remote backup service service1 Service Index 0 Service Name service1 TCP State Connected Peer ip 88 88 88 88 Source ip 22 22 22 22 TCP Port 2046 Track BFD Track interface0 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 Track interface1 ip pool poolv4_yyz metric 10 r3 metric 10 r4 metric 20 remotev4 metric 10 ipv6 pool 1234 metric 10 iana_yyz ...

Page 1269: ... GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 8 0002 0101 0103 103 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 7 0002 0101 0104 104 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 6 0002 0101 0105 105 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 5 0002 0101 0106 106 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 4 0002 0101 0107 107 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 3 0002 0101 0108 108 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 2 0002 0101 0109 109 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 11 0002 0101 0110 Total users 10 End Configuration Files l Co...

Page 1270: ...s backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 nas logic ip 1 2 3 4 nas logic port gigabitethernet1 0 0 nas logic sysname huawei traffic backup interval 10 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 user vlan 50 remote backup profile profile1 bas access type layer2 subscriber authentication method web interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 undo shutdown i...

Page 1271: ...l policy policy1 tunnel select seq lsp load balance number 1 quit remote backup service service1 peer 22 22 22 22 source 88 88 88 88 port 2046 track interface gigabitethernet 2 0 0 ip pool pool1 protect tnl policy policy1 peer ip 1 1 1 1 interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface g...

Page 1272: ...ol and therefore do not back up BRAS user information As shown in Figure 11 13 users are connected to Router A and Router B through the LSW The two NE80E 40Es are master and slave NE80E 40Es through VRRP The basic user access functions are configured on Router A and Router B so that users can log in through the master device When the master device fails services can be switched to the slave device...

Page 1273: ... 88 RouterC GE2 0 0 10 0 0 2 24 GE2 0 1 10 0 2 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure basic BAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Configure VPN instances on Router A and Router B and ensure that...

Page 1274: ... GE 1 0 0 2 on Router B is 10 0 1 2 RouterA bfd RouterA bfd quit RouterA bfd bfd bind peer ip 10 0 1 2 RouterA bfd session bfd discriminator local 1 RouterA bfd session bfd discriminator remote 2 RouterA bfd session bfd commit RouterA bfd session bfd quit Bind the interface to the VRRP backup group The sub interface GE 1 0 0 2 is used here Configure VRRP to monitor the BFD session status and netwo...

Page 1275: ... profile1 RouterA rm backup prf profile1 traffic backup interval 10 RouterA rm backup prf profile1 quit Step 3 Bind the address pool pool1 configured in the domain to the RBS Configure the protection path for the network side traffic to return for the VPN user vpna on Router A The configuration of Router B is similar to the configuration of Router A RouterA remote backup service service1 RouterA r...

Page 1276: ...ric 10 r4 metric 20 remotev4 metric 10 ipv6 pool 1234 metric 10 iana_yyz metric 10 iapd_yyz metric 10 lo metric 10 loc_vpn metric 10 nd metric 10 pd metric 10 remote_del_yyz metric 10 remotev6_yyz metric 10 Failure ratio 100 Failure duration 0 min NAT instance nat1 Rbs ID 0 Protect type vpn instance Vpn instance vpna Vc lable 4294967295 Peer ip 33 33 33 33 Vrfid 3 Tunnel index 0x0 Tunnel state UP ...

Page 1277: ... 0002 0101 0108 108 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 2 0002 0101 0109 109 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 11 0002 0101 0110 Total users 10 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA ip vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 100 1 tnl policy policy2 vpn target 111 1 export extcommunity vpn target 111 1 import extcommunity mpls lsr id 1 1 1 1 mpls mpls rsvp te mpls te cspf mpls ldp ip ...

Page 1278: ...p ip prefix p1 index 10 permit 16 0 0 0 24 tunnel policy policy2 tunnel binding destination 2 2 2 2 te Tunnel1 0 0 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 nas logic ip 1 2 3 4 nas logic port gigabitethernet1 0 0 nas logic sysname huawei traffic backup interval 10 interface gigabitethern...

Page 1279: ...55 route policy p1 permit node 0 if match ip prefix p1 apply cost 5 return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB ip vpn instance vpna route distinguisher 200 1 vpn target 111 1 export extcommunity vpn target 111 1 import extcommunity mpls lsr id 2 2 2 2 mpls mpls rsvp te mpls te cspf mpls ldp ip pool pool1 bas local vpn instance vpna gateway 16 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 section 0 16 0 0 2 16 ...

Page 1280: ...backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 nas logic ip 1 2 3 4 nas logic port gigabitethernet1 0 0 nas logic sysname huawei traffic backup interval 10 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 user vlan 50 remote backup profile profile1 bas access type layer2 subscriber authentication method web interface GigabitEthernet 2 0 0 ip address 10 0 2...

Page 1281: ... configuration example includes networking requirements configuration roadmap configuration procedure and configuration files Networking Requirements NOTE The X1 and X2 models of the NE80E 40E do not support the RUI protocol and therefore do not back up BRAS user information Configuring user information backup in direct and reachable VPN user tunnel protection mode is similar to that in VPN user t...

Page 1282: ... 0 2 24 GE2 0 1 10 0 2 2 24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure basic BAS functions so that users can log in The configurations on the two devices that back up each other are the same For details refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 2 Configure VPN instances on Router A and Router B and bind the VPN instances to the physi...

Page 1283: ...ession bfd quit Bind the interface to the VRRP backup group The sub interface GE 1 0 0 2 is used here Configure VRRP to monitor the BFD session status and network side interface status RouterA interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 0 0 2 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 10 ...

Page 1284: ...igure the protection path for the network side traffic to return for the VPN user vpna on Router A The configuration of Router B is similar to the configuration of Router A RouterA interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet3 0 0 ip binding vpn instance vpna RouterA GigabitEthernet3 0 0 ip address 10 1 1 6 255 255 255 0 RouterA GigabitEthernet3 0 0 quit RouterA remote backup service se...

Page 1285: ...l poolv4_yyz metric 10 r3 metric 10 r4 metric 20 remotev4 metric 10 ipv6 pool 1234 metric 10 iana_yyz metric 10 iapd_yyz metric 10 lo metric 10 loc_vpn metric 10 nd metric 10 pd metric 10 remote_del_yyz metric 10 remotev6_yyz metric 10 Failure ratio 100 Failure duration 0 min NAT instance nat1 Rbs ID 0 Protect type vpn instance Vpn instance vpna Vc lable 4294967295 Peer ip 10 1 1 7 Vrfid 3 Tunnel ...

Page 1286: ... 0 0 1 2 2 2 3 0002 0101 0108 108 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 2 0002 0101 0109 109 user lsh GE1 0 0 1 2 2 2 11 0002 0101 0110 Total users 10 End Configuration Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA ip pool pool1 bas local vpn instance vpna gateway 16 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 section 0 16 0 0 2 16 0 0 100 aaa domain userdomain1 authentication scheme default0 accounting scheme default0 ip po...

Page 1287: ...ernet 1 0 0 1 user vlan 50 remote backup profile profile1 bas access type layer2 subscriber authentication method web interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 undo shutdown ip binding vpn instance vpna ip address 10 1 1 6 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 opaque capability enable import route unr route policy p1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 0 0 0 0 255 network 22 22 22 22 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 ip ip prefix p1 i...

Page 1288: ...as logic ip 1 2 3 4 nas logic port gigabitethernet1 0 0 nas logic sysname huawei traffic backup interval 10 interface LoopBack1 ip address 88 88 88 88 255 255 255 255 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 user vlan 50 remote backup profile profile1 bas access type layer2 subscriber authentication method web interface gigabitethernet 3 0 0 undo shutdown ip binding vpn instance vpna ip address 10 1 1 7 ...

Page 1289: ...al is connected to BRAS1 and BRAS2 through a switch The two BRASs run VRRP to determine the master and backup status Both BRASs are configured so that users get online through the master BRAS Multicast two node hot backup is configured on both BRASs This feature allows users to smoothly restore IPTV services without re dialing up or changing a channel if the master BRAS fails Figure 11 15 Multicas...

Page 1290: ...2 is similar to the configuration on BRAS1 The configuration procedure on BRAS1 is used in this example For details about configurations on BRAS2 see the configuration file of BRAS2 Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data l VRRP parameters such as a VRID and a preemption delay l BFD parameters such as the local and remote discriminators and expected minimum inter...

Page 1291: ...IP address for a loopback interface of an RBS so that the route to the loopback interface can be advertised BRAS1 interface loopback0 BRAS1 loopback0 ip address 22 22 22 22 255 255 255 255 BRAS1 loopback0 quit Configure an RBS track a network side interface and bind the RBS to the address pool BRAS1 remote backup service service1 BRAS1 rm backup srv service1 peer 88 88 88 88 source 22 22 22 22 por...

Page 1292: ...y vrrp GigabitEthernet2 0 0 2 Virtual Router 1 State Backup Virtual IP 10 0 1 100 Master IP 10 0 1 1 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 120 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth Type NONE Virtual Mac 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp Track IF GigabitEthernet2 0 1 Priority reduced 50 IF State UP Config track link bfd down number 0 Track BFD 2 Ty...

Page 1293: ...e1 Backup ID 10 track protocol VRRP VRRP ID 1 VRRP Interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 2 Interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 State Slave Peer State Backup mode hot Slot Number 2 Card Number 0 Port Number 0 Traffic threshold 50 MB Traffic interval 10 minutes dhcp stb igmp copy enable End Configuration Files l Configuration file of BRAS1 sysname BRAS1 FTP server enable ipv6 router id 4 4 4 9 vlan batch 200 ...

Page 1294: ...as local gateway 18 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 section 0 18 0 0 2 18 0 0 100 dot1x template 1 aaa local user hello 163 com password irreversible cipher f P1yh T _sQ6 86_Is R YITd6B f it FXNd3Is _ local user hello 163 com service type HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Te...

Page 1295: ...de none authorization scheme default authorization scheme userdomain1 authorization mode none accounting scheme default0 accounting scheme default1 accounting scheme default accounting scheme userdomain1 accounting mode none domain default0 domain default1 domain default_admin domain default HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 ...

Page 1296: ...redirect ip nexthop 10 1 1 7 interface GigabitEthernet2 1 2 ip pool pool1 ip pool pool2 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras service type multicast backup id 10 remote backup service service1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface GigabitEthernet2 1 0 2 multicastbandwidth HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 ...

Page 1297: ...to undo shutdown ip address 190 2 5 151 255 255 0 0 interface GigabitEthernet2 1 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet2 1 0 1 pppoe server bind Virtual Template 1 igmp enable user vlan 50 remote backup profile profile1 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Techno...

Page 1298: ...erface GigabitEthernet2 1 2 reduced 50 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd session 1 peer interface GigabitEthernet2 1 1 undo shutdown ip address 200 2 5 151 255 255 255 0 pim sm interface GigabitEthernet2 1 2 undo shutdown ip address 10 1 1 6 255 255 255 0 pim sm HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confiden...

Page 1299: ...0 0 0 255 network 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 network 22 22 22 22 0 0 0 0 ip route static 190 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 190 2 1 1 ip route static 190 56 0 0 255 255 0 0 190 2 1 1 snmp agent snmp agent local engineid 000007DB7FFFFFFF000036F6 snmp agent sys info version HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confident...

Page 1300: ...multicast shaping local aaa server user log 163 com password irreversible cipher f P1yh T _sQ6 86_Is R YITd6B f it FXNd3Is _ user log 163 com ftp directory cfcard2 log user 11 isp1 password cipher uh z E0TW G_Gj return l Configuration file of BRAS2 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidenti...

Page 1301: ...her f P1yh T _sQ6 86_Is R YITd6B f it FXNd3Is _ local user hello 163 com service type ftp local user hello 163 com ftp directory cfcard local user hello 163 com state block fail times 3 interval 5 authentication scheme default0 authentication scheme default1 authentication mode local none authentication scheme default authentication mode local radius authentication scheme userdomain1 authenticatio...

Page 1302: ... pool pool1 ip pool pool2 remote backup service service1 peer 22 22 22 22 source 88 88 88 88 port 5000 track interface GigabitEthernet2 0 1 batch backup service type bras daily 02 05 00 protect redirect ip nexthop 10 1 1 6 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 2 ip pool pool1 ip pool pool2 remote backup profile profile1 service type bras service type multicast backup id 10 remote backup service service1 HU...

Page 1303: ...52 255 255 0 0 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 1 pppoe server bind Virtual Template 1 igmp enable user vlan 50 remote backup profile profile1 bas access type layer2 subscriber multicast copy by session interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 2 vlan type dot1q 200 ip address 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 0 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 M...

Page 1304: ... peer ip 10 0 1 1 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 commit ospf 1 import route unr area 0 0 0 0 network 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 network 100 2 5 0 0 0 0 255 network 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 network 88 88 88 88 0 0 0 0 ip route static 190 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 190 2 1 1 ip route static 190 56 0 0 255 255 0 0 190 2 1 1 snmp agent snmp agent local engineid 000007DB7FFFFFFF00003769 snmp agent sys info versio...

Page 1305: ...ervices As these services are the major services that operators provide and have high user experience requirements L2TP tunnels must support high reliability L2TP two node hot backup in addition to BRAS user information backup is required on the master and slave routers On the network as shown in Figure 11 16 users access LAC1 and LAC2 through a LAN switch LSW The two LACs run VRRP to determine th...

Page 1306: ...uration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure routes to ensure IP connectivity between devices then configure the route policy on LAC1 and LAC2 For details see HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide IP Routing 2 Configure basic user access functions and ensure that the two LACs have the same configuration For details see HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuratio...

Page 1307: ...address to each loopback interface and configure a VT interface and a BAS interface Router system view Router sysname LAC1 Assign an IP address to a loopback interface directly connecting LAC1 to the LNS so that the route to the loopback interface can be advertised LAC1 interface loopback1 LAC1 loopback1 ip address 7 7 7 7 32 LAC1 loopback1 quit Assign an IP address to a loopback interface directl...

Page 1308: ...l timer hello 200 LAC1 l2tp lac1 quit Configure a RADIUS server LAC1 radius server group radius1 LAC1 radius radius1 radius server authentication 20 20 20 1 1812 LAC1 radius radius1 radius server accounting 20 20 20 1 1813 LAC1 radius radius1 radius server shared key itellin LAC1 radius radius1 quit Configure a domain to which users belong LAC1 aaa LAC1 aaa domain domain1 LAC1 aaa domain domain1 l...

Page 1309: ...opback3 ip address 10 0 0 1 32 LAC1 loopback3 quit Configure an RBS LAC1 remote backup service s1 LAC1 rm backup srv s1 peer 10 0 0 2 source 10 0 0 1 port 4500 LAC1 rm backup srv s1 quit Configure an RBP for backing up BRAS user information and L2TP services LAC1 remote backup profile p1 LAC1 rm backup prf p1 peer backup hot LAC1 rm backup prf p1 vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 2 LAC1 rm...

Page 1310: ...FD session state UP Track BFD 3 type peer BFD session state UP Create time 2011 08 02 16 13 43 Last change time 2011 08 04 12 01 58 After successfully configuring L2TP two node hot backup run the display remote backup profile command on each LAC The RBS type is bras l2tp LAC1 is in the Master state LAC2 is in the Slave state lac1 display remote backup profile p1 Profile Index 0x800 Profile Name p1...

Page 1311: ...fcard local user b password simple Huawei 1232 local user b service type ftp local user c password simple Huawei 1233 local user c service type ftp authentication scheme default1 authentication mode radius local domain domain1 l2tp group lac1 radius server group radius1 authentication scheme default1 accounting scheme default1 remote backup service s1 peer 10 0 0 2 source 10 0 0 1 port 4500 remote...

Page 1312: ...7 7 7 7 255 255 255 255 interface LoopBack2 ip address 8 8 8 8 255 255 255 255 interface LoopBack3 ip address 10 0 0 1 255 255 255 255 l2tp enable l2tp group lac1 tunnel name lac1 start l2tp ip 3 3 3 3 tunnel authentication tunnel password simple Huawei 123 tunnel source loopback1 rui tunnel timer hello 200 bfd bfd net bind peer ip 10 0 0 2 discriminator local 3 discriminator remote 3 commit ospf ...

Page 1313: ... backup id 10 remote backup service s1 interface virtual template 1 ppp authentication mode chap interface GigabitEthernet0 0 0 speed auto duplex auto undo shutdown ip address 128 3 150 241 255 255 0 0 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 0 1 pppoe server bind virtual template 1 user vlan 1 100 remote backup profile p1 bas access type layer2 subscriber authentication method ppp interface gigabitethernet ...

Page 1314: ...ration roadmap This configuration example only applies to the VSUI 20 A board Networking Requirements On the network shown in Figure 11 17 users access Routers A and B through a LAN Switch LSW VRRP is used between Routers A and B to back up information about NAT and non NAT users and distributed NAT is configured on Routers A and B for NAT users If Router A Router B or its network side link fails ...

Page 1315: ...9 2 10 0 3 2 24 GE 1 1 5 10 1 1 2 24 Loopback100 2 2 2 2 32 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Create a NAT instance 2 Configure NAT user group information 3 Configure address pools and an access domain for non NAT users 4 Configure a NAT traffic distribution policy 5 Configure a NAT conversion policy that needs to be bound only to the master NAT address pool 6 Configu...

Page 1316: ...nce bind NAT service boards to the NAT instance and specify public address pools On Router A create a NAT instance named nat1 bind the master and slave NAT service boards to the NAT instance set the master public address pool name to 1 set an address range from 90 1 1 1 to 90 1 1 10 for the master public address pool set the slave public address pool name to 2 bak and set an address range from 96 ...

Page 1317: ...outerA ip pool nat 1 quit RouterA ip pool nat 2bak bas local RouterA ip pool nat 2bak gateway 173 17 129 1 16 RouterA ip pool nat 2bak section 0 173 17 129 2 173 17 129 254 RouterA ip pool nat 2bak quit On Router B create a NAT user group named g2 set the master address pool name to nat 2 and configure the gateway address 173 17 129 1 16 and an address range from 173 17 129 2 to 173 17 129 254 for...

Page 1318: ...4 RouterA ip pool hsi 2bak quit On Router B configure master and backup address pools Set the master address pool name to hsi 2 and configure the gateway address to 120 100 100 1 24 and an address range from 120 100 100 2 to 120 100 100 254 for the master address pool Set the backup address pool name to hsi 2bak and configure the gateway address to 100 100 100 1 24 and an address range from 100 10...

Page 1319: ...RouterA traffic policy p1 inbound 6 Configure a NAT conversion policy The system directly performs the NAT operation for the packets and does not match packets imported from interface boards to NAT boards with the ACL rule HUAWEI nat instance nat1 HUAWEI nat instance nat1 nat outbound any address group 1 HUAWEI nat instance nat1 quit Step 5 Establish a BFD session at the access side to rapidly det...

Page 1320: ...vrid 2 preempt mode timer delay 600 RouterA GigabitEthernet1 1 13 1 quit On Router B configure VRRP backup group 1 for NAT users and VRRP backup group 2 for non NAT users configure the two VRRP backup groups to use the default priority value 10 and configure VRRP to track BFD sessions RouterB interface gigabitethernet 1 1 9 1 RouterB GigabitEthernet1 1 9 1 vlan type dot1q 100 RouterB GigabitEthern...

Page 1321: ...uit On Router B configure an RBP named p1 for NAT users and an RBP named p2 for non NAT users set the remote backup ID to 10 for p1 and to 20 for p2 and configure NAS parameters for p1 and p2 RouterB remote backup profile p1 RouterB rm backup prf p1 vrrp id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1 1 9 1 RouterB rm backup prf p1 backup id 10 remote backup service s1 RouterB rm backup prf p1 service type bras ...

Page 1322: ...ult domain authentication hsi Step 10 Verify the configuration View the s1 configuration on Router A RouterA display remote backup service s1 Service Index 3 Service Name s1 TCP State Connected Peer ip 2 2 2 2 Source ip 1 1 1 1 TCP Port 2046 Track BFD Track interface0 GigabitEthernet1 1 12 Last up time 2012 05 21 11 12 23 ip pool poolv4_yyz metric 10 r3 metric 10 r4 metric 20 remotev4 metric 10 ip...

Page 1323: ...ion on Router B RouterB display remote backup service s1 Service Index 3 Service Name s1 TCP State Connected Peer ip 1 1 1 1 Source ip 2 2 2 2 TCP Port 2046 Track BFD Track interface0 GigabitEthernet1 1 8 Last up time 2012 05 21 11 18 13 ip pool hsi 1bak metric 20 hsi 2 metric 10 Failure ratio 100 Failure duration 0 NAT instance nat2 Rbs ID 3 Protect type ip redirect Next hop 10 1 1 1 Vlanid 0 Pee...

Page 1324: ...ion Files l Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA user group g1 slot 1 bas enable nat instance nat1 add slot 2 master add slot 4 slave nat address group 1 section 0 90 1 1 1 90 1 1 10 nat address group 2 bak rui slave section 0 96 1 1 1 96 1 1 10 nat outbound any address group 1 bfd acl number 6100 rule 1 permit ip source user group g1 traffic classifier c1 operator or if match acl 6100 t...

Page 1325: ...1 port 2046 track interface GigabitEthernet1 1 12 protect redirect ip nexthop 10 1 1 2 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 11 ip pool hsi 1 metric 10 ip pool hsi 2bak metric 20 nat instance nat1 remote backup profile p1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service s1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 13 1 nas logic port Gigabitethernet 1 0 0 nas logic sysname nat nas logic ip...

Page 1326: ...domain authentication nat1 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 18 2 user vlan 301 400 remote backup profile p2 bas access type layer2 subscriber default domain authentication hsi interface LoopBack100 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 return l Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB user group g2 slot 1 bas enable nat instance nat1 add slot 2 master add slot 4 slave nat address group 2 section 0 ...

Page 1327: ... 2 remote backup service s1 peer 1 1 1 1 source 2 2 2 2 port 2046 track interface GigabitEthernet1 1 8 protect redirect ip nexthop 10 1 1 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 5 ip pool hsi 1bak metric 20 ip pool hsi 2 metric 10 nat instance nat1 remote backup profile p1 service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service s1 peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 9 1 nas logic port Gigab...

Page 1328: ...ddress 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 bfd bfd bind peer ip 111 1 1 7 discriminator local 222 discriminator remote 111 commit return 11 10 14 Example for Configuring IPv6 Dual Device Hot Backup This section provides an example for configuring IPv6 dual device hot backup Networking Requirements NOTE The X1 and X2 models of NE80E 40Es do not support RUI therefore they do not support IPv6 dual device hot bac...

Page 1329: ... IP Routing 2 Configure basic user access functions and ensure that the two BRASs have the same configuration For details see HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide User Access 3 Establish a multi device backup platform Configure an RBS on the network side of the master and backup routers BRAS1 and BRAS2 BRAS1 is the master and BRAS2 is the backup 4 Configure a VRRP backup group on the...

Page 1330: ...ck the BFD session Configure a VRRP link BFD session to rapidly detect faults in interfaces or links and trigger a master backup VRRP switchover BRAS1 bfd zwn1 bind peer ip 10 1 1 2 BRAS1 bfd session bfd acc discriminator local 8 BRAS1 bfd session bfd acc discriminator remote 6 BRAS1 bfd session bfd acc commit BRAS1 bfd session bfd acc quit Configure a VRRP backup group on GE 1 0 0 1 and configure...

Page 1331: ...p tunnel for all instance peer ip 1 1 1 6 BRAS1 rm backup srv sd quit Step 5 Verify the configuration After completing the configurations run the display vrrp command on each BRAS to view the master and backup VRRP status BRAS1 is in the Master state its BFD session is UP BRAS2 is in the Backup state BRAS1 display vrrp Eth Trunk1 2 Virtual Router 1 State Master Virtual IP 10 1 1 100 Master IP 10 1...

Page 1332: ...vice bras Remote backup service rui Backup ID 101 track protocol VRRP VRRP ID 1 VRRP Interface Gigabitethernet 3 1 10 1 Access conctrol State Master Peer State Slave Interface GigabitEthernet3 1 10 333 Backup mode hot Slot Number 3 Card Number 1 Port Number 10 Traffic threshold 50 MB Traffic interval 10 minutes BRAS2 display remote backup profile z2 Profile Index 0x1001 Profile Name z2 Service bra...

Page 1333: ...ocol DHCPv6 IPv6 configuration information allocation protocol DHCPv6 User IPv6 lease 2012 09 21 20 12 06 2012 09 24 20 12 06 Remain IPv6 lease 259018 User MSIDSN name EAP user No MD5 end No MTU 1500 IPv6 MTU 1500 IPv6 Vpn Instance User access type IPOE User authentication type Bind authentication Server template of second acct Agent Circuit Id Agent Remote Id Access line id Information dhcpv6 Cur...

Page 1334: ...d inbound 0 kbyte min Ipv6 Realtime speed outbound 0 kbyte min Link bandwidth auto adapt Disable UpPriority Unchangeable DownPriority Unchangeable Multicast profile Multicast profile ipv6 Max Multicast List Number 4 IGMP enable Yes User Group Next hop Policy route IPV6 address If flow info contain l2 head Yes Flow Statistic Up Yes Flow Statistic Down Yes Up packets number high low 0 0 Up bytes num...

Page 1335: ... information allocation protocol DHCPv6 User IPv6 lease 2012 09 21 20 15 23 2012 09 24 20 15 23 Remain IPv6 lease 258703 User MSIDSN name EAP user No MD5 end No MTU 1500 IPv6 MTU 1500 IPv6 Vpn Instance User access type IPOE User authentication type No authentication Server template of second acct Agent Circuit Id Agent Remote Id Access line id Information dhcpv6 Current authen method No authentica...

Page 1336: ...utbound 0 kbyte min Link bandwidth auto adapt Disable UpPriority Unchangeable DownPriority Unchangeable Multicast profile Multicast profile ipv6 Max Multicast List Number 4 IGMP enable Yes User Group Next hop Policy route IPV6 address If flow info contain l2 head Yes Flow Statistic Up Yes Flow Statistic Down Yes Up packets number high low 0 0 Up bytes number high low 0 0 Down packets number high l...

Page 1337: ... HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 11 Multi node Backup Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 1320 ...

Page 1338: ...es 12 2 Configuration Process The following figure shows the overall HA configuration process 12 3 HA Backup Feature Configuration 12 4 HA Backup Configuration Scenarios 12 5 HA Service Feature Configuration 12 6 Configuration Examples HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright ...

Page 1339: ...e replaced by a pure IPv6 Internet IPv4 and IPv6 will coexist for a long time before a pure IPv6 Internet is built During transition from IPv4 to IPv6 NAT can mitigate IPv4 address shortage Traditional NAT is deployed on the CPE to translate addresses for a few users CGN is deployed on the carrier network to translate addresses for a large number of users Therefore CGN devices must have higher cap...

Page 1340: ...ere the number of IPv6 users and traffic volume is large Purpose CGN translates addresses for a large number of users so it is also called LSN If no protection measure is taken a CGN fault can affect a large number of users More users are affected in centralized mode than in distributed mode To enhance reliability of CGN devices HA can be used to implement backup between CGN cards on a single devi...

Page 1341: ...ded In the following HA backup introduction and configuration hot standby is used 12 1 3 HA Backup Scenarios HA backup can be configured between service boards on a single device or two devices Backup Between Service Boards on a Single CGN Device When a CGN device has multiple service boards active and standby service boards can be configured on the CGN device for backup The standby service board ...

Page 1342: ...s over the services Services are not interrupted during the switchover and users do not know the fault NOTE VRRP determines the active standby status of members in an HA backup group between two CGN devices As shown in the following figure HA backup is configured between CPU0s on two service boards of two CGN devices Figure 12 3 Backup between two CGN devices 12 1 4 HA Service Features Supported b...

Page 1343: ...vate2 CPE CGN HA implements backup of user entries session entries and address pool entries for the NAT444 service on CGN devices DS Lite Feature DS Lite is an IPv4 over IPv6 tunnel technology When dual stack is deployed on CPE and CGN devices IPv4 users IPv6 users and dual stack users can traverse the IPv6 network over the IPv4 over IPv6 tunnel to access the IPv4 network HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E R...

Page 1344: ... HA implements backup of user entries session entries and address pool entries for the DS Lite service on CGN devices 12 2 Configuration Process The following figure shows the overall HA configuration process HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd ...

Page 1345: ...up Creating and configuring a VRRP Backup Group Binding an HA Backup Group to a VRRP Backup Group Configuring Service HA Backu Configu HA Backup C Scena HA Backup Between Service Boards on a Single CGN Device Scenario of HA Backup Between Two CGN Devices Configuring Association Between HA and VRRP HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Iss...

Page 1346: ...g service boards inserted Data Preparation None 12 3 2 Enabling HA Hot Standby This section describes how to enable HA hot standby in the system view Context When HA hot standby is enabled the standby service board backs up user entries session entries and address pool entries from the active service board Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run service ha hot back...

Page 1347: ...ultiple slots multiple service boards can be configured The CGN device can be configured with 1 1 backup of service boards when the number of users is not large The active service board processes services and the standby service board does not work The active service board backs up user entries session entries and address pool entries to the standby service board When faults occur on the active se...

Page 1348: ... Backup delay 5 Optional Active Standby revertive switching delay Creating an HA Backup Group This section describes how to create an HA backup group in the system view Context Only after an HA backup group is created members in the HA backup group and the active standby relationship can be configured Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run service location service...

Page 1349: ...t slot id card card id engine engine id The active and standby service boards with the specified slots and CPUs are configured NOTE In the scenario of HA backup between service boards on a single CGN device the backup function cannot be configured on different CPUs of the same service board Therefore IDs of the active and standby slots where CPUs locate must be different End Optional Setting the B...

Page 1350: ...kup between service boards on a single device Procedure l Run the display service ha global information hot backup state delay time preempt time command to check global HA configurations including the hot backup status backup delay time and the switchback time l Run the display service location service location id command to check the HA backup group configuration End Example l Run the display ser...

Page 1351: ... and users do not know the fault l When multiple CGN devices are deployed 1 1 backup of service boards can be configured on two CGN devices when the number of users is not large The active service board processes services and the standby service board does not work The active service board backs up user entries session entries and address pool entries to the standby service board When faults occur...

Page 1352: ...5 Index of the VRRP backup group 6 Virtual IP address of the VRRP backup group 7 Priorities of members in the VRRP backup group Creating an HA Backup Group This section describes how to create an HA backup group in the system view Context Only after an HA backup group is created members in the HA backup group can be configured and a VRRP backup group can be bound to the HA backup group The followi...

Page 1353: ...layed NOTE Values of service location id must be the same on the active and standby CGN devices Step 3 Run location slot slot id card card id engine engine id The active and standby service boards with the specified slots and CPUs are configured End Configuring the VRRP Backup Tunnel This section describes how to configure a VRRP backup tunnel for the HA backup group in the service location view i...

Page 1354: ...section describes how to create a VRRP backup group in the interface view Context The following operations must be performed on the active and standby CGN devices Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface interface type interface number The interface view is displayed Step 3 Run vrrp vrid virtual router id virtual ip virtual address A VRRP backup group is c...

Page 1355: ...must be the mVRRP backup group Step 4 Run vrrp vrid virtual router id priority priority value The priority of the CGN device in the VRRP backup group is set NOTE CGN devices in the same VRRP backup group must use different priorities The CGN device with a higher priority functions as the active device End Binding an HA Backup Group to a VRRP Backup Group This section describes how to bind a HA bac...

Page 1356: ...s how to configure association between HA and VRRP in the interface view Context After association between HA and VRRP is configured VRRP tracks HA status in real time and determines whether to perform an active standby switchover The following operations must be performed on the active and standby CGN devices Procedure Step 1 Run system view The system view is displayed Step 2 Run interface inter...

Page 1357: ...l Run the display service location service location id command on the active CGN device to check the HA backup group configuration HUAWEI display service location 242 service location 242 service location 242 Backup scene type inter box Location slot ID 1 engine ID 0 Remote backup interface GigabitEthernet0 1 1 Peer 10 132 1 1 Vrrp ID 242 Vrrp bind interface GigabitEthernet0 1 1 Vrrp state master ...

Page 1358: ...iew the VRRP backup group configuration HUAWEI display vrrp 242 GigabitEthernet0 1 1 Virtual Router 242 State Master Virtual IP 10 132 1 100 Master IP 10 132 1 143 PriorityRun 100 PriorityConfig 100 MasterPriority 100 Preempt YES Delay Time 0 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth type NONE Virtual MAC 0000 5e00 01f2 Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp Backup forward enabled Fast resume disabled Tra...

Page 1359: ...he service instance group 3 Index of the configured HA backup group 12 5 2 Configuring Service Instances This section describes how to configure service instances in the system view Context After service instances are created they can be bound to a service instance group HA supports the NAT444 and DS Lite service features NAT and DS Lite instances are created as needed Procedure Step 1 Run system ...

Page 1360: ...service instance group view is displayed End 12 5 4 Binding Service Instances to a Service Instance Group This section describes how to binding service instances to a service instance group Context A service instance is bound to a HA backup group by binding the service instance to a service instance group and binding the service instance group to the HA backup group HA supports the NAT444 and DS L...

Page 1361: ...bound to the service instance group End 12 5 5 Binding a Service Instance Group to an HA Backup Group This section describes how to bind a service instance group to an HA backup group in the service instance group view Context A service instance is bound to a HA backup group by binding the service instance to a service instance group and binding the service instance group to the HA backup group Pr...

Page 1362: ...test service instance group test service location 1 l Run the display nat instance instance name command to check the NAT instance configuration HUAWEI display nat instance nat instance name nat id 1 service instance group test l Run the display ds lite instance instance name command to check the DS Lite instance configuration HUAWEI display ds lite instance dslite instance name dslite id 1 servic...

Page 1363: ...e refer to the NAT Configuration site 5 Create a service instance group 6 Bind the NAT instance to the service instance group 7 Bind the service instance group to the HA backup group Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data No Data 1 Index of the HA backup group 2 CPU number and number of the slot where the CPU locates on the active service board slot 1 and CPU0 a...

Page 1364: ...iew HUAWEI nat instance nat id 1 Step 5 Create a service instance group Create a service instance group named slz and enter the service instance group view HUAWEI service instance group slz Step 6 Bind the NAT instance to the service instance group Bind the nat NAT instance to the slz service instance group HUAWEI nat instance nat service instance group slz Step 7 Bind the service instance group t...

Page 1365: ...working diagrams scenario requirements configuration roadmap data preparation configuration procedure and configuration files Networking Requirements In centralized deployment mode independent CGN devices CGN1 and CGN2 are deployed near two CRs on a MAN A VRRP tunnel is established between GE interfaces on CGN1 and CGN2 Users want to implement HA backup on CGN1 and CGN2 for the NAT service and use...

Page 1366: ...rvice board installed in slot 2 Users want to implement HA backup between CPU0 in slot 1 of CGN1 and CPU0 in slot 2 of CGN2 for the NAT service Figure 12 9 Scenario of HA backup between two CGN devices HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 1349 ...

Page 1367: ...es on the active CGN device CGN1 slot 1 and CPU0 are used here 3 CPU number and number of the slot where the CPU locates on the standby CGN device CGN2 slot 2 and CPU0 are used here 4 Numbers of the interfaces through which a VRRP tunnel is established between active and standby CGNs 5 IP addresses of the interfaces on the active and standby CGN devices for establishing a VRRP tunnel 6 Index of th...

Page 1368: ...p group 1 as the mVRRP and set the priority of CGN1 in VRRP backup group 1 to 200 and set the VRRP active standby revertive switching delay time 300s CGN1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 1 1 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 1 1 1 3 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 priority 200 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 preempt ...

Page 1369: ... 1 GigabitEthernet 1 1 1 Virtual Router 1 State Master Virtual IP 1 1 1 3 Master IP 1 1 1 1 PriorityRun 200 PriorityConfig 200 MasterPriority 200 Preempt YES Delay Time 300 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth type NONE Virtual MAC 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp Backup forward disabled Fast resume disabled Track Service location 1 Priority reduced 60 Service location state UP C...

Page 1370: ...tion 1 Priority reduced 60 Service location state UP Create time 2011 10 18 11 26 40 UTC 08 00 Last change time 2011 10 18 14 02 22 UTC 08 00 Step 5 On CGN1 and CGN2 bind HA backup group 1 to VRRP backup group 1 On CGN1 bind HA backup group 1 to VRRP backup group 1 CGN1 service location 1 CGN1 service location 1 vrrp vrid 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 1 1 CGN1 service location 1 quit On CGN2 bind ...

Page 1371: ...formation Vrrp state in the command output reflects the status of HA backup group 1 which must be consistent with the CGN s VRRP status Batch backup state in the command output indicates whether batch backup has been finished CGN1 display service location 1 service location 1 Backup scene type inter box Location slot ID 1 engine ID 0 Remote backup interface GigabitEthernet1 1 1 Peer 1 1 1 2 Vrrp I...

Page 1372: ...GN1 and CGN2 to view NAT configurations CGN1 display nat instance nat nat instance nat id 1 service instance group slz nat address group 1 group id 1 202 38 160 100 202 38 160 105 nat outbound any address group 1 CGN2 display nat instance nat nat instance nat id 1 service instance group slz nat address group 1 group id 1 202 38 160 100 202 38 160 105 nat outbound any address group 1 End Configurat...

Page 1373: ...track service location 1 reduce 60 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down return 12 6 3 Example for Configuring HA Backup Between Two CGN Devices for the NAT Service Distributed Deployment Mode This section provides an example for configuring HA backup between two CGN devices deployed in distributed mode for the NAT service including networking requirements networking diagrams scenario requirements conf...

Page 1374: ...p between CPU0 in slot 1 of CGN1 and CPU0 in slot 2 of CGN2 for the NAT service Figure 12 11 Scenario of HA backup between two CGN devices NOTE l VSUF 160 service board which add two cards can support 4 CPU l VSUF 80 service board which add one card can support 2 CPU HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprie...

Page 1375: ...RUI protocol to configure user BRAS information backup between two CGN devices 12 Configure user side VRRP between CGN1 CGN2 device and SWITCH device Data Preparation To complete the configuration you need the following data No Data 1 Index of the HA backup group 2 CPU number and number of the slot where the CPU locates on the active CGN device CGN1 slot 1 and CPU0 are used here 3 CPU number and n...

Page 1376: ... hot standby HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname CGN2 CGN2 service ha hot backup enable Step 2 On CGN1 and CGN2 create an HA backup group and configure members in the HA backup group Configure a VRRP backup tunnel between two CGN devices On CGN1 create HA backup group 1 add CPU0 in slot 1 to HA backup group 1 configure GE 1 0 0 as the VRRP outbound interface and set the IP address of the peer end to...

Page 1377: ... quit Step 4 On CGN1 and CGN2 configure association between HA and VRRP On CGN1 enter the GE 1 0 0 interface view and configure association between HA backup group 1 and VRRP backup group 1 CGN1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 0 0 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 vrrp vrid 1 track service location 1 reduce 60 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 0 0 quit On CGN2 enter the GE 1 0 1 interface view and configure association b...

Page 1378: ...2 0 1 10 bas access type layer2 subscriber default domain pre authentication natbras authentication natbras CGN2 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 10 quit Step 9 Configure user information include user group natbras IP pool natbras domain natbras and AAA on the two CGN devices Bind user group to the NAT instance nat on the two CGN devices Configure user information include user group natbras IP pool natbras do...

Page 1379: ... service natbras CGN1 rm backup prf natbras peer backup hot CGN1 rm backup prf natbras vrrp id 2 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 2 CGN1 rm backup prf natbras quit Configure remote backup profile on CGN2 CGN2 remote backup profile natbras CGN2 rm backup prf natbras service type bras CGN2 rm backup prf natbras backup id 10 remote backup service natbras CGN2 rm backup prf natbras peer backup hot CGN2 ...

Page 1380: ...tual ip 1 1 1 3 vrrp vrid 1 priority 200 vrrp vrid 1 track service location 1 reduce 60 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 300 user group natbras ip pool natbras bas local gateway 192 168 0 1 255 255 0 0 section 0 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 254 aaa domain natbras authentication scheme default0 accounting scheme default0 ip pool natbras user group natbras bind nat inst...

Page 1381: ...vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 1 1 1 3 vrrp vrid 1 priority 150 vrrp vrid 1 track service location 1 reduce 60 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down user group natbras ip pool natbras bas local gateway 192 168 0 1 255 255 0 0 section 0 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 254 aaa domain natbras authentication scheme default0 accounting scheme default0 ip pool natbras user group natbras bind nat instance nat remote backup ser...

Page 1382: ...irements l The two CGNs establish a VRRP channel through GE interfaces l The two CGNs work in master backup mode and their master backup status is determined by VRRP l HA is associated with VRRP l Inter chassis HA backup is provided for DS Lite services Residential users using private IPv4 addresses access an IPv6 MAN over an IPv4 over IPv6 tunnel between the CPE and CGN CR In this scenario the CP...

Page 1383: ...ted in slot 1 A service board is installed on CGN2 and is located in slot 2 Configure the two CGNs to implement HA backup for DS Lite services between CPU 0 in CGN1 s slot 1 and CPU 0 in CGN2 s slot 2 Figure 12 13 Inter chassis HA backup Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Is...

Page 1384: ...ies of VRRP backup group members 9 Preemption delay 10 Name of a service instance group 11 Name and ID of a DS Lite instance Procedure Step 1 Create and configure a VRRP backup group on CGN1 and CGN2 Enter the GE 3 1 7 interface view on CGN1 create VRRP backup group 10 and set the virtual IP address of the VRRP backup group to 10 0 0 3 Configure the VRRP backup group as an mVRRP backup group and e...

Page 1385: ...1 location slot 1 engine 0 CGN1 service location 21 remote backup interface GigabitEthernet 3 1 7 peer 10 0 0 2 CGN1 service location 21 quit Create HA backup group 21 on CGN2 add CPU 0 in slot 2 to the group and set the VRRP outbound interface to GE 3 1 7 and the peer IP address to 10 0 0 1 CGN2 service location 21 CGN2 service location 21 location slot 2 engine 0 CGN2 service location 21 remote ...

Page 1386: ... the port range to 4096 Configure a DS Lite address pool named group1 in dslite1 and configure an address section for the DS Lite address pool Set the DS Lite action to any so that traffic does not need to match any ACL rule and DS Lite translation is performed for traffic using addresses from the DS Lite address pool Configure local and remote IP addresses in dslite1 enable DS Lite ALG for all pr...

Page 1387: ...CGN1 interface GigabitEthernet3 1 7 ip address 10 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 10 virtual ip 10 0 0 3 admin vrrp vrid 10 ignore if down vrrp vrid 10 priority 150 vrrp vrid 10 preempt mode timer delay 400 vrrp vrid 10 track interface GigabitEthernet3 1 6 reduced 50 vrrp vrid 10 track interface GigabitEthernet1 0 1 reduced 50 vrrp vrid 10 track service location 21 reduced 50 service location 21 loc...

Page 1388: ... development At this stage terminals support only IPv6 access but IPv4 access is required You can deploy NAT64 to provide IPv4 access This section provides an example for configuring inter chassis HA backup for NAT64 services in centralized deployment scenarios Networking Requirements As shown in the following figure in centralized deployment scenarios CGN1 and CGN2 are deployed around two CRs on ...

Page 1389: ... in slot 2 Configure the two CGNs to implement HA backup for NAT64 services between CPU 0 in CGN1 s slot 1 and CPU 0 in CGN2 s slot 2 Figure 12 15 Inter chassis HA backup Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Hua...

Page 1390: ...ce board resides 1 number of the CPU in slot 1 0 3 ID of the slot in which CGN2 s service board resides 2 number of the CPU in slot 2 0 4 Backup channel of the HA backup group CGN1 GE 1 1 1 CGN2 GE 1 1 2 5 VRRP interfaces on CGN1 and CGN2 6 IP addresses of VRRP interfaces on CGN1 and CGN2 7 ID of a VRRP backup group 8 Virtual IP address of the VRRP backup group 9 Priorities of VRRP backup group me...

Page 1391: ...VRRP backup group to 200 and set the preemption delay to 300s CGN1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 1 1 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 ip address 1 1 1 1 24 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 1 1 1 3 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down ignore if down CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 priority 200 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 300 CGN1...

Page 1392: ...Ethernet 1 1 1 Virtual Router 1 State Master Virtual IP 1 1 1 3 Master IP 1 1 1 1 PriorityRun 200 PriorityConfig 200 MasterPriority 200 Preempt YES Delay Time 300 s TimerRun 1 s TimerConfig 1 s Auth type NONE Virtual MAC 0000 5e00 0101 Check TTL YES Config type admin vrrp Backup forward disabled Fast resume disabled Track Service location 1 Priority reduced 60 Service location state UP Create time...

Page 1393: ...on 1 Priority reduced 60 Service location state UP Create time 2011 10 18 11 26 40 UTC 08 00 Last change time 2011 10 18 14 02 22 UTC 08 00 Step 5 Bind the HA backup group to the VRRP backup group on CGN1 and CGN2 Bind HA backup group 1 to VRRP backup group 1 on CGN1 CGN1 service location 1 CGN1 service location 1 vrrp vrid 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 1 1 CGN1 service location 1 quit Bind HA bac...

Page 1394: ...iew HA information Vrrp state in the command output reflects the status of HA backup group 1 which must be consistent with the CGN s VRRP status Batch backup state in the command output indicates whether batch backup has been finished CGN1 display service location 1 service location 1 Backup scene type inter box Location slot ID 1 engine ID 0 Remote backup interface GigabitEthernet1 1 1 Peer 1 1 1...

Page 1395: ... instance nat64 service instance group nat64 CGN2 nat64 instance nat64 nat64 prefix 2002 1 prefix length 96 1 CGN2 nat64 instance nat64 nat64 address group 1 group id 1 202 38 160 100 202 38 160 105 CGN2 nat64 instance nat64 nat64 outbound any address group 1 Run the display nat64 instance nat64 command on CGN1 and CGN2 to view NAT64 configurations CGN1 display nat64 instance nat64 nat64 instance ...

Page 1396: ...vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 300 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down return CGN2 configuration file sysname CGN2 service ha hot backup enable service location 1 location slot 2 engine 0 remote backup interface GigabitEthernet 1 1 2 peer 1 1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 1 2 service instance group nat64 service location 1 nat64 instance nat64 id 1 service instance group nat64 nat64 pr...

Page 1397: ...t synchronize with the master device in the VRRP backup group Figure 12 16 L2NAT service backup between two CGN devices Distributed Deployment Mode CGN1 CGN2 CR GE3 0 0 GE3 0 1 GE2 0 0 192 168 2 10 GE2 0 1 192 168 2 100 IP MAN SWITCH PC1 PC2 User Side VRRP Virtual ip 192 168 2 200 Usage Scenario CGN1 is equipped with one service board which is installed in slot 1 CGN2 is equipped with one service ...

Page 1398: ...nfigure user information user group IP address pool user domain and AAA domain and bind the user group to the L2NAT instance 6 Configure a remote backup service RBS and bind it to the L2NAT instance 7 Configure a user side VRRP backup group for CGN1 CGN2 and the switch 8 Configure a user side VRRP backup group for CGN1 CGN2 and bind it to the HA backup group 9 Configure a user side VRRP for CGN1 C...

Page 1399: ...N device 14 Switchback delay time of the user side VRRP backup group on each CGN device Procedure Step 1 Create an HA backup group on each CGN device Create HA backup group 1 on CGN1 and bind it to engine 0 in slot 1 CGN1 system view CGN1 service location 1 CGN1 service location 1 location slot 1 engine 0 CGN1 service location 1 quit Create HA backup group 1 on CGN2 and bind it to engine 0 in slot...

Page 1400: ...L2NAT instance on CGN1 CGN1 user group natbras CGN1 ip pool natbras bas local CGN1 ip pool natbras gateway 192 168 0 1 255 255 0 0 CGN1 ip pool natbras section 0 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 254 CGN1 ip pool natbras quit CGN1 aaa CGN1 aaa domain natbras CGN1 aaa domain natbras authentication scheme default0 CGN1 aaa domain natbras accounting scheme default0 CGN1 aaa domain natbras ip pool natbras CGN1 aa...

Page 1401: ...0 0 2 quit Configure a user side VRRP backup group for CGN2 and the switch CGN2 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 1 2 CGN2 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 2 vlan type dot1q 2002 CGN2 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 2 ip address 192 168 2 100 255 255 255 0 CGN2 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 2 vrrp vrid 2 virtual ip 192 168 2 200 CGN2 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 2 admin vrrp vrid 2 ignore if down CGN2 GigabitEthernet2 0 1 2 vrrp vrid 2 prior...

Page 1402: ...10 CGN1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 user vlan 2010 CGN1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 remote backup profile natbras CGN1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 bas CGN1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 bas access type layer2 subscriber default domain pre authentication natbras authentication natbras CGN1 GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 quit Configure a user side sub interface on CGN2 CGN2 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 1 10 CGN2 GigabitEthe...

Page 1403: ...2 168 2 200 admin vrrp vrid 2 ignore if down vrrp vrid 2 priority 150 vrrp vrid 2 preempt mode timer delay 900 vrrp vrid 2 track service location 1 reduced 50 vrrp vrid 2 track interface GigabitEthernet3 0 0 reduced 50 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 0 10 user vlan 2010 remote backup profile natbras bas access type layer2 subscriber default domain authentication natbras return CGN2 configuration file...

Page 1404: ...10 remote backup profile natbras bas access type layer2 subscriber default domain authentication natbras return 12 6 7 Example for Configuring Inter chassis HA Backup for VPN NAT Services in Centralized Deployment Scenarios This section provides an example for configuring inter chassis HA backup for VPN NAT services in centralized deployment scenarios Networking Requirements As shown in Figure 12 ...

Page 1405: ... 1 172 16 5 1 24 GE1 1 2 172 16 5 2 24 Scenario Requirements CGN1 is equipped with one service board which is installed in slot 1 CGN2 is equipped with one service board which is installed in slot 1 L2NAT services are backed up between CPU0 in slot 1 on CGN1 and CPU0 in slot 1 on CGN2 NOTE l The VSUF 160 can house two subcards and supports a maximum of four CPUs l The VSUF 80 can house one subcard...

Page 1406: ...nd traffic conversion policy 11 Create sub interfaces on GE interfaces on CGN1 and CGN2 and bind the public and private VPN instances to the sub interfaces Data Preparation No Data 1 MPLS LSR IDs on the CGNs 2 ACL name and rule 1 HA backup group ID 2 CPU number and slot number of the master CPU on CGN1 CPU 0 and slot 1 as described in this example 3 CPU number and slot number of the slave CPU on C...

Page 1407: ... 4 4 4 9 CGN1 mpls CGN1 mpls quit CGN1 mpls ldp CGN1 mpls ldp quit Configure CGN2 HUAWEI system view HUAWEI sysname CGN2 CGN2 mpls lsr id 5 5 5 9 CGN2 mpls CGN2 mpls quit CGN2 mpls ldp CGN2 mpls ldp quit Step 3 Create an ACL rule Configure CGN1 CGN1 acl number 3333 CGN1 acl adv 3333 rule 5 permit ip source 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 CGN1 acl adv 3333 quit CGN1 traffic classifier 1 CGN1 classifier 1 if mat...

Page 1408: ...vrid 1 virtual ip 172 16 5 100 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 priority 200 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 300 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 track service location 1 reduce 60 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 vrrp vrid 1 track interface GigabitEthernet 2 0 1 reduce 60 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 quit Co...

Page 1409: ...on CGN1 and CGN2 Configure CGN1 CGN1 service location 1 CGN1 service location 1 vrrp vrid 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1 1 1 CGN1 service location 1 quit NOTE The configuration of CGN2 is the same as that of CGN1 Details for the configuration procedure are not provided here Step 8 Create a service instance group on CGN1 and CGN2 and bind it to the HA backup group Configure CGN1 CGN1 service instanc...

Page 1410: ...te finished Step 9 Configure VPN instances named vpna and vpnb NOTE The configurations on CGN1 and CGN2 are the same For configuration details see HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide VPN Step 10 Create a NAT instance enable the VPN NAT function bind the NAT instance to a service instance group and allowed VPN instance and configure an address pool and traffic conversion policy Confi...

Page 1411: ... 2 CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 1 ip binding vpn instance vpnb CGN1 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 1 ip address 172 5 2 1 24 CGN1 nat instance nat quit Configure CGN2 CGN2 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 2 1 CGN2 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 1 vlan type dot1q 1 CGN2 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 1 ip binding vpn instance vpna CGN2 GigabitEthernet1 1 1 1 ip address 172 5 2 2 24 CGN2 nat instance nat quit CGN2 interface GigabitEthe...

Page 1412: ... 1 nat bind instance nat traffic policy 1 share mode classifier 1 behavior 1 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 1 undo shutdown ip address 172 16 5 1 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 172 16 5 100 vrrp vrid 1 priority 200 vrrp vrid 1 track service location 1 reduce 60 vrrp vrid 1 track interface GigabitEthernet 2 0 1 reduce 60 vrrp vrid 1 preempt mode timer delay 300 admin vrrp vrid 1 ignore if down ...

Page 1413: ...1 mask 24 vpn instance vpnb nat outbound any address group 1 nat allow access inside vpn instance vpna global vpn instance vpnb mpls lsr id 5 5 5 9 mpls mpls ldp acl number 3333 rule 5 permit ip source 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 traffic classifier 1 operator or if match acl 3333 interface GigabitEthernet1 1 2 undo shutdown ip address 172 16 5 2 255 255 255 0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual ip 172 16 5 100 admin vrrp ...

Page 1414: ...ls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip binding vpn instance vpna ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 interface GigabitEthernet3 0 0 ip address 172 16 1 2 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp interface Loopback0 ip address 1 1 1 9 255 255 255 255 bgp 100 peer 3 3 3 9 as number 100 peer 3 3 3 9 connect interface Loopback0 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Bac...

Page 1415: ...twork 172 16 1 0 0 0 0 25 network 1 1 1 9 0 0 0 0 return l PE2 configuration file sysname PE2 ip vpn instance vpnb ipv4 family route distinguisher 100 1 vpn target 222 2 export extcommunity vpn target 222 2 import extcommunity HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Te...

Page 1416: ...0 mpls mpls ldp interface Loopback0 ip address 3 3 3 9 255 255 255 255 bgp 100 peer 1 1 1 9 as number 100 peer 1 1 1 9 connect interface Loopback0 ipv4 family unicast undo synchronization peer 1 1 1 9 enable ipv4 family vpnv4 policy vpn HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright...

Page 1417: ...72 16 2 0 0 0 0 255 return l P configuration file sysname P mpls lsr id 2 2 2 9 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1 0 0 undo shutdown ip address 172 16 1 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp undo HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 1400 ...

Page 1418: ...72 16 3 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp undo dcn interface GigabitEthernet2 0 2 undo shutdown ip address 172 16 4 1 255 255 255 0 mpls mpls ldp undo dcn ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 1401 ...

Page 1419: ...ss 10 2 1 1 255 255 255 0 bgp 65430 peer 10 2 1 2 as number 100 ipv4 family unicast undo synchronization import route direct peer 10 2 1 2 enable return 12 6 8 Example for Configuring HA Backup Between Two Indirectly Connected CGN Devices for the NAT Service Distributed Deployment Mode Networking Requirements In distributed service deployment CGN1 and CGN2 are deployed on boards of two BRASs no li...

Page 1420: ...8 8 1 CR GE3 0 1 1 1 1 1 GE3 0 1 1 1 1 2 GE2 0 1 192 2 2 10 GE2 0 1 192 2 2 100 IP MAN Switch PC1 PC2 CGN1 CGN2 GE3 0 0 GE3 0 0 Loopback1 8 8 8 1 Loopback1 8 1 1 1 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows 1 Configure user access 2 Enable HA hot standby 3 Create an HA backup group 4 Create a service instance group and bind it to the HA backup group 5 Create an NAT instance and ...

Page 1421: ... Remote backup discriminator 10 of the slave CGN device 9 The user side interface on each CGN device For detailed information see Data Preparation in Figure 12 20 10 IP address of the user side interface on each CGN device For detailed information see Data Preparation in Figure 12 20 11 Index 1 of the user side VRRP backup group on each CGN device 12 Virtual IP address 8 8 8 2 of the user side bac...

Page 1422: ...CGN2 instance group group1 quit Step 5 Create an NAT instance and bind the NAT instance to the service instance group on the CGN device Create an NAT instance on CGN1 and bind it to service instance group 1 CGN1 nat instance nat1 id 1 CGN1 nat instance nat1 service instance group group1 CGN1 nat instance nat1 port range 512 CGN1 nat instance nat1 nat address group address group1 group id 1 10 138 ...

Page 1423: ...quit Step 7 Configure an RBS on the CGN device Configure an RBS on CGN1 and bind it to the NAT instance CGN1 remote backup service natbras CGN1 rm backup srv natbras peer 1 1 1 2 source 1 1 1 1 port 7000 CGN1 rm backup srv natbras ip pool natbras CGN1 rm backup srv natbras nat instance nat1 CGN1 rm backup srv natbras quit Configure an RBS on CGN2 and bind it to the NAT instance CGN2 remote backup ...

Page 1424: ...ckup prf natbras peer backup hot CGN1 rm backup prf natbras vrrp id 1 interface LoopBack1 CGN1 rm backup prf natbras quit Configure an RBP on CGN2 CGN2 remote backup profile natbras CGN2 rm backup prf natbras service type bras CGN2 rm backup prf natbras backup id 10 remote backup service natbras CGN2 rm backup prf natbras peer backup hot CGN2 rm backup prf natbras vrrp id 1 interface LoopBack1 CGN...

Page 1425: ...teway 193 32 0 1 255 255 0 0 section 0 193 32 0 2 193 32 0 254 aaa domain natbras authentication scheme default0 accounting scheme default0 ip pool natbras user group natbras bind nat instance nat1 remote backup service natbras peer 1 1 1 2 source 1 1 1 1 port 7000 ip pool natbras nat instance nat1 remote backup profile natbras service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service natbras peer back...

Page 1426: ...as user group natbras bind nat instance nat1 remote backup service natbras peer 1 1 1 1 source 1 1 1 2 port 7000 ip pool natbras nat instance nat1 remote backup profile natbras service type bras backup id 10 remote backup service natbras peer backup hot vrrp id 1 interface LoopBack1 interface GigabitEthernet2 0 1 10 user vlan 2010 remote backup profile natbras bas access type layer2 subscriber def...

Page 1427: ...return HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability 12 CGN Backing Up HA Configuration Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 1410 ...

Page 1428: ...ting for a reply to test whether the destination device is reachable 802 1ag MAC ping is initiated by a MEP and destined for an MEP or MIP at the same maintenance level within any MA A AMB Active Main Board B BFD Bidirectional Forwarding Detection BGP Border Gateway Protocol C CCM Termination CCMs are generated and also terminated by MEPs A MEP forwards received CCMs at a higher level but drops CC...

Page 1429: ...gh Availability L LSP Label Switched Path M MA A Maintenance Association MA is part of an MD An MD can be divided into one or multiple MAs MD The Maintenance Domain MD refers to the network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP MEP A Maintenance association End Point MEP is an end point within an MA MEP Database There i...

Page 1430: ...vider U URL uniform resource locator UMG Universal Media Gateway V VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol W working mode of EFM OAM The working mode of EFM OAM is an attribute of the interface enabled with EFM OAM EFM OAM has two working modes active mode and passive mode WTR Wait To Restore HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability A Glossary Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Propr...

Page 1431: ...tional Forwarding Detection BGP Border Gateway Protocol D DMTI Desired Min TX Interval DM Detect Multiplier F FRR Fast ReRoute G GR Graceful Restart H HA High Availability L LSP Label Switched Path M HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability B Acronyms and Abbreviations Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 1414 ...

Page 1432: ...nterval RUI Redundant User Information S SMB Second Main Board SP service provider U URL uniform resource locator UMG Universal Media Gateway V VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol W WTR Wait To Restore HUAWEI NetEngine80E 40E Router Configuration Guide Reliability B Acronyms and Abbreviations Issue 02 2014 09 30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co Ltd 1415 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands